WO2022068842A1 - Network management method and related apparatus - Google Patents

Network management method and related apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022068842A1
WO2022068842A1 PCT/CN2021/121527 CN2021121527W WO2022068842A1 WO 2022068842 A1 WO2022068842 A1 WO 2022068842A1 CN 2021121527 W CN2021121527 W CN 2021121527W WO 2022068842 A1 WO2022068842 A1 WO 2022068842A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
matrix
network
sta
group
channel
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/121527
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
雷凯
陈锐彪
陈翔
白铂
张弓
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022068842A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022068842A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/18Network planning tools
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a network management method and related devices.
  • WiFi wireless fidelity
  • AP wireless access point
  • the AP uses the least congested channel scan (LCCS) technique to periodically scan the orthogonal channels, determines the connection status of each channel, and configures the AP to the channel with the least number of AP connections.
  • LCCS least congested channel scan
  • the AP only allocates channels according to the AP's measurement information, or in the case of a fixed AP connected to a station (Station, STA), the AP adjusts the channel accessed by the AP to reduce interference.
  • STA station
  • there is no corresponding planning and management for the connection between the AP and the STA resulting in a large signal interference between the users served by the AP, resulting in low network transmission performance.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a network management method and related apparatuses, which are used to implement management and planning of STAs connected to an AP, which can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission performance.
  • a first aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management method, where the network management method includes:
  • the first communication device acquires first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; then, the first communication The device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, and the first STA includes part or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; A communication device sends a grouping result of the plurality of groups, where the grouping result is used to indicate APs and STAs included in each group of the plurality of groups.
  • the first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information, obtains multiple groups, and sends the grouping results of the multiple groups, so that the AP or the STA receives the grouping results,
  • the connection can be adjusted according to the group to which it belongs, so as to realize the management and planning of the STA connected to the AP. Since the multiple groups are divided by the first communication apparatus according to the first channel parameter information, the implementation of the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving the network transmission performance.
  • the first communication device is a server
  • the first AP includes all APs of the first network
  • the first STA includes all STAs of the first network
  • the first communication device obtains the first channel parameter information, including: the server receives the first channel parameter information sent by the control device, where the first channel parameter information includes the difference between each AP in all APs in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP
  • the first network is a network controlled by the control device; the first communication device sending the grouping results of the multiple groups includes: the server sending the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device.
  • a centralized network management system includes a control device and a server.
  • the server in the centralized network management system realizes the grouping of all APs and all STAs in the first network, and sends the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device, and then the control device groups the APs in the first network.
  • the connected STA performs management and planning.
  • the first channel parameter information includes a channel matrix W, where the channel matrix W is a matrix of K rows multiplied by L columns, K is the number of STAs included in the first network, and L is the first The number of APs included in the network, the channel matrix w ij is the channel gain between the i-th STA and the j-th AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L; the first communication The device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information, and obtains multiple groups, including: the server obtains a first intermediate matrix D by calculating according to the channel matrix W, the first intermediate matrix D 1 is a matrix with K rows by K columns, The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, respectively, and the off-diagonal elements of D
  • the specific content of the first channel parameter information and the grouping process for the server to group all APs and all STAs in the first network are provided.
  • the network nodes of the first network are divided into groups by means of clustering, so as to realize the grouping of all APs and all STAs of the first network, and improve the feasibility of the solution.
  • the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix W of a weighted bipartite graph
  • the weighted bipartite graph includes a first type vertex and a second type vertex
  • the first type vertex represents the first network
  • the STA in the second type vertex represents the AP in the first network
  • the element of the edge weight matrix W is the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph
  • the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph is the first network.
  • the channel gain between the STA and the AP, the first intermediate matrix is the degree matrix of the weighted bipartite graph.
  • the first channel parameter information is represented by an edge weight matrix of a weighted bipartite graph, so that the server can combine the graph method and the spectral clustering method to group all APs and all STAs in the first network , the signal interference degree between the sub-networks formed corresponding to each of the multiple groups obtained in this way is relatively small, and the effective strength in the sub-network is relatively large.
  • the server determines the second intermediate matrix according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D, including: the server determines the third intermediate matrix according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D R, W T is the transpose of W; the server performs singular value decomposition on the third intermediate matrix R to obtain the left singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R and the right singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R; wherein, the third intermediate matrix R
  • the intermediate matrix R U ⁇ V T , the ⁇ is a diagonal matrix, and the V T is the transpose of the right singular matrix V; the corresponding main diagonal element on the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix ⁇ is the left singular matrix
  • the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of U, the corresponding main diagonal element on the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix ⁇ is the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of the right singular matrix V, and r is greater than or equal to 1 and an integer less than or equal to min(K, L), min(K, L) refers to
  • the server selects M column vectors from the left singular matrix U and M column vectors from the right singular matrix V according to the size of the singular values.
  • the column vector contains more feature information that characterizes the weighted bipartite graph, and the server clusters the second intermediate matrix Z by spectral clustering, so that the server has a better grouping effect on the STAs and APs in the first network.
  • the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the signal interference strength between the network nodes (APs or STAs) in the sub-network and outside the sub-network is relatively low.
  • the first communication device performs clustering on the row vectors of the second intermediate matrix according to a clustering algorithm to obtain a first clustering result, including: the server performing the clustering on the second intermediate matrix according to the clustering algorithm.
  • Intermediate matrix The included K+L row vectors are clustered to obtain row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups; the server determines the multiple clusters according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
  • the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups include: the server divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the row vectors of the multiple clusters into the same group.
  • the server clusters the row vectors of the second intermediate matrix according to a clustering algorithm to obtain row vectors included in each cluster, and then determines that each group includes a network node corresponding to each row vector.
  • the network node implements grouping of all APs and all STAs of the first network.
  • the first communication device is the first AP
  • the first STA includes a STA that has established a connection with the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP; the method further includes: The first AP adjusts the STA to which the first AP is connected according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
  • a distributed network management system is adopted, the first AP and the STAs connected to the first AP are grouped through the first AP in the distributed network management system, and then the first AP adjusts the The STA connected to the first AP implements connection management and planning for the STA connected to the first AP, reduces interference between user equipments, and improves network transmission performance.
  • the first AP is the pth AP in the first network
  • the first channel parameter information includes the pth column vector of the channel matrix W
  • the channel matrix w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP
  • i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K
  • j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L
  • p is less than or equal to an integer equal to the L, where L is the number of APs included in the first network, and K is the number of STAs included in the first network
  • the first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information , to obtain a plurality of groupings, including: the first AP obtains the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D according to the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W;
  • the first intermediate matrix The D 1 is a matrix of K rows by K columns, the The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, and the elements on the off-diagonal of D 1 are zero ;
  • D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns,
  • the element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the j-th AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, 0 K ⁇ L is a matrix multiplied by L columns, The elements in 0 K ⁇ L are all zero, 0 L ⁇ K is a matrix of L rows by K columns, and the elements in 0 L ⁇ K are all zero;
  • the first AP acquires the first K main diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D;
  • the first AP is based on the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K main diagonals in the first intermediate matrix D
  • the elements determine the first K row vectors and the K+pth row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q, each row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node, and the network node is the AP or STA in the first network
  • the i-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the i-th STA, and the K+j-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the j-th AP; the first AP
  • the target row vector is clustered according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result; wherein, the target row vector includes the K+pth row vector corresponding to the first AP and the sixth intermediate matrix Q
  • the first AP is based on the p-th row vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first intermediate matrix D
  • the first K main diagonal elements in determine the first K row vectors and the K+pth row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q, including:
  • the first AP is based on the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K main diagonals in the first intermediate matrix D
  • the elements determine the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R the second intermediate matrix
  • the W T is the W transpose
  • the first AP is based on the stochastic gradient descent algorithm and the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R Determine the p row vectors of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M , the degree of approximation between the first matrix X M and the third matrix is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the second matrix Y M and the fourth matrix The degree of approximation is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold;
  • the third matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the left singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the left singular matrix has a corresponding singular value,
  • the M column vectors of the third matrix are M column vectors selected from the left singular matrix in descending order according to the size of the singular values;
  • the fourth matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the right singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R.
  • Each column vector in the right singular matrix has a corresponding singular value
  • the The M column vectors of the fourth matrix are the M column vectors selected from the right singular matrix in descending order of singular values;
  • the M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), the log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2, the min( K, L) refers to taking the minimum value of K and L;
  • the first AP is based on the p +K th main diagonal element bp of the first intermediate matrix D, the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D, and the p th element of the first matrix X M row vectors and the second matrix Y M are calculated to obtain the sixth intermediate matrix The first K row vector and the K+pth row vector of .
  • a specific implementation process for determining the first K row vectors and the K+p th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q by the first AP is provided, because the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q correspond to the first K row vectors respectively.
  • the STA of a network and the K+p th row vector correspond to the first AP, which facilitates the subsequent first AP to cluster the row vectors corresponding to the first AP and the STA connected to the first AP, so as to realize the first AP to the th row vector.
  • the first AP performs clustering on the target row vector according to a clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result, including: the first AP generates a first cluster center according to a first random seed, The first clustering center includes clustering centers corresponding to the multiple clusters, and each cluster corresponds to a clustering center; the first AP determines, according to the first clustering center, to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs the clusters, obtain the row vector included in each cluster in the multiple clusters; the first AP determines the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters, including: when the first preset condition is satisfied , the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
  • the clustering process of the target row vector by the first AP according to the clustering algorithm is provided, which improves the implementability of the solution.
  • the method when the first preset condition is not satisfied, the method further includes:
  • the first AP calculates the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol; the first AP calculates the first average vector of the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters as the The cluster centers corresponding to a plurality of clusters, respectively, obtain the second cluster center; the first AP determines the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs according to the second cluster center; when the second preset is satisfied When conditions are met, the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
  • the first AP clusters the target row vector again according to the clustering algorithm, so as to realize the grouping of the first AP and the STAs connected to the first AP. .
  • the first preset condition includes:
  • the update times of the cluster centers of the clusters corresponding to the multiple groups respectively is greater than or equal to the third preset threshold.
  • the first preset condition may be set as the number of iterations of the foregoing clustering, that is, the number of updates of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively.
  • the first preset condition includes:
  • the first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy
  • the first convergence accuracy is the ratio of the absolute value of the first difference to the first global error
  • the first difference is the difference between the first global error and a preset initialization error
  • the first global error is the sum of the first local errors calculated respectively by all APs in the first network
  • the first local error of the first AP includes a sum of errors corresponding to each of the multiple clusters determined by the first AP;
  • the error corresponding to each cluster is the sum of the errors between the row vector included in each cluster and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster, and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster is the first AP Calculated according to the gossip protocol.
  • another first preset condition is provided. Since the first AP does not have the global interference information of the first network, the first AP can obtain the first local errors of other APs through the gossip protocol, and The first global error is determined by the first local errors of all APs, and the first convergence accuracy is determined according to the first global error and the preset initialization error, that is, the first convergence accuracy is equal to the difference between the first global error and the preset initialization error The absolute value of the difference.
  • the first AP then compares the first convergence accuracy with the preset convergence accuracy, and if it is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy, the first AP can determine that the clustering iteration on the target row vector reaches the convergence degree, so that the first The AP divides the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters, so that the degree of signal interference between the sub-networks formed corresponding to each group in the multiple groups is relatively small, and the effective strength within the sub-network is relatively large.
  • the first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs, including: the first AP sending information of the group to which the first AP belongs, the first AP The information of the group to which the AP belongs is used by the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the first AP.
  • a specific adjustment manner in which the first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs is provided. That is, the STA determines whether to connect to the first AP according to the received information of the group to which the first AP belongs, so as to implement connection management and planning for the STA connected to the first AP.
  • the information of the group to which the first AP belongs includes a first group number of the group to which the first AP belongs; the first AP sends the information of the group to which the first AP belongs, including: the The first AP sends a first beacon frame, where the first beacon frame carries the first group number.
  • a method is provided in which the first AP carries the group number of the group to which the first AP belongs through the beacon frame of the first AP, so that the STA of the first network can determine whether to use the beacon frame. Connect to the first AP.
  • the first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs, including:
  • the first AP determines whether the second STA that has established a connection with the first AP belongs to the same group
  • the first AP keeps providing services for the second STA
  • the first AP determines the group to which the second STA belongs, and sends the first indication information to the third AP;
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the third AP provides services for the second STA, and the third AP and the second STA belong to the same group.
  • the first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs. Whether the two STAs belong to the same group, if not, the first AP can send indication information to a third AP that belongs to the same group as the second STA, and the third AP provides services for the second STA, thereby realizing the Connection management and planning for STAs connected to an AP. Moreover, this implementation is transparent to the STA, and the STA is not aware of it, so that the improvement to the STA can be avoided.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the first AP, first grouping information sent by a fourth AP, where the first grouping information includes grouping information to which the fourth AP belongs and an identifier of the fourth AP , the fourth AP includes APs other than the first AP in the first network; the first AP determines according to the first group information that the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group, and the fifth AP is the Some APs in the fourth AP; the first AP judges whether the priority of the first AP is higher than that of the fifth AP according to the identification of the fifth AP, the identification of the first AP and the preset AP priority rule Priority; if the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP, the first AP selects the first channel by scanning channels, and adjusts the channel accessed by the first AP to the first channel ; The first AP sends first channel allocation information to the fifth AP, where the first channel allocation information is used to instruct the fifth AP
  • the first AP allocates information in the same group and notifies the channel allocation information of multiple APs in the same group, so as to realize multi-AP joint transmission to improve network throughput and network transmission performance.
  • the method further includes: the first AP receives the second channel allocation information sent by the sixth AP, and the second The channel allocation information is information of the second channel selected by the sixth AP, and the sixth AP is the AP with the highest priority in the fifth AP; the first AP accesses the first AP according to the second channel allocation information The channel is adjusted to the second channel.
  • a process of selecting a channel by other APs in the same group and notifying the first AP of the channel allocation information is provided, so that the first AP can adjust the access channel , so as to realize multi-AP joint transmission to improve network throughput and network transmission performance.
  • a second aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management method, where the network management method includes:
  • the control device sends first channel parameter information to the server, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs of the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP, the first channel parameter information
  • the network is a network controlled by the control device; the control device receives grouping results of multiple groups from the server, and the multiple groups include all STAs and all APs in the first network; the control device determines the multiple groups according to the grouping results APs and STAs included in each group; the control device sends second grouping information, where the second grouping information includes information about groups to which APs of the first network belong respectively and information about groups to which STAs of the first network belong respectively .
  • the control device collects the global interference information in the first network, reports it to the server, and then receives the grouping results of multiple packets sent by the server, and then the control device sends the multiple packets.
  • the grouping information of each group is convenient for the AP of the first network to adjust the connected STAs according to the grouping information, so as to realize the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP. Since the multiple groups are divided by the server according to the first channel parameter information, implementing the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving the performance of network transmission .
  • the method further includes: the control device assigns the same channel to APs in the same group in the multiple groups; the control device sending the second grouping information includes: the control device sending the second group information Grouping information, the second grouping information includes channel allocation information corresponding to the multiple groups respectively.
  • control device can further allocate the same channel to the APs in the same group, so that the APs in the same group can access the same channel, thereby realizing multi-AP joint transmission and improving network throughput and network transmission performance.
  • control device assigns the same channel to the APs in the same group in the multiple groups, including: the control device assigns the AP of each group in the multiple groups according to the first channel parameter information Corresponding channels are allocated, wherein the channels allocated by the control device to APs in the same group are the same.
  • control device may allocate channels to APs in the same group in combination with the first channel parameter information, so that the allocated channels conform to the current channel state, thereby improving network transmission performance.
  • a third aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management method, where the network management method includes:
  • the second AP sends second channel parameter information to the control device, where the second channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the second AP and STAs within the signal coverage of the second AP; the second AP receives the control
  • the second grouping information sent by the device includes the information of the groups to which the APs of the first network belong respectively and the information of the groups to which the STAs of the first network belong respectively; the second AP according to the second grouping information Determine the group to which the second AP belongs; the second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
  • the second AP acquires the second channel parameter information and sends it to the control device; then, the control device sends the second grouping information to the second AP, and the second AP adjusts the second grouping information according to the second grouping information
  • the STA connected to the AP thereby implementing the connection management and planning of the STA connected to the second AP by the second AP.
  • the multiple groups are divided by the server according to the first channel parameter information, implementing the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission. performance.
  • the second grouping information further includes third channel assignment information, where the third channel assignment information includes information about a third channel assigned by the control device to the second AP; the method further includes:
  • the second AP adjusts the channel accessed by the second AP to the third channel according to the third channel allocation information.
  • the second AP can adjust the channel accessed by the second AP according to the information of the third channel allocated by the control device, so that multiple APs in the same group can access the same channel, so as to realize multiple AP joint transmission to improve network throughput.
  • the second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs, including: the second AP sends information of the group to which the second AP belongs, and the second AP sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs.
  • the information of the group to which the AP belongs is used to instruct the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the second AP, where the first network is a network controlled by the control device.
  • a management and planning for the second AP to adjust the STA connected to the second AP is provided.
  • the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes a second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs; the second AP sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs, including:
  • the second AP sends a second beacon frame, where the second beacon frame carries the second group number.
  • the second AP may carry the second group number through a beacon frame to notify the STA in the first network and other APs of the group to which the second AP belongs, so that STAs in the same group are connected to on the second AP.
  • the second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs, including: the second AP determining the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs; the The second AP determines whether the second AP and the third STA belong to the same group, and the third STA is a STA that has established a connection with the second AP; if so, the second AP keeps providing services for the third STA; if If no, the second AP determines the seventh AP according to the group to which the third STA belongs, and sends third indication information to the seventh AP; wherein the third indication information is used to indicate that the seventh AP is the third AP
  • the STA provides services, and the seventh AP and the third STA belong to the same group.
  • the second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs. Whether the three STAs belong to the same group, if not, the second AP may send indication information to the seventh AP that belongs to the same group as the third STA, and the seventh AP provides services for the third STA, thereby realizing the Connection management and planning of STAs connected to two APs. Moreover, this implementation is transparent to the STA, and the STA is not aware of it, so that the improvement to the STA can be avoided.
  • a fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management method, where the network management method includes:
  • the fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and sent by the second AP; then, the fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs; the fourth STA The connected AP is adjusted to the second AP.
  • the fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and the group to which the fourth STA belongs, and adjusts the AP to which the fourth STA is connected It is the second AP, so as to realize the connection management and planning of the STA connected to the AP.
  • the multiple groups are divided by the server according to the first channel parameter information, implementing the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission. performance.
  • the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes a second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs; the fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the second AP belongs sent by the second AP, include:
  • the fourth STA receives a second beacon frame sent by the second AP, where the first beacon frame carries the second group number;
  • the fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the second group number
  • the fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group.
  • a manner is provided in which the fourth STA determines the group to which the second AP belongs by receiving the second beacon frame of the second AP, and according to the group to which the second AP belongs and the group to which the fourth STA belongs The group determines whether to connect the second AP.
  • the method further includes:
  • the fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs and is sent by the eighth AP, where the eighth AP is the AP connected before the fourth STA adjusts the connection.
  • the fourth STA first obtains the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs.
  • the eighth AP that belongs to the same group as the fourth STA may obtain the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs.
  • a fifth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management system, where the network management system includes a server, a control device, a second AP, and a fourth STA;
  • the second AP is used to send the second channel parameter information to the control device
  • the control device is configured to receive second channel parameter information sent by a second AP; send first channel parameter information to a server, where the first channel parameter information includes each AP and each AP in all APs of the first network Channel parameter information between STAs within the signal coverage range;
  • the server is configured to receive first channel parameter information sent by the control device; group all APs of the first network and all STAs of the first network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups; send the first channel parameter information to the control device Grouping results of multiple groups, where the grouping results are used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups;
  • the control device is configured to receive grouping results of the multiple groups; determine APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups according to the grouping results; send second grouping information, where the second grouping information includes information about the first network Information about the groups to which the APs belong respectively and information about the groups to which the STAs of the first network belong respectively;
  • the second AP is further configured to determine the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information, and adjust the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
  • the first channel parameter information includes a channel matrix W, where the channel matrix W is a matrix of K rows multiplied by L columns, K is the number of STAs included in the first network, and L is the first network.
  • the number of APs included, the channel matrix w ij is the channel gain between the i-th STA and the j-th AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L
  • the server uses At:
  • a first intermediate matrix D is obtained, and the first intermediate matrix D 1 is a matrix with K rows by K columns,
  • the element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, respectively, and the off-diagonal elements of D 1
  • the elements are all zero
  • D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns
  • the element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the jth AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network
  • 0 K ⁇ L is K rows multiplied by
  • the elements in 0 K ⁇ L are all zero
  • 0 L ⁇ K is a matrix of L rows multiplied by K columns, and the elements in 0 L ⁇ K are all zero
  • the intermediate matrix D determines a second intermediate matrix, each row vector in the second intermediate matrix corresponds to a network node, and the network
  • the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix W of a weighted bipartite graph
  • the weighted bipartite graph includes a first type vertex and a second type vertex
  • the first type vertex represents the first network
  • the STA in the second type vertex represents the AP in the first network
  • the element of the edge weight matrix W is the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph
  • the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph is the first network.
  • the channel gain between the STA and the AP, the first intermediate matrix is the degree matrix of the weighted bipartite graph.
  • the server is specifically used for:
  • the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector, the corresponding main diagonal element on the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix ⁇ is the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of the right singular matrix V, and r is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or an integer equal to min(K, L), min(K, L) refers to the minimum value between K and L; select from the left singular matrix U in descending order of the singular values in the diagonal matrix ⁇
  • Matrix V M where M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), and log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2; according to The fourth intermediate matrix, the fifth intermediate matrix and the first intermediate matrix are calculated to obtain the second intermediate matrix Z, the
  • the server is specifically used for:
  • the second intermediate matrix The included K+L row vectors are clustered to obtain row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups;
  • the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the row vectors of multiple clusters are divided into the same group.
  • control device is also used for:
  • the control device is specifically used for:
  • the second grouping information includes third channel allocation information
  • the third channel allocation information includes information about the third channel allocated by the control device to the second AP
  • the second AP is also used to:
  • the channel accessed by the second AP is adjusted to the third channel according to the third channel allocation information included in the second grouping information.
  • control device is specifically used for:
  • a corresponding channel is allocated to APs in each group of the multiple groups, wherein the channels allocated by the control device to APs in the same group are the same.
  • control device is specifically used for:
  • a corresponding channel is allocated to APs in each group of the multiple groups, wherein the channels allocated by the control device to APs in the same group are the same.
  • the second AP is specifically used for:
  • the information of the group to which the second AP belongs is sent, where the information of the group to which the second AP belongs is used to instruct the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the second AP, and the first network is a network controlled by the control device.
  • the fourth STA is used to receive the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and sent by the second AP; determine that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs; adjust the AP to which it is connected is the second AP.
  • the second AP is specifically used for:
  • the second AP sends a second beacon frame, where the first beacon frame carries the second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs;
  • the fourth STA is specifically used for:
  • the second group number is consistent with the group number of the group to which the fourth STA belongs, it is determined that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group.
  • the fourth STA is also used for:
  • the second AP is specifically used for:
  • a sixth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management system, where the network management system includes a first AP and a first STA;
  • the first AP is used to acquire first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; according to the The first channel parameter information groups the first AP and the first STA to obtain multiple groups, and the first STA includes the STA within the signal coverage of the first AP and having established a connection with the first AP; sending the Grouping results of multiple groups, where the grouping results are used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups; adjust the STAs connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
  • the first AP is the pth AP in the first network
  • the first channel parameter information includes the pth column vector of the channel matrix W
  • the channel matrix w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP
  • i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K
  • j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L
  • p is less than or equal to is an integer equal to the L, where L is the number of APs included in the first network, and K is the number of STAs included in the first network
  • the first AP is specifically used for:
  • the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D is obtained;
  • the first intermediate matrix The D 1 is a matrix of K rows by K columns, the The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, and the elements on the off-diagonal of D 1 are zero ;
  • D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns,
  • the element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the j-th AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, 0 K ⁇ L is a matrix multiplied by L columns, The elements in 0 K ⁇ L are all zero, 0 L ⁇ K is a matrix of L rows by K columns, and the elements in 0 L ⁇ K are all zero;
  • each row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an AP or STA in the first network, and the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node.
  • the i-th row vector of the matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the i-th STA, and the K+j-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the j-th AP;
  • the target row vector is clustered according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result; wherein, the target row vector includes the K+pth row vector corresponding to the first AP and the sixth intermediate matrix Q
  • the row vector corresponding to the first STA in the first K row vectors of , the second clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, and one cluster in the multiple clusters corresponds to a grouping of the multiple groupings;
  • the network nodes respectively included in the plurality of groups are determined according to the row vectors of the plurality of clusters.
  • the first AP is specifically used for:
  • the W T is the W transpose
  • the stochastic gradient descent algorithm and the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R Determine the p row vectors of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M , the degree of approximation between the first matrix X M and the third matrix is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the second matrix Y M and the fourth matrix The degree of approximation is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold;
  • the third matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the left singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the left singular matrix has a corresponding singular value,
  • the M column vectors of the third matrix are M column vectors selected from the left singular matrix in descending order according to the size of the singular values;
  • the fourth matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the right singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R.
  • Each column vector in the right singular matrix has a corresponding singular value
  • the The M column vectors of the fourth matrix are the M column vectors selected from the right singular matrix in descending order of singular values;
  • the M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), the log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2, the min( K, L) refers to taking the minimum value of K and L;
  • the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D, the p th row vector sum of the first matrix X M
  • the second matrix Y M is calculated to obtain the sixth intermediate matrix The first K row vector and the K+pth row vector of .
  • the first AP is specifically used for:
  • the first cluster center includes the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively, and each cluster corresponds to a cluster center;
  • Determining the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters includes: when a first preset condition is satisfied, the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vectors of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
  • the first AP when the first preset condition is not met, the first AP is further used for:
  • the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs is determined according to the second cluster center; when the second preset condition is satisfied, the first AP determines the network corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters Nodes are grouped into the same group.
  • the first preset condition includes:
  • the update times of the cluster centers of the clusters corresponding to the multiple groups respectively is greater than or equal to the third preset threshold.
  • the first preset condition includes:
  • the first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy
  • the first convergence accuracy is the ratio of the absolute value of the first difference to the first global error
  • the first difference is the difference between the first global error and a preset initialization error
  • the first global error is the sum of the first local errors calculated respectively by all APs in the first network
  • the first local error of the first AP includes a sum of errors corresponding to each of the multiple clusters determined by the first AP;
  • the error corresponding to each cluster is the sum of the errors between the row vector included in each cluster and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster, and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster is the first AP Calculated according to the gossip protocol.
  • the first AP is specifically used for:
  • the network management system further includes a fifth STA, and the fifth STA does not establish a connection with the first AP;
  • the fifth STA adjusts the AP connected to the fifth STA to the first AP.
  • the information of the group to which the first AP belongs includes a first group number of the group to which the first AP belongs; the first AP is specifically used for:
  • the fifth STA is specifically used for:
  • the fifth STA determines that the first AP and the fifth STA belong to the same group according to the first group number and the group number to which the fifth STA belongs.
  • the network management system further includes a second STA; the first AP is specifically used for:
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the third AP provides services for the second STA, and the third AP and the second STA belong to the same group.
  • the network management system further includes a fifth AP; the first AP is further used for:
  • Receive first grouping information sent by a fourth AP where the first grouping information includes grouping information to which the fourth AP belongs and an identifier of the fourth AP, where the fourth AP includes elements other than the first AP in the first network AP;
  • the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group, and the fifth AP is a part of the AP in the fourth AP; the first AP
  • the identification and the preset AP priority rule determine whether the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP;
  • the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP, selecting the first channel by scanning channels, and adjusting the channel accessed by the first AP to the first channel;
  • the fifth AP is configured to determine the first channel according to the first channel allocation information, and adjust the channel accessed by the fifth AP to the first channel.
  • the first AP is also used for:
  • the priority of the first AP is lower than the priority of the fifth AP
  • the second channel allocation information sent by the sixth AP is received, and the second channel allocation information is the information of the second channel selected by the sixth AP, and the second channel allocation information is sent by the sixth AP.
  • Six APs are the APs with the highest priority among the fifth APs;
  • the channel accessed by the first AP is adjusted to the second channel according to the second channel allocation information.
  • a seventh aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a first communication device, where the first communication device includes:
  • a transceiver module configured to acquire first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP;
  • a grouping module configured to group the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, where the first STA includes part or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP STA;
  • the transceiver module is configured to send grouping results of the multiple groups, where the grouping results are used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
  • the communication device is a server
  • the first AP includes all APs of the first network
  • the first STA includes all STAs of the first network
  • the transceiver module is specifically configured to:
  • the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs of the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP, the The first network is a network controlled by the control device;
  • the transceiver module is specifically used for:
  • the grouping results of the plurality of groups are sent to the control device.
  • the first channel parameter information includes a channel matrix W, where the channel matrix W is a matrix of K rows multiplied by L columns, K is the number of STAs included in the first network, and L is the first The number of APs included in the network, the channel matrix w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L;
  • This grouping module is specifically used for:
  • a first intermediate matrix D is obtained, and the first intermediate matrix D 1 is a matrix with K rows by K columns,
  • the element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, respectively, and the off-diagonal elements of D 1
  • the elements are all zero
  • D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns
  • the element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the jth AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network
  • 0 K ⁇ L is K rows multiplied by
  • the elements in 0 K ⁇ L are all zero
  • 0 L ⁇ K is a matrix of L rows multiplied by K columns, and the elements in 0 L ⁇ K are all zero;
  • each row vector in the second intermediate matrix corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an STA or an AP in the first network;
  • the row vectors of the second intermediate matrix are clustered according to a clustering algorithm, and a first clustering result is obtained.
  • the first clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to the multiple clusters. a group within a group;
  • the network nodes respectively included in the plurality of groups are determined according to the row vectors of the plurality of clusters.
  • the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix W of a weighted bipartite graph
  • the weighted bipartite graph includes a first type vertex and a second type vertex
  • the first type vertex represents the first network
  • the STA in the second type vertex represents the AP in the first network
  • the element of the edge weight matrix W is the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph
  • the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph is the first network.
  • the channel gain between the STA and the AP, the first intermediate matrix is the degree matrix of the weighted bipartite graph.
  • the grouping module is specifically used for:
  • W T is the transpose of W
  • the main diagonal element corresponding to the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix ⁇ is the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of the left singular matrix U, and the corresponding main diagonal element on the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix ⁇
  • the line element is the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of the right singular matrix V, where r is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to min(K, L), which refers to the K and the The minimum value in L;
  • the second intermediate matrix Z is calculated and obtained according to the fourth intermediate matrix, the fifth intermediate matrix and the first intermediate matrix, and the
  • the grouping module is specifically used for:
  • the second intermediate matrix The included K+L row vectors are clustered to obtain row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups;
  • the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the row vectors of multiple clusters are divided into the same group.
  • the communication device is the first AP
  • the first STA includes a STA that has established a connection with the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP;
  • the first AP further includes a packet Management module, the group management module is used for:
  • the communication device is the pth AP in the first network
  • the first channel parameter information includes the pth column vector of the channel matrix W
  • the channel matrix w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP
  • i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K
  • j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L
  • p is less than or equal to 1 or an integer equal to the L
  • L is the number of APs included in the first network
  • K is the number of STAs included in the first network
  • This grouping module is specifically used for:
  • the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D is obtained;
  • the first intermediate matrix The D 1 is a matrix of K rows by K columns, the The element a i on the main diagonal of the D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, and the off-diagonal line of the D 1 The elements of are all zero;
  • the D 2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns, the The element b j on the main diagonal of the D2 is the sum of the channel gains between the jth AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, 0 K ⁇ L is multiplied by the L column , the elements in 0 K ⁇ L are all zero, 0 L ⁇ K is a matrix of L rows by K columns, and the elements in 0 L ⁇ K are all zero;
  • each row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an AP or STA in the first network, and the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node.
  • the i-th row vector of the matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the i-th STA, and the K+j-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the j-th AP;
  • the target row vector is clustered to obtain the second clustering result
  • the target row vector includes the K+p th row vector corresponding to the first AP and the row vector corresponding to the first STA among the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q
  • the The second clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one group of the multiple groups
  • the network nodes respectively included in the plurality of groups are determined according to the row vectors of the plurality of clusters.
  • the grouping module is specifically used for:
  • this third intermediate matrix R Determine the p row vectors of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M , the degree of approximation between the first matrix X M and the third matrix is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the second matrix Y M and the fourth matrix The degree of approximation is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold;
  • the third matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the left singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the left singular matrix has a corresponding singular value,
  • the M column vectors of the third matrix are M column vectors selected from the left singular matrix in descending order according to the size of the singular values;
  • the fourth matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the right singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R.
  • Each column vector in the right singular matrix has a corresponding singular value
  • the The M column vectors of the fourth matrix are the M column vectors selected from the right singular matrix in descending order of singular values;
  • the M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), the log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2, the min( K, L) refers to the minimum value in this K and this L;
  • the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D, the p th row vector sum of the first matrix X M
  • the second matrix Y M is calculated to obtain the sixth intermediate matrix The first K row vector and the K+pth row vector of .
  • the grouping module is specifically used for:
  • the first cluster center includes the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively, and each cluster corresponds to a cluster center;
  • the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters are divided into the same group.
  • the grouping module is further configured to:
  • the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters are divided into the same group.
  • the first preset condition includes:
  • the update times of the cluster centers of the clusters corresponding to the multiple groups respectively is greater than or equal to the third preset threshold.
  • the first preset condition includes:
  • the first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy
  • the first convergence accuracy is the ratio of the absolute value of the first difference to the first global error
  • the first difference is the difference between the first global error and a preset initialization error
  • the first global error is the sum of the first local errors calculated respectively by all APs in the first network
  • the first local error of the first AP includes a sum of errors corresponding to each of the multiple clusters determined by the first AP;
  • the error corresponding to each cluster is the sum of the errors between the row vector included in each cluster and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster, and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster is the first AP Calculated according to the gossip protocol.
  • the group management module sends the information of the group to which the first AP belongs through the transceiver module, and the information of the group to which the first AP belongs is used for the STA in the first network to determine whether to access or not First AP.
  • the information of the group to which the first AP belongs includes a first group number of the group to which the first AP belongs; the group management module sends a first beacon frame through the transceiver module, and the first beacon frame is sent by the group management module.
  • the beacon frame carries the first packet number.
  • the group management module is specifically used for:
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the third AP provides services for the second STA, and the third AP and the second STA belong to the same group.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • Receive first grouping information sent by a fourth AP where the first grouping information includes grouping information to which the fourth AP belongs and an identifier of the fourth AP, where the fourth AP includes elements other than the first AP in the first network AP;
  • the group management module is also used to:
  • the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group, and the fifth AP is a part of the APs in the fourth AP;
  • the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP, selecting the first channel by scanning channels, and adjusting the channel accessed by the first AP to the first channel;
  • the transceiver module is also used to:
  • the transceiver module is further configured to:
  • the second channel allocation information is the information of the second channel selected by the sixth AP, and the sixth AP is the AP with the highest priority in the fifth AP;
  • the group management module is also used to:
  • the channel accessed by the first AP is adjusted to the second channel according to the second channel allocation information.
  • control device includes:
  • a transceiver module configured to send first channel parameter information to the server, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs of the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP,
  • the first network is a network controlled by the control device; receiving grouping results of multiple groups from the server, where the multiple groups include all STAs and all APs in the first network;
  • a grouping management module configured to determine APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups according to the grouping result
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send second grouping information, where the second grouping information includes information about groups to which APs of the first network respectively belong and information about groups to which STAs of the first network respectively belong.
  • the group management module is further used for:
  • the transceiver module is specifically used for:
  • the second grouping information includes channel allocation information corresponding to the multiple groups respectively.
  • the group management module is also used for:
  • a corresponding channel is allocated to APs in each group of the multiple groups, wherein the channels allocated by the control device to APs in the same group are the same.
  • a ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a second AP, where the second AP includes:
  • a transceiver module configured to send second channel parameter information to the control device, where the second channel parameter information includes the channel parameter information between the second AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the second AP; receive the transmission from the control device
  • the second grouping information, the second grouping information includes the information of the groups to which the APs of the first network belong respectively and the information of the groups to which the STAs of the first network belong respectively;
  • the group management module is configured to determine the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information; and adjust the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
  • the second grouping information further includes third channel assignment information, and the third channel assignment information includes information about the third channel assigned by the control device to the second AP; the grouping management module also uses At:
  • the channel accessed by the second AP is adjusted to the third channel according to the third channel allocation information.
  • the group management module sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs through the transceiver module, and the information of the group to which the second AP belongs is used to instruct the STA in the first network to determine whether to access or not
  • the second AP and the first network are networks controlled by the control device.
  • the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes a second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs
  • the group management module sends a second beacon frame through the transceiver module, and the second beacon frame carries the second group number.
  • the group management module is specifically used for:
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the seventh AP provides services for the third STA, and the seventh AP and the third STA belong to the same group.
  • a tenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a fourth STA, where the fourth STA includes:
  • a transceiver module configured to receive information sent by the second AP of the grouping to which the second AP belongs;
  • a grouping management module configured to determine that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to a group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs; and adjust the connected AP to be the second AP.
  • the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes the second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs; the transceiver module is specifically used for:
  • the group management module is specifically used for:
  • the second group number is consistent with the group number of the group to which the fourth STA belongs, it is determined that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • An eleventh aspect of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device includes: a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores a computer program or computer instructions
  • the processor is used to call and execute the computer program or computer instructions stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the first aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • a twelfth aspect of the present application provides a control device, the control device includes: a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores a computer program or computer instructions
  • the processor is used to call and execute the computer program or computer instructions stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the second aspect.
  • control device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • a thirteenth aspect of the present application provides a second AP, where the second AP includes: a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores a computer program or computer instructions
  • the processor is used to call and execute the computer program or computer instructions stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the third aspect.
  • the second AP further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • a fourteenth aspect of the present application provides a fourth STA, where the fourth STA includes: a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores a computer program or computer instructions
  • the processor is used to call and execute the computer program or computer instructions stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the fourth aspect.
  • the fourth STA further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • a fifteenth aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions, characterized in that, when run on a computer, the computer is caused to perform any one of the first, second, third and fourth aspects. an implementation.
  • a sixteenth aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, comprising computer instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform any one of the first, second, third and fourth aspects any of the implementations.
  • a seventeenth aspect of the present application provides a chip device, comprising a processor for invoking a computer program or computer instructions in the memory, so that the processor executes the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect and the fourth aspect Any implementation of any of the aspects.
  • the chip device further includes a memory, and the memory is used for storing computer programs or computer instructions.
  • the chip arrangement is composed of chips, and may also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory through an interface.
  • the embodiments of the present application have the following advantages:
  • the first communication device acquires first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP;
  • the first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, where the first STA includes part or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; then , the first communication apparatus sends the grouping result of the multiple groups, where the grouping result is used to indicate the AP and the STA included in each of the multiple groups.
  • the AP or STA when the AP or STA receives the grouping result, it can adjust the connection according to the group to which it belongs, so as to realize the management and planning of the STA connected to the AP. Since the multiple groups are divided by the first communication apparatus according to the first channel parameter information, the implementation of the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving the network transmission performance.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic structural diagram of a server according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1C is a schematic structural diagram of a control device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1D is a schematic structural diagram of an AP according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1E is a schematic structural diagram of an STA according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2B is a schematic structural diagram of a first AP according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2C is a schematic structural diagram of a second STA according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 4B is a schematic diagram of a weighted bipartite graph according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 4C-1 is a schematic diagram of a connection state between a STA and an AP in the first network under a traditional single-AP transmission mechanism
  • 4C-2 is a schematic diagram of the grouping distribution of a plurality of groupings divided according to regions;
  • FIG. 4C-3 is a schematic diagram of group distribution of multiple groups obtained by dividing a server in a centralized network management system according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • 4D is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of a second beacon frame according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5B is a schematic diagram of group distribution of multiple groups obtained by multiple APs in a distributed network management system according to an embodiment of the present application
  • 6A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 6B is a schematic structural diagram of a first broadcast message according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 8B is a schematic structural diagram of a second broadcast message according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a control device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a second AP according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a fourth STA according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is another schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a network management method and a related apparatus, which are used to implement management and planning of STAs connected to an AP, which can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission performance.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 802.11 series standard.
  • the network nodes that a WLAN can include are stations (Station, STA), and the stations include an access point type station (access point, AP) and a non-access point type station (None Access Point Station, Non-AP STA).
  • AP access point type station
  • STA non-access point type station
  • Access point type sites also known as wireless access points or hotspots, etc.
  • APs are access points for mobile users to access wired networks. They are mainly deployed in homes, buildings, and campuses, with a typical coverage radius ranging from tens of meters to hundreds of meters. Of course, they can also be deployed outdoors.
  • AP is equivalent to a bridge connecting wired network and wireless network. Its main function is to connect various wireless network clients together, and then connect the wireless network to Ethernet.
  • the AP may be a terminal device or a network device with a WiFi chip.
  • the AP may be a device supporting the 802.11ax standard.
  • the AP may be a device supporting multiple WLAN standards such as 802.11be, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, and 802.11a.
  • a non-access point station can be a wireless communication chip, a wireless sensor or a wireless communication terminal.
  • a wireless communication chip for example: mobile phones that support WiFi communication, tablet computers that support WiFi communication, set-top boxes that support WiFi communication, smart TVs that support WiFi communication, smart wearable devices that support WiFi communication, in-vehicle communication that supports WiFi communication Devices and computers that support WiFi communication.
  • the STA may be a terminal device or a network device with a Wi-Fi chip.
  • the site may support the 802.11ax standard, and further optionally, the site may support multiple WLAN standards such as 802.11be, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, and 802.11a.
  • wireless signal interference between devices is caused by dense deployment of devices in a wireless network, so the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to network management and planning of other wireless communication networks where devices are densely deployed.
  • a centralized network management system in order to implement management and planning of the WiFi network, two possible network management systems are introduced in the embodiments of the present application, namely, a centralized network management system and a distributed network management system. 1A and FIG. 2A are described in detail below.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network management system shown in FIG. 1A is a centralized network management system.
  • the centralized network management system includes servers, control devices, APs and STAs in the WiFi network (only 5 APs and 3 STAs are shown in FIG. 1A ).
  • the control device acquires the first channel parameter information, and sends the first channel parameter information to the server.
  • the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs in the WiFi network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP.
  • the signal coverage range of AP2 is the range within the dotted circle shown in FIG. 1A
  • the range within the dotted circle includes STA1 and STA2 .
  • the control device can acquire the channel parameter information between the AP2 and the STA1 and STA2 respectively. Similar to other APs in the WiFi network, the details are not described one by one.
  • the server groups all APs and STAs in the WiFi network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, and then feeds back the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device.
  • the control device manages and plans the WiFi network according to the grouping result.
  • the management and planning of the WiFi network by the control device mainly include: the control device notifies the groups to which APs and STAs in the WiFi network belong. Then, the AP in the WiFi network adjusts the STA to which the AP is connected, so as to realize the connection management of the STA and reduce the mutual interference between the devices. Further, the control device can also allocate the same channel to the APs in the same group, so that multiple APs in the same group can realize multi-AP joint transmission, so as to meet the requirements of high throughput and low delay of the WiFi network, and also Improve spectrum utilization.
  • the server is a cloud server, or a cloud computing center server, or other types of servers, which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the control device is a central controller, or a master (master) AP, etc., which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • FIG. 1A Based on the network management system shown in FIG. 1A , the following describes the structures of the server, control device, AP and STA of the network management system through FIG. 1B , FIG. 1C , FIG. 1D and FIG. 1E respectively.
  • the AP shown in FIG. 1C is any AP in the first network
  • the STA shown in FIG. 1E is any STA in the first network.
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic structural diagram of a server according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the server includes a first transceiver module 101 and a first grouping module 102 .
  • the transceiver module 101 is configured to receive the first channel parameter information sent by the control device.
  • the grouping module 102 is configured to group all APs and all STAs in the first network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain grouping results of multiple groups;
  • the transceiver module 101 is further configured to send the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device.
  • the server shown in FIG. 1B is configured to perform some or all of the steps in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and some or all of the steps performed by the server in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • the transceiver module 101 is configured to execute step 301 and step 303 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , and step 402 and step 404 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • the grouping module 102 is configured to perform step 302 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and step 403 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • FIG. 1C is a schematic structural diagram of a control device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the control device includes a transceiver module 103 and a group management module 104 .
  • the transceiver module 103 is configured to receive the first channel parameter information reported by the AP or STA in the WiFi network, and send the first channel parameter information to the server; receive the grouping results of multiple groups sent by the server;
  • the group management module 104 is configured to determine APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups according to the grouping results of the multiple groups.
  • the transceiver module 103 is further configured to send the grouping information of the multiple groups to the AP or the STA in the WiFi network.
  • the group management module 104 is further configured to allocate the same channel to APs in the same group.
  • the transceiver module 103 is further configured to send channel allocation information corresponding to each of the multiple groups to the AP or the STA in the WiFi network.
  • the control device shown in FIG. 1C is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the control device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • the transceiver module 103 is used to execute step 401 and step 405 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A later.
  • the group management module 104 is configured to execute step 405a in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A hereinafter.
  • FIG. 1D is a schematic structural diagram of an AP according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the AP includes a transceiver module 105 and a group management module 106 .
  • the AP includes a signal measurement module 107 .
  • the transceiver module 105 is configured to receive grouping information of multiple groups sent by the control device.
  • the group management module 106 is configured to determine the group to which the AP belongs according to the group information; and adjust the STA connected to the AP according to the group to which the AP belongs.
  • the grouping information further includes channel allocation information allocated by the control device to the AP.
  • the group management module 106 is further configured to determine the corresponding channel according to the channel allocation information, and adjust the channel accessed by the first AP to the channel corresponding to the channel allocation information.
  • the AP can measure the channel parameter information of the AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the AP.
  • the signal measurement module 107 is configured to measure the channel parameter information of the AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the AP.
  • the AP shown in FIG. 1D is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the second AP shown in FIG. 4A later.
  • the transceiver module 105 is used for step 401 and step 405 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A later.
  • the group management module 106 is configured to execute step 406 and step 407 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A later.
  • the signal measurement module 107 is configured to perform measurement to obtain the second channel parameter information of step 401 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • FIG. 1E is a schematic structural diagram of an STA according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the STA includes a transceiver module 108 and a packet management module 109 .
  • the STA further includes a signal measurement module 110 .
  • the transceiver module 108 is configured to receive grouping information of multiple groups sent by the control device.
  • the group management module 109 is configured to determine the group to which the STA belongs according to the group information, and adjust the AP to which the STA is connected according to the group to which the STA belongs.
  • the STA may measure channel parameter information between the STA and the AP in the first network.
  • the signal measurement module 110 is configured to measure channel parameter information between the STA and the AP in the first network.
  • the transceiver module 108 is further configured to send the channel parameter information to the AP connected to the STA, and then the AP sends the information to the control device.
  • the STA is configured to perform some or all of the steps performed by the fourth STA in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A later.
  • the transceiver module 108 is used to execute step 407b in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • the group management module 109 is configured to execute steps 407c to 407e in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4A
  • control device may also group all APs and STAs in the WiFi network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, which are grouped by the control device.
  • the control device manages and plans the WiFi network according to the grouping result, which is not specifically limited in this application. That is, the server may not be included in the network management system shown in Fig. 1A.
  • FIG. 2A is another schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network management system shown in FIG. 2A is a distributed network management system.
  • the distributed network management system includes multiple APs and multiple STAs (only 5 APs and 3 STAs are shown in FIG. 2A ).
  • AP2 acquires first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information of the AP2 and the STAs within the signal coverage of the AP2. Then, the AP1 groups the AP2 and the STAs connected to the AP2 within the signal coverage of the AP2 according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups.
  • the AP2 performs connection management on the STA connected to the AP2 and adjusts the channel accessed by the AP2 according to the grouping results of the multiple groups, and performs similar operations on other APs, thereby implementing connection management for the STA in the WiFi network.
  • the connection management of the STA is realized, and the mutual interference between the devices is reduced.
  • multiple APs in the same group can access the same channel, so that multiple APs in the same group can realize multi-AP joint transmission, so as to meet the requirements of high throughput and low latency of WiFi network, and also improve the frequency spectrum. utilization.
  • information exchange can be performed between different APs, that is, the APs can group the APs and STAs of the WiFi network in a coordinated manner. Specifically, information can be exchanged between different APs through a wired network. For example, Ethernet, etc.
  • the second STA is a STA within the signal coverage of the first AP.
  • FIG. 2B is a schematic structural diagram of a first AP according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first AP includes a transceiver module 201 , a grouping module 202 and a grouping management module 203 .
  • the first AP further includes a signal measurement module 204 .
  • the transceiver module 201 is used to obtain first channel parameter information
  • the grouping module 202 is configured to group the first AP and the first STA that is within the signal coverage of the first AP and has established a connection with the first AP according to the first channel parameter information, to obtain multiple groups, and obtain multiple The grouping result of each group and the group to which the first AP belongs.
  • the group management module 203 is configured to adjust the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
  • the transceiver module 201 is further configured to send the grouping results of the multiple groups.
  • the first AP may measure channel parameter information of the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
  • the signal measurement module 204 is configured to measure the first channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
  • the first AP is used to execute steps 301 to 303 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and execute the first AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , and FIG. 8A .
  • the transceiver module 201 is configured to execute step 501 , step 505 and step 509 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A .
  • the grouping module 201 is configured to execute step 502 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A .
  • the group management module 203 is used to execute step 504 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A .
  • FIG. 2C is a schematic structural diagram of a second STA according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second STA includes a transceiver module 205 and a packet management module 206 .
  • the second STA further includes a signal measurement module 207 .
  • the transceiver module 205 is configured to receive grouping results of multiple groups sent by the first AP.
  • the group management module 206 is configured to determine the group to which the second STA belongs according to the grouping result, and adjust the AP to which the second STA is connected according to the group to which the second STA belongs.
  • the second STA may measure channel parameter information between the second STA and the first AP.
  • the signal measurement module 207 is configured to measure channel parameter information between the second STA and the first AP; the transceiver module 205 is configured to send the signal parameter information to the first AP.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network management method includes:
  • the first communication apparatus acquires first channel parameter information.
  • the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
  • the first channel parameter information includes a signal gain between the first AP and a STA within a signal coverage of the first AP, where the signal gain is also referred to as received signal strength or interference signal strength.
  • the measurement method of the signal strength includes the following two possible implementation methods:
  • the first AP sends data packets on the channel accessed by the first AP, and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP receive the data packets sent by the first AP, and measure and receive the data sent by the first AP respectively. reported received signal strength.
  • STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP access the channel accessed by the first AP.
  • the first AP receives the data packets sent by the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; then, the first AP measures the received signal strength of the data packets sent by the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP respectively.
  • the first communication device may be a server, and the first channel parameter information includes each AP in all APs in the first network and the signal coverage of each AP. channel parameter information between STAs. That is, the first channel parameter information can be understood as the global interference information of the first network, and the global interference information includes the communication between each AP in all APs in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP. Interfering signal strength.
  • the first AP includes all APs in the first network.
  • the first communication device may be the first AP.
  • the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP. That is, the first channel parameter information can be understood as the local interference information of the first network obtained by the first AP, and the local interference information includes interference signals between the first AP and STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP strength.
  • the first AP acquiring the first channel parameter information, please refer to the related introduction in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A later.
  • the first channel parameter information includes the channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
  • the first channel parameter information may also include channel parameter information between the first AP and a STA within a preset range of the first AP.
  • the preset range is a range divided according to geographic location; or, the preset range is a range where the STA corresponding to the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold is located.
  • the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold is the channel gain between the first AP measured by the first AP and the STA corresponding to the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold, or the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold
  • the signal gain equal to or equal to the fourth preset threshold is the channel gain between the STA and the first AP measured respectively by the STA corresponding to the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold.
  • Consideration factors for the setting of the fourth preset threshold include the computing capability of the first communication device, the precision requirement for the grouping result, the network state and channel of the first network, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the fourth preset threshold may be 5dB (decibel) or 10dB.
  • only the first channel parameter information includes the channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP as an example for description, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the first communication apparatus groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups.
  • the first STA includes some or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
  • the first STA includes each AP of all APs in the first network and all STAs within the signal coverage of each AP. That is, the first STA includes all STAs in the first network.
  • the specific execution flow of the server please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • the first STA includes a STA that has established a connection with the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP.
  • the distributed network management system please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A for the specific execution flow of the first AP.
  • the first communication apparatus sends the grouping results of the multiple groups.
  • the grouping result is used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
  • the first communication device acquires first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP;
  • the first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, where the first STA includes part or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; then , the first communication apparatus sends the grouping result of the multiple groups, where the grouping result is used to indicate the AP and the STA included in each of the multiple groups.
  • the AP or STA when the AP or STA receives the grouping result, it can adjust the connection according to the group to which it belongs, so as to realize the management and planning of the STA connected to the AP.
  • the multiple groups are divided by the first communication apparatus according to the first channel parameter information, which can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission performance.
  • FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network management method includes:
  • the second AP sends second channel parameter information to the control device.
  • the second channel parameter information is the channel parameter information between the second AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the second AP, the second AP is an AP in the first network, and the first network is controlled by the control device The internet.
  • the first network is a WiFi network controlled by the control device shown in FIG. 1A .
  • the STA in the WiFi network selects an AP from the WiFi network for connection according to the existing method.
  • the STA may connect with the AP corresponding to the beacon frame with the highest signal strength.
  • the APs in the WiFi network can select a channel and access the channel through the prior art.
  • the AP selects a channel and accesses the channel through the LCSS technology.
  • the second AP measures the second channel parameter information between the second AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP, and sends the second channel parameter information to the control device.
  • Other APs in the WiFi network also perform corresponding measurements and report channel parameter information.
  • the control device may collect the first channel parameter information between each AP in all APs in the WiFi network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP.
  • the control device sends first channel parameter information to the server.
  • the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP.
  • the first channel parameter information includes a channel matrix W, and the channel matrix
  • the channel matrix W is a matrix with K rows multiplied by L columns, K is the number of STAs included in the first network, and L is the number of APs included in the first network.
  • the element w ij in the channel matrix W is the channel gain between the i-th STA and the j-th AP (it may also be the average channel gain), i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, and j is greater than or equal to K or an integer equal to 1 and less than or equal to L.
  • the first network includes K STAs and L APs.
  • the vertex set V can be divided into two mutually disjoint vertex subsets V STA and vertex subset V AP , and the vertex subset V STA and vertex subset V AP satisfy the following equations (1) and (2):
  • V STA ⁇ V AP V Formula (1)
  • the weighted bipartite graph includes two types of vertices, the first type of vertex is an STA in the first network, and the second type of vertex is an AP in the first network.
  • edge set E of the weighted bipartite graph represents the channel condition between the STA in the first network and the AP in the first network.
  • the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph represents the channel gain between the STA and the AP in the first network, that is, the weight marked on the edge of the weighted bipartite graph. For example, if STA1 is the first STA in the first network, and AP1 is the first AP in the first network, then the edge weight of the edge connecting STA1 and AP1 is w 11 , indicating that the connection between STA1 and AP1 is channel gain.
  • the edge weights of other edges in FIG. 4B are similar, and will not be described one by one here.
  • the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix of the weighted bipartite graph.
  • the server groups all APs and all STAs in the first network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups.
  • Step 403 is described below with reference to the first channel parameter information including the channel matrix W in the above step 402. Specifically, step 403 specifically includes steps 403a to 403d.
  • Step 403a The server calculates and obtains the first intermediate matrix D according to the channel matrix W.
  • the first intermediate matrix D 1 is a matrix with K rows*K columns
  • the element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, respectively, and the off-diagonal line of D 1 All elements on are zero.
  • D 2 is a matrix with L rows by L columns,
  • the element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the j-th AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, respectively.
  • 0 K ⁇ L is a matrix of K rows by L columns, and the elements in 0 K ⁇ L are all zero.
  • 0 L ⁇ K is a matrix of L rows by K columns, and the elements in 0 L ⁇ K are all zero.
  • step 403a is specifically as follows: the server generates a degree matrix of the edge weight matrix W according to the edge weight matrix W.
  • each diagonal element of the degree matrix of the edge weight matrix W is the degree of the node corresponding to each diagonal element, and the degree of the node corresponding to each diagonal element is the weighted dichotomy in FIG. 4B
  • the sum of the edge weights of the edges associated with the node in the graph that is, the edges connected to the node in the weighted bipartite graph). For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the nodes connected to STA1 include AP1, AP2, AP3 and AP4, then the degree of the STA1 is the edge weight of the edge connected between the STA1 and AP1, the degree of the connection between the STA1 and AP2 The sum of the edge weight of the edge, the edge weight of the edge connected between the STA1 and AP3, and the edge weight of the edge connected between the STA1 and AP4.
  • the degree matrix of the edge weight matrix W is the above-mentioned first intermediate matrix D.
  • Step 403b The server determines the second intermediate matrix Z according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D.
  • each row vector in the second intermediate matrix Z corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an STA or an AP in the first network.
  • Step 1 The server determines the third intermediate matrix R according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D.
  • the third intermediate matrix WT is the transpose of the channel matrix W.
  • Step 2 The server performs singular value decomposition on the third intermediate matrix R to obtain the left singular matrix U and the right singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R,
  • the third intermediate matrix R U ⁇ V T , ⁇ is the diagonal matrix obtained by the singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and V T is the transpose of the right singular matrix V obtained by the singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R.
  • Step 3 The server selects the corresponding M column vectors from the left singular matrix U in descending order of the singular values in the diagonal matrix ⁇ , to obtain the fourth intermediate matrix U M , and according to the singular values in the diagonal matrix ⁇
  • the corresponding M column vectors are selected from the right singular matrix V in descending order of value size to obtain the fifth intermediate matrix V M .
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L).
  • log 2 (K+L) refers to taking the logarithm of K+L in base 2
  • min(K, L) refers to taking the minimum value from K and L.
  • the value of M may be the number of groups of the multiple groups.
  • the number of groups of the plurality of groups is an integer greater than 1 and less than min(K, L).
  • the value of M can also be determined in combination with the actual situation, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the above example of the value range of M is determined by the analysis of experimental data.
  • the server will determine the value of the STA and AP in the first network.
  • the grouping effect is better. For example, the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the signal interference strength between the network nodes (APs or STAs) in the sub-network and outside the sub-network is relatively low.
  • Step 4 The server calculates and obtains the second intermediate matrix Z according to the fourth intermediate matrix, the fifth intermediate matrix and the first intermediate matrix.
  • each row vector in the second intermediate matrix Z corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an STA or an AP in the first network.
  • the i-th row vector of the second intermediate matrix Z is the row vector corresponding to the i-th STA in the first network
  • the K+j-th row vector of the second intermediate matrix Z is the j-th row vector in the first network.
  • Step 403c The server performs clustering on the row vectors of the second intermediate matrix according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a first clustering result.
  • the first clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups.
  • the M column vectors selected by the server from the left singular matrix U and the M column vectors in the right singular matrix V according to the size of the singular values include more features representing the weighted bipartite graph information
  • the server performs clustering on the second intermediate matrix Z by means of spectral clustering, so that the server performs better grouping of STAs and APs in the first network.
  • the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the signal interference strength between the network nodes (APs or STAs) in the sub-network and outside the sub-network is relatively low.
  • the clustering algorithm is k-means (k-means) algorithm, k-means++ algorithm, mean-shift clustering, expectation-maximization algorithm (EM) clustering algorithm, representative density-based Clustering algorithm (density-based spatial clustering of applications with noise, DBSCAN), graph community detection (graph community detection) clustering algorithm, graph neural network (graph neural network, GCN) clustering algorithm, etc.
  • the server performs a clustering algorithm on the second intermediate matrix
  • the included K+L row vectors are clustered to obtain row vectors of multiple clusters.
  • the server is on the second intermediate matrix
  • the server can use this second intermediate matrix when clustering the included K+L row vectors All or part of each of the included K+L row vectors represents that row vector for clustering. That is, the server can select a part of each row vector to represent the row vector for clustering.
  • Step 403d The server determines network nodes included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
  • each row vector in the second intermediate matrix Z corresponds to a network node
  • the server divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster among the row vectors of the multiple clusters into the same group middle.
  • APs and STAs in the WiFi network are divided into two groups, and the two groups correspond to two clusters.
  • the two clusters include cluster 1 and cluster 2, and the two groups include group 1 and group 2 as an example for introduction.
  • cluster 1 corresponds to group 1
  • cluster 2 corresponds to group 2.
  • STA1 corresponds to row vector 1 of the second intermediate matrix Z
  • STA2 corresponds to row vector 2 of the second intermediate matrix Z
  • STA3 corresponds to row vector 3 of the second intermediate matrix z
  • AP1 corresponds to the row vector 4 of the second intermediate matrix Z
  • AP2 corresponds to the row vector 5 of the second intermediate matrix
  • AP3 corresponds to the row vector 6 of the second intermediate matrix Z
  • AP4 corresponds to the row vector 7 of the second intermediate matrix Z
  • AP5 corresponds to the row vector 7 of the second intermediate matrix Z.
  • Cluster 1 includes Row Vector 1, Row Vector 2, Row Vector 4, Row Vector 5, and Row Vector 6, while Cluster 2 includes Row Vector 3, Row Vector 7, and Row Vector 8. Then, the server determines that the group 1 includes AP1, AP2, AP3, STA1 and STA2 according to the row vector included in the cluster 1. The server determines that group 2 includes AP4, AP5 and STA3 according to the row vector included in cluster 2.
  • the sum of the signal strengths of the mutual interference between the network nodes in the sub-network formed by the network nodes in the group C and the network nodes outside the sub-network can be expressed as:
  • STA k represents the k-th STA
  • AP 1 represents the l-th AP.
  • the effective strength of the sub-network formed by the network nodes in the group C can be defined as the sum of the signal strengths between the network nodes in the sub-network, specifically expressed as:
  • the degree of mutual interference between the sub-networks formed in each group should be as small as possible, and the effective signal strength in the same sub-network should be as large as possible.
  • the multiple groups are taken as N, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 2, then the first network can be divided into N sub-networks corresponding to the N groups.
  • the interference degree is as small as possible and the effective signal strength in the same sub-network is as large as possible.
  • the problem can be located as:
  • argmin is the operator for the arguments of the maxima, pointing to make Minimized ⁇ G 1 ,G 2 ,...,G N ⁇ .
  • st is the operator for constraints. indicate that it should be satisfied and c is the constraint condition 1, is Constraint 2, is a universal quantifier, is an empty set, G d ⁇ G g refers to the intersection of G d and G g , G b refers to the b-th cluster, and b is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to N.
  • the control device collects the global interference information in the first network, and in step 402 sends the global interference information in the first network to the server.
  • the server abstracts the first network into a weighted bipartite graph to perform spectral graph decomposition, and performs spectral graph decomposition on the weighted bipartite graph through graph theory and spectral clustering to solve the above problem. That is, all APs and all STAs of the first network are grouped by graph theory method and spectral clustering, so that the degree of signal interference between the sub-networks formed corresponding to each grouping in the multiple groups obtained in this way is small, and the sub-networks The effective strength inside is greater.
  • FIG. 4C-1 is a schematic diagram of a connection state between an AP and a STA in the first network under a traditional single-AP transmission mechanism.
  • the STA selects the nearest AP to establish a connection, and the AP provides services for the STA.
  • FIG. 4C-2 is a schematic diagram of the distribution of the groups obtained by division according to the geographical division.
  • FIG. 4C-3 is a schematic diagram of group distribution of multiple groups under a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4C-3 , APs and STAs in the first network are divided into multiple groups. Compared with FIG. 4C-3 The division method of 4C-2, in Fig.
  • the network nodes located relatively close are all divided into the same group.
  • multiple APs in the same group can simultaneously provide services for STAs in the same group, realizing multi-AP joint transmission and improving network throughput and spectrum. utilization.
  • the server sends the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device.
  • the grouping result of the multiple groups is used to indicate the APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
  • the grouping result includes a group number of each group in the plurality of groups, and APs and STAs corresponding to each group number (ie, APs and STAs included in each group).
  • the control device sends the second grouping information.
  • the second group information includes information about groups to which all APs in the first network belong respectively and information about groups to which all STAs of the first network belong respectively.
  • the second group information includes group numbers of groups to which all APs and all STAs in the first network belong respectively.
  • this embodiment further includes step 405a, and step 405a is performed before step 405.
  • Step 405a The control device allocates the same channel to the APs in the same group among the multiple groups.
  • control device selects a channel for the APs in each of the multiple groups according to the first channel parameter information; and the control device selects the same channel for the APs in each group.
  • the second grouping information further includes third channel allocation information.
  • the third channel allocation information is information of a channel allocated by the control device to the AP in the first network.
  • step 405a shows an implementation manner in which the control device allocates corresponding channels to the multiple groups respectively.
  • APs in the same group can also select channels.
  • the specific selection process is similar to steps 507 to 511 in the subsequent embodiment shown in FIG. 5A .
  • please refer to The related introductions that follow will not be repeated here.
  • Step 405 is introduced by taking the control device broadcasting the second grouping information of all APs and all STAs in the first network as an example.
  • the control device may also determine the information of the group to which each network node in the first network belongs from the grouping results of the multiple groups, and send the grouping information corresponding to the network node to the corresponding network node. That is, the control device sends the packet information through unicast.
  • control device may also only send the second grouping information to all APs in the first network.
  • server is transparent to the grouping management of all APs and all STAs in the first network; or, the APs in each group notify the STAs in the same group of related grouping information, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the control device collects the global interference information in the first network, it is reasonable for the control device to allocate a corresponding channel to each group according to the global interference information. Compared with the method of selecting channels through APs in the same group, the method of selecting the corresponding channel for each group by the control device can reduce information exchange between devices, reduce signaling overhead, and avoid unnecessary waste of resources.
  • control device allocates the same channel to the APs in the same group, so that multiple APs in the same group can realize multi-AP joint transmission, so as to meet the requirements of high throughput and low delay of WiFi network, and also improve the frequency spectrum. utilization.
  • the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information.
  • the second AP is an AP in the first network, and the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information.
  • the second group information includes the group number to which the second AP belongs; the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs according to the group number to which the second AP belongs.
  • the second grouping information further includes third channel allocation information.
  • this embodiment further includes step 406a. Step 406a and step 406 may be performed simultaneously, or step 406 may be performed first, or step 406a may be performed first, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • Step 406a The second AP determines the third channel selected by the control device for the second AP according to the third channel allocation information.
  • the third channel allocation information includes indication information of the frequency band used for the third channel or the frequency band of the third channel.
  • the second AP may determine the frequency band of the third channel according to the indication information of the frequency band used for the third channel, and access the frequency band; or, the second AP accesses the frequency band of the third channel.
  • Step 406b The second AP adjusts the channel accessed by the second AP to the third channel.
  • the second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
  • step 407 there are various adjustment modes for the second AP to adjust the STA of the second connection, and two possible implementation modes are shown below.
  • Implementation mode 1 The second AP sends information of the group to which the second AP belongs, and the information of the group to which the second AP belongs is used for the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the second AP.
  • step 407 specifically includes step 407a.
  • Step 407a The second AP sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs.
  • the information of the group to which the second AP belongs is used for the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the second AP.
  • the second AP may send the information of the group to which the second AP belongs by broadcasting.
  • the sending form of the information of the group to which the second AP belongs may be in a message broadcast by the second AP or carried in a beacon frame, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes the second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs, then the above step 407a specifically includes:
  • the second AP sends a second beacon frame, where the second beacon frame carries the second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs.
  • the second AP modifies the format of the second beacon frame.
  • the second beacon frame includes a fixed field field and an optional field.
  • the second AP extends the packet number field in the optional field, and carries the second packet number on the bit corresponding to the packet number field.
  • this embodiment further includes steps 407b to 407e, and steps 407b to 407e are executed after step 407a.
  • Step 407b The fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and sent by the second AP.
  • the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes the second group number.
  • the fourth STA receives a second beacon frame sent by the second AP, where the second beacon frame carries the second group number.
  • the fourth STA scans all the channels, and receives the second beacon frame sent by the second AP; then, the fourth STA according to the second group number carried in the second beacon frame and the grouping of the group to which the fourth STA belongs number for comparison.
  • the fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs and sent by the eighth AP.
  • the eighth AP is an AP to which the fourth STA adjusts the connection. That is to say, the fourth STA may determine the group to which the fourth STA belongs by using the group information sent by the eighth AP to which it is connected. For example, as shown in the figure, the fourth STA is STA3, the STA3 is connected to the AP2, and the AP2 sends the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs to the STA3.
  • Step 407c The fourth STA determines whether the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs. If so, execute step 407d; if not, execute step 407e.
  • the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes the second group number
  • step 407c is specifically for the fourth STA to determine whether the group number of the group to which the fourth STA belongs is consistent with the second group number, and if so, Then go to step 407d, if not, go to step 407e.
  • Step 407d The fourth STA adjusts the AP connected to the fourth STA to the second AP.
  • the fourth STA is STA3, STA2 is connected to AP2 before adjustment, and the second AP is AP3. Then STA3 can adjust the STA3 from the connected AP2 to AP3.
  • Step 407e the fourth STA keeps the connection with the eighth AP.
  • the fourth STA mainly adjusts its associated AP, so as to realize the connection management of the STA.
  • Implementation mode 2 The implementation mode 2 is described below in conjunction with steps 407f to 407i.
  • Step 407f The second AP determines the STA included in the group to which the second belongs.
  • the second AP determines, according to the second grouping information sent by the control device, the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs.
  • Step 407g The second AP judges whether the second AP and the third STA belong to the same group, if so, execute step 407h; if not, execute step 407i.
  • the third STA is a STA that has established a connection with the second AP.
  • the second AP determines the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information, and determines whether the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs includes the third STA, and if so , then go to step 407h; if not, go to step 407i.
  • the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs and the group to which the third STA belongs according to the second group information; then, the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs and the third STA Whether the belonging groups are the same, if yes, go to step 407h; if not, go to step 407i.
  • Step 407h The second AP keeps serving the third STA.
  • the second AP and the third STA belong to the same group, the second AP keeps serving the third STA.
  • Step 407i The second AP determines a seventh AP according to the group to which the third STA belongs, and sends third indication information to the seventh AP; or, the second AP sends fourth indication information to the third STA.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that the seventh AP provides services for the third STA, and the seventh AP and the third STA belong to the same group.
  • the second AP determines the group to which the third STA belongs according to the second group information, and determines the seventh AP from the group to which the third STA belongs.
  • the seventh AP may be an AP with the highest signal strength or medium signal strength in the group to which the third STA belongs, and may be specifically determined by the signal strength of the beacon frame sent by the seventh AP.
  • the second AP sends third indication information to the seventh AP to instruct the seventh AP to provide services for the third STA, so as to implement connection management for the STA connected to the AP.
  • the second AP that adjusts the STAs connected to it. That is, the connection adjustment between the AP and the STA is transparent to the STA in the first network.
  • the mechanism of association adjustment performed by the second AP can be compatible with the existing WiFi7 standard, and the association adjustment process is transparent to the STA in the first network, and does not need to perform function expansion and modification on the STA in the first network.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third STA requests the seventh AP to provide services for the third STA.
  • the second AP determines the group to which the third STA belongs according to the second group information, and determines the seventh AP from the group to which the third STA belongs.
  • the seventh AP may be an AP with the highest signal strength or medium signal strength in the group to which the third STA belongs, and may be specifically determined by the signal strength of the beacon frame sent by the seventh AP.
  • the second AP sends the fourth indication information to the seventh AP to instruct the third STA to request the seventh AP to provide services for the third STA.
  • the control device receives the second channel parameter information sent by the second AP; then, the control device sends the first channel parameter information to the server.
  • the server groups all APs and all STAs in the first network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, and sends the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device.
  • the control device sends the second group information; then, the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information, and adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs, so as to realize the STA connected to the AP management and planning.
  • all APs and all STAs of the first network are grouped by using graph theory method and spectral clustering to obtain multiple groups.
  • each group in the multiple groups corresponds to a sub-network formed between them.
  • the degree of signal interference is small, and the effective strength in the sub-network is large, which can reduce the interference between user equipments, thereby improving the performance of network transmission.
  • FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network management method includes:
  • the first AP acquires first channel parameter information.
  • the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
  • the STA in the WiFi network selects an AP from the WiFi network to connect to according to the existing method.
  • the STA may connect with the AP corresponding to the beacon frame with the highest signal strength.
  • the AP in the WiFi network can select a channel and access the channel through the prior art.
  • the first AP is AP2, and AP2 obtains the first channel parameter information between AP2 and STAs (including STA1 and STA2 in FIG. 2A ) within the signal coverage of AP2 respectively.
  • AP2 measures the channel parameter information between the AP2 and STA1 and STA2 respectively; or, STA1 measures the channel parameter information between the STA1 and AP2 and reports it to AP2; and STA2 measures the channel parameter information between the STA2 and the AP2 channel parameter information and report it to AP2.
  • the first AP groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups.
  • the first STA is a STA that has established a connection with the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP.
  • the following describes the process of determining the plurality of groups by the first AP in step 502 with reference to steps 502a to 502e.
  • Step 502a The first AP calculates the p+Kth main diagonal element bp of the first intermediate matrix D according to the pth column vector of the channel matrix W.
  • the first network includes L APs and K STAs, the first AP is the pth AP in the first network, L is an integer greater than or equal to 1, K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and p is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L.
  • the related introduction of the channel matrix W please refer to the related introduction of the channel matrix W in step 402 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , and details are not repeated here.
  • the related introduction of the first intermediate matrix D please refer to the related introduction of the first intermediate matrix D in step 403 in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , which will not be repeated here.
  • the first AP Since the first AP obtains the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the first AP calculates the p+K-th main diagonal of the first middle D according to the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W element b p .
  • Step 502b The first AP acquires the first K main diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D.
  • the first AP acquires the first K diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D, ie a 1 to a K , from the STAs in the first network and other APs in the first network.
  • an access point protocol (inter access point protocol, IAPP) may be used to exchange information between the first AP and other APs in the first network through a wired network, so as to obtain information sent by other APs.
  • Step 502c The first AP determines the first part of the sixth intermediate matrix Q according to the p+Kth main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D and the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D; K-row vector and K+p-th row vector.
  • each row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an AP or STA in the first network.
  • Step 502c will be described below in conjunction with steps 1 to 3.
  • Step 1 The first AP uses the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K main pairs in the first intermediate matrix D.
  • the corner elements determine the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
  • the W T is the W transpose.
  • the th An AP can only determine the p-th row vector of the first intermediate matrix R
  • Step 2 The first AP according to the stochastic gradient descent algorithm and the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R Determine the p-th row vector of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M .
  • the degree of similarity between the first matrix X M and the third matrix is greater than or equal to a first preset threshold
  • the degree of similarity between the second matrix Y M and the fourth matrix is greater than or equal to a second preset threshold
  • the third matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the left singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the left singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, and the first
  • the M column vectors of the three matrices are the M column vectors selected from the left singular matrix in descending order of singular values.
  • the fourth matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the right singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R.
  • Each column vector in the right singular matrix has a corresponding singular value
  • the The M column vectors of the fourth matrix are M column vectors selected from the right singular matrix in descending order of singular values.
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with base 2, min(K, L ) means taking the minimum of K and L.
  • the value of M can also be determined in combination with the actual situation, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the above example of the value range of M is determined by the analysis of experimental data.
  • the server will determine the value of the STA and AP in the first network.
  • the grouping effect can achieve better results. For example, the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the signal interference strength between the network nodes (APs or STAs) in the sub-network and outside the sub-network is relatively low.
  • the value of M may be the number of groups of the multiple groups.
  • the number of groups of the plurality of groups is an integer greater than 1 and less than min(K, L).
  • the size of the first preset threshold and the second preset threshold can be determined in combination with experimental data, and specifically, the sizes of the first preset threshold and the second preset threshold can be determined in combination with the following formula (5).
  • the APs in the first network implement singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R and clustering of row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q in a distributed network management system in a cooperative manner.
  • each AP measures the channel parameter information between each AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP (the channel parameter information measured by each AP corresponds to the value of the channel matrix W
  • the first AP can calculate the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
  • a distributed stochastic gradient descent algorithm is used between APs in the first network to achieve a result similar to that obtained by performing singular value decomposition on the third intermediate matrix R.
  • the problem can be approximated as:
  • Step 3 The first AP is based on the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D, and the first matrix X M .
  • the p-th row vector and the second matrix Y M are calculated to obtain the sixth intermediate matrix The first K row vector and the K+pth row vector of .
  • the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q are:
  • the K+p th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to the p th AP, and the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q correspond to K STAs in the first network respectively.
  • Step 502d The first AP performs clustering on the target row vector according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result.
  • the target row vector includes the K+p th row vector corresponding to the first AP and the row vector corresponding to the first STA among the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q.
  • One cluster in the plurality of clusters corresponds to one group in the plurality of groups.
  • the clustering algorithm is k-means algorithm, k-means++ algorithm, mean shift clustering, maximum expectation clustering algorithm, DBSCAN, graph community detection clustering algorithm, GCN clustering algorithm, and the like.
  • the first AP is introduced by using k-means as an example, and specifically, the process of determining the first AP in step 502d is introduced through the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 later.
  • Step 502e The first AP determines network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
  • the first AP can The network nodes corresponding to the row vectors of the same cluster in the multiple clusters are divided into the same group, and the network node is the first AP or the first STA.
  • the first AP sends grouping results of multiple groups.
  • the grouping result is used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
  • the grouping result may include a grouping number corresponding to each grouping, and APs and STAs corresponding to each grouping number.
  • the first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
  • the adjustment method of the first AP in step 504 is similar to the adjustment method of the second AP in step 407 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • multiple APs group all APs and all STAs in the first network in a cooperative manner.
  • the specific distribution of multiple groups is shown in Figure 5B.
  • the grouping effect of multiple groups is similar to that of multiple groups.
  • the grouping effects of the aforementioned multiple groups in FIG. 4C-3 are similar, and the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the network nodes (AP or The signal interference strength between STAs) is low.
  • the first AP acquires the first channel parameter information; then, the first AP groups the first AP and the STAs connected to the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP according to the first channel parameter information, Obtain multiple groups; then, the first AP sends the grouping results of the multiple groups, and the first AP adjusts the STAs connected to the first AP according to the groups to which the first AP belongs, so as to manage and plan the STAs connected to the AP.
  • each AP of the first network implements grouping of all APs and all STAs of the first network through a collaborative method, graph theory method and spectral clustering, and obtains Multiple groups, so that the signal interference between the sub-networks formed by each group in the multiple groups is small, and the effective signal strength in the sub-network is large, which can reduce the interference between user equipment and improve network transmission. performance.
  • multiple APs group all APs and all STAs in the first network in a cooperative manner.
  • Each AP may group each AP and the STAs that have established connections with the respective APs.
  • the channel allocation process of the APs in the same group please refer to the related introduction of the following steps 505 to 511 for details.
  • steps 505 to 511 further includes steps 505 to 511 .
  • steps 505 to 511 are executed before step 502 .
  • steps 505 to 511 and steps 503 to 504 have no obvious order of execution.
  • Steps 503 to 504 can be executed first, or steps 505 to 511 can be executed first; or, depending on the situation, steps 505 to 511 and steps 505 to 505 can be executed simultaneously.
  • Step 511 which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the first AP receives the first packet information sent by the fourth AP.
  • the first grouping information includes grouping information to which a fourth AP belongs and an identifier of the fourth AP, where the fourth AP includes APs other than the first AP in the first network.
  • the first group includes the group number of the group to which the fourth AP belongs.
  • the first AP receives the first group information broadcast by other APs in the first network to determine the group to which the other APs belong.
  • the first AP determines, according to the first group information, that the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group.
  • the fifth AP is a part of APs in the fourth AP, and the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group.
  • the first AP determines that the group number of the group to which the first AP belongs is the same as the group number of the group to which the fifth AP belongs, that is, the first AP can determine that the first AP and the group belong to the same group.
  • the fifth AP belongs to the same group.
  • the first AP judges whether the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP according to the identifier of the first AP, the identifier of the fifth AP and the preset AP priority rule, and if so, perform step 508; If not, step 510 is executed.
  • the preset AP priority rule includes the priority corresponding to the identifier of each AP in the first network, and the first AP can determine the priority of the first AP and the priority of the fifth AP according to the preset AP priority rule level, and determine whether the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP, if so, go to step 508; if not, go to step 510.
  • the preset AP priority rule is pre-configured on the first AP, or specified by a communication protocol, or sent to the first AP by other network devices.
  • the above setting method is only an example, and the preset AP priority rule may also be set in other manners, which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the first AP selects a first channel by scanning channels, and accesses the first channel.
  • the first AP may use the LCCS technology to scan channels and select the first channel, and access the first channel.
  • the first AP sends the first channel allocation information to the fifth AP.
  • the first channel allocation information is used to instruct the fifth AP to access the first channel.
  • the first channel allocation information includes indication information for indicating the frequency band of the first channel or the frequency band of the first channel.
  • the first AP receives the second channel allocation information sent by the sixth AP.
  • the second channel allocation information is information of the second channel selected by the sixth AP, and the sixth AP is the AP with the highest priority among the fifth APs.
  • the second channel allocation information is similar to the first channel allocation information. For details, please refer to the foregoing related introduction of the first channel allocation information.
  • the first AP adjusts the channel accessed by the first AP to the second channel according to the second channel allocation information.
  • the second channel allocation information includes a frequency band of the second channel, and the first AP can access the first AP to the frequency band of the second channel.
  • the same channel is allocated to multiple APs in the same group, so that multiple APs in the same group can realize multi-AP joint transmission, thereby satisfying the WiFi network.
  • the demand for high throughput and low latency also improves spectrum utilization.
  • the channel allocation manners in the above steps 505 to 511 are just an example.
  • multiple APs in the same group can also select an AP by means of listening and competition. Then, the AP selects a channel, and then sends the information of the selected channel to other APs in the group, so that multiple APs in the same group can access the same channel to realize multi-AP joint transmission; and meet the high throughput of the WiFi network It can meet the requirements of high throughput and low latency, and at the same time, it also improves the spectrum utilization.
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the network management method according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method includes:
  • the first AP randomly initializes the p-th row vector x p of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M .
  • x p [x p1 x p2 ... x pM ]
  • x p is a matrix of one row multiplied by M columns
  • x pf is the element of the f-th column vector in x p
  • Y M [y 1 y 2 ... y M ] is a matrix of K rows by M columns
  • y f is the element of the f-th column vector in Y M
  • f is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to M.
  • the first AP initializes the momentum term ⁇ x p and the momentum term ⁇ Y M , so that the momentum term ⁇ x p and the momentum term ⁇ Y M are both 0.
  • the momentum term ⁇ x p and the momentum term ⁇ Y M are used in the stochastic gradient descent process to accelerate the convergence process of the stochastic gradient descent algorithm, so as to solve the minimum value problem of the above equation (5).
  • the momentum term ⁇ x p [ ⁇ x p1 ⁇ x p2 ... ⁇ x pM ]
  • ⁇ x pf is the f-th column vector of the momentum term ⁇ x p
  • the momentum term ⁇ Y M [ ⁇ y 1 ⁇ y 2 ... ⁇ y M ]
  • ⁇ y f is the f-th column vector of the momentum term ⁇ Y M.
  • the first AP broadcasts the second matrix Y M to other APs in the first network except the first AP.
  • the first AP After the first AP performs the initialization process of steps a and b, the first AP periodically broadcasts the second matrix Y M to other APs, and other APs in the first network also periodically broadcast the second matrix Y M on the other APs.
  • matrix Y M matrix .
  • the first AP may broadcast the second matrix Y M through a first broadcast message, where the first broadcast message carries the second matrix Y M , the first identifier and the grouping round number.
  • the first identifier is used when the first broadcast message is a broadcast message for stochastic gradient descent processing.
  • the grouping round number is used to identify the round number of the current grouping performed by the first AP, that is, the number of times the first AP currently groups the first AP and the first STA.
  • the first AP receives the first broadcast message with a higher grouping round number, the first AP ends the execution operation of the stochastic gradient descent corresponding to the grouping round number, and enters the next round of the stochastic gradient descent process.
  • the first bit of the payload of the first broadcast message is used to identify the first broadcast message as a broadcast message for stochastic gradient descent processing. For example, when the first bit is "0", it represents that the first broadcast message is used for stochastic gradient descent processing.
  • the remaining 7 bits of the first byte of the payload of the first broadcast message are used to identify the round number of the packet, and are used to identify the round number of the current packet of the first AP.
  • the second matrix Y M is carried on the remaining bytes except the first byte in the payload in the first broadcast message.
  • the first AP starts a first timer.
  • the first timer is used for the first AP to monitor the second matrix Y M broadcast by other APs in the first network within the duration of the first timer.
  • the first AP determines the interruption type of the first interruption. If the first interruption is caused by the first AP receiving an interruption that occurs when other APs send the second matrix Y M , perform step 606; if the first interruption is due to the first timing If the timer expires or is interrupted, the first AP returns to step 604, and the first AP restarts the first timer.
  • the first AP determines the interruption type of the first interruption. If the timer expires or is interrupted, the first AP returns to step 604, where the first AP continues to receive and monitor the second matrix Y M sent by other APs in the first network.
  • the first AP updates the p-th row vector x p of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M according to the stochastic gradient descent rule.
  • Step 606 is described below in conjunction with steps 1 to 3.
  • Step 1 The first AP calculates the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
  • the first intermediate matrix is known from step 502c in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A above
  • the first K main diagonal elements of i.e. All the elements on the main diagonal of , and the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D .
  • Step 2 The first AP stores the received second matrix Y M sent by other APs.
  • Step 3 The first AP is based on the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R and the received other AP sends the second matrix Y M to update the p-th row vector x p and the second matrix Y M of the first matrix X M on the first AP.
  • the procedure is used as an example to introduce step 3.
  • Step a the first AP calculates the error vector
  • Step c the first AP update get updated
  • Step d the first AP updates x p1 and y 1 , and the updated x p1 is equal to the pre-update x p1 plus the updated ⁇ x p1 , and the updated y 1 is equal to the pre-update y 1 plus the updated ⁇ y 1 .
  • the update process for other elements in x p is similar to the update process for x p1
  • the update process for other elements in Y M is similar to the update process for y 1 , and it should be noted that when calculating the error vector e, should use the one from the previous update Calculate this error vector. from the previous update Refers to the e obtained by the first AP updating the previous element of the currently updated element.
  • the above steps a to d update the first element x p1 in x p and the first element y 1 in Y M , then use the information obtained in step 1 in step 606 If the first AP updates the second element x p2 in x p and the first element y 2 in Y M , then when the first AP calculates the error vector, it uses the update obtained in the above step c. By analogy, we will not describe them one by one here.
  • the first AP can restart the first timer and continue to monitor the first matrix Y M broadcast by other APs in the first network.
  • the first AP performs operations similar to those in step 606 , that is, the p-th row vector x p and the second matrix Y M of the first matrix X M obtained in step 606 are updated again, and so on.
  • the process of the second update is similar, until the number of restarts of the first timer reaches the preset number of times, then the first AP determines the p-th row vector x p and the second matrix Y of the first matrix X M obtained by the last update. M.
  • step 502d in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 5A the first AP performs clustering on the target row vector according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result.
  • the step 502d is described below with reference to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 .
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the network management method according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method includes:
  • the first AP generates a first cluster center according to a first random seed.
  • the first cluster center includes the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters generated by the first AP, each cluster corresponds to a cluster center, and each cluster in the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups grouping.
  • all APs in the first network make the first random seed generate cluster centers corresponding to multiple clusters.
  • the cluster center corresponding to the cluster, b is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to N. That is, the randomly initialized cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters are obtained respectively, and the cluster G b corresponds to the cluster center c b .
  • the first random seed may be pre-configured, or may be generated by an AP (for example, a master AP) in the first network, and then sent by the AP to other APs in the first network , which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • an AP for example, a master AP
  • the first AP determines, according to the first cluster center, a cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs, and obtains a row vector included in each of the multiple clusters.
  • the first AP searches for a cluster center closest to each row vector for each row vector in the target row vector, and divides each row vector into a cluster corresponding to the cluster center. For example, the first AP from the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q and the K+pth row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q Select the target row vector in , here the target row vector is called The first AP is the The row vectors included in find the cluster corresponding to the closest cluster center for each row vector, respectively.
  • the first AP uses all or part of each row vector in the target row vector as a representative row vector for clustering. That is to say, the first AP can select part of the content of each row vector to represent the row vector for clustering.
  • step 502e in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A specifically includes:
  • the first AP determines the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
  • the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the row vectors of the multiple clusters into the same group.
  • the first preset condition includes that the update times of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters are greater than or equal to a third preset threshold.
  • the first AP determines whether the update times of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters are greater than or equal to the third preset threshold, and if so, the first AP determines the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters The network nodes included respectively; if not, the following steps 512 to 514 are performed.
  • the third preset threshold is 100.
  • the third preset threshold is mainly determined according to experimental data, that is, the update times of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively when the above-mentioned clustering process reaches a degree of convergence.
  • Implementation mode 2 The first preset condition is described below in conjunction with steps 1 to 4, including: the first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy.
  • the first convergence accuracy is the ratio of the absolute value of the first difference to the first global error.
  • the first difference is the difference between the first global error and a preset initialization error.
  • the first global error is the sum of the first local errors respectively calculated by all APs in the first network.
  • the first local error of the first AP includes the sum of the errors corresponding to each cluster of the plurality of clusters determined by the first AP, and the error corresponding to each cluster is the row vector included in each cluster and each cluster respectively.
  • the first AP executes the foregoing step 502e.
  • the initialization error is ⁇ and the first global error is The preset convergence accuracy is ⁇ ; then the first AP judges whether it satisfies the If yes, go to step 502e; if not, go to the following steps 512 to 514.
  • the preset convergence accuracy is 0.01
  • the preset initialization error is infinite.
  • the preset convergence accuracy is determined based on experimental data and experience. That is, when the above-mentioned clustering process reaches the degree of convergence, the value of the preset convergence precision.
  • the preset convergence precision is set by the first AP, or may be specified by a communication protocol, or sent to the first AP by other devices, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • Step 1 the first AP calculates the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol (also called epidemic protocol (epidemic protocol), or rumor algorithm, epidemic propagation algorithm);
  • the gossip protocol also called epidemic protocol (epidemic protocol), or rumor algorithm, epidemic propagation algorithm
  • Step 2 The first AP calculates the first local error.
  • the first AP calculates the first local error according to the row vectors respectively included in the multiple clusters obtained in step 702 and the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters.
  • the first local error includes a sum of errors corresponding to each of the multiple clusters determined by the first AP.
  • the error corresponding to each cluster is the sum of errors between the row vector included in each cluster and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster.
  • the first local error represents the sum of root mean square errors corresponding to a plurality of clusters in the first AP respectively. represents the row vector in the bth cluster among the multiple clusters, and c b represents the cluster center corresponding to the bth cluster. It represents the sum of the root mean square errors of the row vector of the bth cluster and the cluster center corresponding to the bth cluster.
  • Step 3 The first AP calculates the first global error according to the gossip protocol and the first local error.
  • the first global error is the sum of the first local errors calculated respectively by all APs in the first network.
  • each AP in the first network stores the local variable ⁇ p2 and the local control parameter ⁇ p2 respectively.
  • ⁇ p2 on the first AP is set to the sum of the corresponding root mean square errors in multiple clusters in the first AP
  • ⁇ p2 on the first AP is set to 1
  • the local control parameters on other APs are 0.
  • the first AP uses the gossip protocol and the first local error to calculate the first global error, that is, the sum of the first local errors calculated by all APs in the first network is obtained.
  • the calculation of the first local error by other APs of the first network is similar to the manner in which the first AP calculates the first local error on the first AP in step 2, and details are not repeated here.
  • each AP calculates the first local error of each AP
  • the clustering result of each AP's most recent clustering of the row vectors of multiple clusters and the previous clustering results of the row vectors of multiple clusters The clustering result of clustering is calculated.
  • the moments at which other APs of the first network send the first local error may be different or the same.
  • AP1 sends the first local error of AP1 to the first AP at time 1, that is, AP1 should select the clustering result of clustering the row vectors of multiple clusters most recently from time 1 and the previous row vector of multiple clusters.
  • the first global error of AP1 is calculated based on the clustering result of the vector clustering.
  • AP2 sends the first local error of AP2 to the first AP at time 2, that is, AP2 should select the clustering result of clustering the row vectors of multiple clusters most recently from time 2 and the previous row vector of multiple clusters.
  • the first global error of the AP2 is calculated from the clustering result of the clustering. The same is true for other APs of the first network, and will not be described one by one here.
  • the first AP uses the gossip protocol to determine the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters respectively.
  • the difference is that the first AP sets the local variable ⁇ p2 to the sum of the root mean square errors corresponding to the multiple clusters in the first AP, and sets ⁇ p2 to 1, so that by similar to what is shown in FIG. 8A later
  • the execution flow of steps 801 to 811 shown in the figure can obtain the sum of the first local errors calculated by all APs in the first network.
  • Step 4 The first AP calculates the first convergence accuracy according to the first global error and the preset initialization error.
  • the first convergence accuracy is equal to the absolute value of the quotient of the first difference and the first global error, and the first difference is the difference between the first global error and the initialization error.
  • the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 5A further includes steps 512 to 514 .
  • Step 512 the first AP calculates the first average vector corresponding to the row vectors of the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol;
  • Step 512 is similar to step 1 of implementation manner 2 in the foregoing first preset condition.
  • Step 512 please refer to the relevant introduction of step 1 of implementation manner 2 in the foregoing first preset condition, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 513 The first AP takes the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters as the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively, and obtains the second cluster center;
  • Step 514 the first AP determines the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs according to the second cluster center;
  • Steps 513 to 514 are similar to steps 701 and 702 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 .
  • steps 701 and 702 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 please refer to the related introductions of steps 701 and 702 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 , which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 515 When the second preset condition is satisfied, the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
  • Step 515 is similar to the related introduction of the foregoing step 502e.
  • Step 515 please refer to the related introduction of the foregoing step 502e, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second preset condition is similar to the first preset condition, and two possible implementation manners are shown below.
  • the second preset condition includes that the update times of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters are greater than or equal to the third preset threshold.
  • steps 512 to 515 are the first update of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters by the first AP. Therefore, if the third preset threshold is 1, the first AP executes step 515; if the third preset threshold is an integer greater than 1, the second AP performs the third clustering on the target row vector, specifically The clustering process is similar to the aforementioned steps 512 to 515 .
  • the second preset condition includes: the second convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy, and the second convergence accuracy is the absolute value of the difference between the second global error and the first global error and the The ratio of the second global error.
  • the first AP executes the foregoing step 515 .
  • step a The calculation process of the second convergence accuracy is described below in conjunction with step a and step d.
  • Step a the first AP calculates the second average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol;
  • the first AP uses the gossip protocol to calculate the first AP corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters.
  • the specific calculation method is similar to step 1 in the second implementation mode in the foregoing first preset condition, and details are not repeated here.
  • Step b The first AP calculates the second local error.
  • the first AP obtains the row vectors respectively included in the multiple clusters according to the above step 514 and the second average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters.
  • Step c The first AP calculates the second global error according to the gossip protocol and the second local error.
  • Steps b to c are similar to steps 2 to 3 in implementation mode 2 in the aforementioned first preset condition, please refer to the relevant introduction of steps 2 to 3 in implementation mode 2 in the aforementioned first preset condition, I won't go into details here.
  • Step d The first AP calculates the second convergence accuracy according to the second global error and the first global error.
  • the second convergence accuracy is equal to the ratio of the absolute value of the second difference to the quotient of the second global error, and the second difference is the difference between the second global error and the first global error.
  • steps 512 to 515 are the second clustering of the target row vector
  • the second global error should be compared with the first global error obtained by the calculation of the previous clustering (ie, the first clustering). , that is to say, the initialization error in the foregoing step 502e is updated to the first global error. If the first AP needs to perform the third clustering on the target row vector, the initialization error is updated to the second global error, and so on.
  • the first AP executes step 515 .
  • the first AP continues to cluster the target row vector for the third time. 515 is similar.
  • FIG. 8A is another embodiment of the network management method according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the network management method includes:
  • the first AP sets a local variable ⁇ p1 and a local control parameter ⁇ p1 .
  • Each AP in the first network stores a local variable ⁇ p1 and a local control parameter ⁇ p1 , respectively.
  • the first AP calculates ⁇ p1 and ⁇ p1 for the first AP.
  • the first AP determines a first node cache set.
  • the first node cache set includes a set consisting of I max APs selected by the first AP from APs directly connected to the first AP in the first network, where I max is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the size of the I max is related to the cache size or storage space size of the first AP. For example, the larger the storage space of the first AP, the larger the I max .
  • the first AP selects a target node from the first node cache set.
  • the first AP determines ⁇ p1 /2, ⁇ p1 /2 and r1 of the first AP.
  • r1 is used to indicate whether the first AP exchanges the ⁇ p1 and ⁇ p1 with the target node for the first time. For example, when r1 is 1, it indicates that the first AP exchanges the ⁇ p1 and ⁇ p1 with the target node for the first time. When r1 is 0, it indicates that ⁇ p1 and ⁇ p1 are not exchanged between the first AP and the target node for the first time.
  • the first AP sends a second broadcast message to the target node.
  • the second broadcast message carries the grouping round number, ⁇ p1 /2, ⁇ p1 /2 and r1.
  • grouping round number please refer to the related introduction in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6A , which will not be repeated here.
  • the second broadcast message carries the packet round number, ⁇ p1 /2, ⁇ p1 /2, r1 and the identifiers of the nodes included in the first cache set.
  • the first AP starts a second timer.
  • the second timer is used for the first AP to monitor the second broadcast messages sent by other APs in the first network except the first AP within the duration of the second timer.
  • the first AP determines the interruption type of the second interruption. If the second interruption is caused by the first AP receiving the second broadcast message sent by other APs in the first network except the first AP, then the interruption occurs. Step 808 is executed; if the second interruption occurs due to the timeout or interruption of the second timer, the first AP returns to step 806 .
  • the first AP returns to step 806 , that is, restarts the second timer, and then executes steps 806 to 810 .
  • the first AP can re-select other nodes, and then execute the first AP according to the process similar to step 804 to step 810.
  • Information exchange between the AP and selected other nodes Specifically, the number of times the first AP restarts the second timer for the selected node can be configured on the first AP, and when the number of times is reached and the second broadcast message sent by the node has not been sent, the first AP selects other nodes, Then, the information exchange between the first AP and the selected other nodes is performed according to the process similar to step 804 to step 810 .
  • the first AP determines whether r1 in the second broadcast message sent by other APs in the first network than the first AP is 1, and if so, execute steps 809 to 810; if not, execute steps 809 to 810 Step 810.
  • the first AP judges whether the reply message r1 is 1, and if so, executes step 809 and 810; if not, perform step 810.
  • the first AP sends the pre-update ⁇ p1 /2 and ⁇ p1 /2 of the first AP to the first node.
  • the first node is the node that sends the second broadcast message to the first AP within the second timer in the foregoing step 807 .
  • the first AP updates ⁇ p1 /2 and ⁇ p1 /2 according to the second broadcast message sent by other APs in the first network.
  • the first AP adds ⁇ p1 /2 on the first AP to ⁇ p1 /2 carried in the second broadcast message sent by the first node , add ⁇ p1 /2 on the first AP to the ⁇ p1 /2 carried in the second broadcast message sent by the first node.
  • the first AP does not need to perform the above step 809, and ⁇ p1 /2 on the first AP is added to the second broadcast message sent by the first node.
  • the ⁇ p1 /2 carried is ⁇ p1 /2 on the first AP plus ⁇ p1 /2 carried in the second broadcast message sent by the first node.
  • the first AP updates the first node cache set.
  • the first AP selects I max APs from the second node cache set carried in the second broadcast message sent by the first node, the first node and the first node cache set as the first node cache set Included AP.
  • the above shows the process of executing the gossip protocol between the first AP and the target node, realizing the exchange of ⁇ p1 and ⁇ p1 between the first AP and the target node. Then, similarly for other nodes in the first node cache set, the first AP performs the process of the above steps 803 to 811 to realize the ⁇ between the first AP and all nodes in the first node cache set The exchange of p1 and ⁇ p1 , so as to obtain the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters calculated by the first AP using the gossip protocol
  • FIG. 9 is another schematic structural diagram of the communication apparatus 900 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 900 may be used to execute the first communication apparatus in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the steps performed by the server in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , and the steps performed by the first AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A may refer to the relevant descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device 900 includes: a processor 901 , a memory 902 and a transceiver 903 .
  • the processor 901, the memory 902 and the transceiver 903 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
  • the grouping module 102 in the foregoing FIG. 1B may specifically be the processor 901 in this embodiment. , so the specific implementation of the processor 901 is not repeated here.
  • the transceiver module 101 in the aforementioned FIG. 1B may specifically be the transceiver 903 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 903 will not be described again.
  • the grouping module 202 when the communication apparatus 900 is used to perform the steps performed by the first AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A , the grouping module 202 , the grouping management module 203 and the signal measurement in the aforementioned FIG. 2B
  • the module 204 may be the processor 901 in this embodiment, so the specific implementation of the processor 901 will not be described again.
  • the transceiver module 201 in the aforementioned FIG. 1B may specifically be the transceiver 903 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 903 will not be described again.
  • FIG. 10 is another schematic structural diagram of the control device 1000 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the control device 1000 can be used to execute the control device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • the control device 1000 includes: a processor 1001 , a memory 1002 and a transceiver 1003 .
  • the processor 1001, the memory 1002 and the transceiver 1003 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
  • the aforementioned grouping management module 104 in FIG. 1C may specifically be the processor 1001 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the processor 1001 will not be described again.
  • the transceiver module 103 in the aforementioned FIG. 1C may specifically be the transceiver 1003 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 1003 will not be described again.
  • This embodiment of the present application further provides a second AP.
  • FIG. 11 is another schematic structural diagram of the second AP 1100 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second AP 1100 may be used to execute the second AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • For the steps performed by the AP reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the second AP 1100 includes: a processor 1101 , a memory 1102 and a transceiver 1103 .
  • the processor 1101, the memory 1102 and the transceiver 1103 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
  • the grouping management module 106 and the signal measurement module 107 in the foregoing FIG. 1D may be specifically the processor 1101 in this embodiment, and therefore the specific implementation of the processor 1101 will not be described again.
  • the transceiver module 105 in the aforementioned FIG. 1D may specifically be the transceiver 1103 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 1103 will not be described again.
  • This embodiment of the present application further provides a fourth STA. Please refer to FIG. 12 , which is another schematic structural diagram of the fourth STA 1200 in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the fourth STA 1200 includes: a processor 1201 , a memory 1202 and a transceiver 1203 .
  • the processor 1201, the memory 1202 and the transceiver 1203 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
  • the aforementioned processing module 109 and the signal measurement module 110 in FIG. 1E may specifically be the processor 1201 in this embodiment, so the specific implementation of the processor 1201 will not be described again.
  • the transceiver module 108 in the aforementioned FIG. 1E may specifically be the transceiver 1203 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 1203 will not be described again.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a network management system, please refer to FIG. 13 , the network management system includes the server shown in FIG. 1B , the control device shown in FIG. 1C , the AP shown in FIG. STA.
  • the server shown in FIG. 1B is configured to perform some or all of the steps performed by the first communication apparatus in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , and is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the server in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • the control device shown in FIG. 1C is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the control device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A described above.
  • the AP shown in FIG. 1D is configured to perform some or all of the steps performed by the second AP in the embodiment described in FIG. 4A .
  • the STA shown in FIG. 1E is configured to perform steps 407b to 407e performed by the fourth STA in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • steps 407b to 407e performed by the fourth STA in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a network management system, please refer to FIG. 14 , the network management system includes the first AP shown in FIG. 2B and the second STA shown in FIG. 2C .
  • the first AP shown in FIG. 2B is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the first AP in the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A , FIG. 6A , FIG. 7 and FIG. 8A .
  • the network management system further includes a fourth AP, where the fourth AP is configured to perform some or all of the steps performed by the fourth AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A .
  • the fourth AP includes a fifth AP and a sixth AP.
  • the fifth AP is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the fifth AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A
  • the sixth AP is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the sixth AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A .
  • FIG. 5A Please refer to the related introductions of the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A , FIG. 6A , FIG. 7 , and FIG. 8A , which will not be repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product including instructions, which is characterized in that, when it runs on a computer, the computer is made to execute any one of FIGS. 3, 4A, 5A, 6A, 7, and 8A. an implementation.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium, including computer instructions, when the instructions are executed on a computer, the computer can execute any one of the implementations shown in FIG. 3 , FIG. 4A , FIG. 5A , FIG. 6A , and FIG. 7 . .
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a chip device, including a processor for invoking a computer program or computer instruction in the memory, so that the processor executes the above-mentioned FIG. 3 , FIG. 4A , FIG. 5A , FIG. 6A , FIG. 7 and FIG. Any of the implementations in 8A.
  • the chip device further includes a memory, and the memory is used for storing computer programs or computer instructions.
  • the chip arrangement is composed of chips, and may also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory through an interface.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A network management method and a related apparatus, which are applied to a WiFi network to realize management and planning regarding an STA connected to an AP, to reduce interference between user equipments, and to improve the performance of network transmission. The method comprises: a first communication apparatus acquiring first channel parameter information, wherein the first channel parameter information comprises channel parameter information between first APs in a first network and STAs within a signal coverage range of the first APs; the first communication apparatus grouping the first APs and first STAs according to the first channel parameter information, so as to obtain a plurality of groups, wherein the first STAs comprise some of or all of the STAs within the signal coverage range of the first APs; and the first communication apparatus sending a grouping result of the plurality of groups, wherein the grouping result is used for indicating APs and STAs comprised in each of the plurality of groups.

Description

网络管理方法以及相关装置Network management method and related device
本申请要求于2020年9月30日提交中国国家知识产权局,申请号为202011063602.3,发明名称为“网络管理方法以及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed on September 30, 2020 with the application number 202011063602.3 and the title of the invention is "Network Management Method and Related Apparatus", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference middle.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种网络管理方法以及相关装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a network management method and related devices.
背景技术Background technique
随着无线高保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)技术的普及和应用需求的不断增长,未来的WiFi网络需要部署大量的无线接入点(accesspoint,AP)设备,以服务大量的接入用户。急剧增长的AP和用户密度使得设备之间的无线信号干扰问题越来越突出。如果没有适当的管理措施,信号干扰会导致较高的包错误率,并导致被干扰的设备无法接入信道,从而限制了网络的并发传输量。With the popularization of wireless fidelity (WiFi) technology and the continuous growth of application requirements, the future WiFi network needs to deploy a large number of wireless access point (AP) devices to serve a large number of access users. The rapidly increasing density of APs and users makes the problem of wireless signal interference between devices more and more prominent. Without proper management measures, signal interference can lead to high packet error rates and the inability of the interfered device to access the channel, thereby limiting the amount of concurrent transmissions on the network.
目前,AP采用最小拥塞信道扫描(leastcongested channel scan,LCCS)技术周期性地扫描正交信道,确定每个信道的连接情况,并将该AP配置到具有最少AP连接数的信道上。Currently, the AP uses the least congested channel scan (LCCS) technique to periodically scan the orthogonal channels, determines the connection status of each channel, and configures the AP to the channel with the least number of AP connections.
由上述方案可知,LCCS技术中AP只依据AP的测量信息进行信道分配,或者说是在固定AP与站点(Station,STA)连接的情况下,通过AP调整AP接入的信道来降低干扰。但是,对于AP与STA之间连接并未做相应的规划和管理,导致AP各自服务的用户之间仍存在较大的信号干扰,导致网络传输性能较低。It can be seen from the above solution that in the LCCS technology, the AP only allocates channels according to the AP's measurement information, or in the case of a fixed AP connected to a station (Station, STA), the AP adjusts the channel accessed by the AP to reduce interference. However, there is no corresponding planning and management for the connection between the AP and the STA, resulting in a large signal interference between the users served by the AP, resulting in low network transmission performance.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请实施例提供了一种网络管理方法以及相关装置,用于实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。The embodiments of the present application provide a network management method and related apparatuses, which are used to implement management and planning of STAs connected to an AP, which can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission performance.
本申请实施例第一方面提供一种网络管理方法,该网络管理方法包括:A first aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management method, where the network management method includes:
第一通信装置获取第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括第一网络中的第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;然后,第一通信装置根据该第一信道参数信息对该第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,该第一STA包括该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA中的部分或全部STA;该第一通信装置发送该多个分组的分组结果,该分组结果用于指示该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA。The first communication device acquires first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; then, the first communication The device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, and the first STA includes part or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; A communication device sends a grouping result of the plurality of groups, where the grouping result is used to indicate APs and STAs included in each group of the plurality of groups.
本实施例中,第一通信装置根据第一信道参数信息对第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,并发送该多个分组的分组结果,这样AP或STA接收该分组结果,可以结合自身所属分组调整连接,从而实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划。由于该多个分组是第一通信装置根据第一信道参数信息划分的,因此,通过本申请实施例的方案实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。In this embodiment, the first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information, obtains multiple groups, and sends the grouping results of the multiple groups, so that the AP or the STA receives the grouping results, The connection can be adjusted according to the group to which it belongs, so as to realize the management and planning of the STA connected to the AP. Since the multiple groups are divided by the first communication apparatus according to the first channel parameter information, the implementation of the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving the network transmission performance.
一种可能的实现方式中,该第一通信装置为服务器,该第一AP包括第一网络的所有 AP,该第一STA包括该第一网络的所有STA;第一通信装置获取第一信道参数信息,包括:该服务器接收控制设备发送的所述第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括该第一网络的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息,该第一网络为该控制设备控制的网络;该第一通信装置发送该多个分组的分组结果,包括:该服务器向该控制设备发送该多个分组的分组结果。In a possible implementation manner, the first communication device is a server, the first AP includes all APs of the first network, and the first STA includes all STAs of the first network; the first communication device obtains the first channel parameter information, including: the server receives the first channel parameter information sent by the control device, where the first channel parameter information includes the difference between each AP in all APs in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP The first network is a network controlled by the control device; the first communication device sending the grouping results of the multiple groups includes: the server sending the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device.
在该可能的实现方式中,采用集中式的网络管理系统,该集中式的网络管理系统包括控制设备和服务器。通过该集中式的网络管理系统中服务器实现对该第一网络中的所有AP和所有STA的分组,并向控制设备发送该多个分组的分组结果,再由控制设备对第一网络中的AP连接的STA进行管理和规划。In this possible implementation, a centralized network management system is adopted, and the centralized network management system includes a control device and a server. The server in the centralized network management system realizes the grouping of all APs and all STAs in the first network, and sends the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device, and then the control device groups the APs in the first network. The connected STA performs management and planning.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W,该信道矩阵W为K行乘以L列的矩阵,K为该第一网络包括的STA数目,L为该第一网络包括的AP数目,该信道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000001
w ij为第i个STA与第j个AP之间的信道增益,i为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的整数,j为大于或等于1且小于或等于L的整数;该第一通信装置根据该第一信道参数信息对该第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,包括:该服务器根据该信道矩阵W计算得到第一中间矩阵D,该第一中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000002
D 1为K行乘以K列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000003
D 1的主对角线上的元素a i为该第一网络中的第i个STA分别与该第一网络中的所有AP之间的信道增益之和,D 1的非对角线上的元素均为零;D 2为L行乘以L列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000004
D 2的主对角线上的元素b j为该第一网络中的第j个AP分别与该第一网络中的所有STA之间的信道增益之和,0 K×L为K行乘以L列的矩阵,0 K×L中的元素均为零,0 L×K为L行乘以K列的矩阵,0 L×K中的元素均为零;该服务器根据该信道矩阵W和该第一中间矩阵D确定第二中间矩阵,该第二中间矩阵中的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,该网络节点为该第一网络中的STA或AP;该服务器根据聚类算法对该第二中间矩阵的行向量进行聚类,得到第一聚类结果,该第一聚类结果包括多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中的一个簇对应该多个分组中的一个分组;该服务器根据该多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点。
In another possible implementation manner, the first channel parameter information includes a channel matrix W, where the channel matrix W is a matrix of K rows multiplied by L columns, K is the number of STAs included in the first network, and L is the first The number of APs included in the network, the channel matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000001
w ij is the channel gain between the i-th STA and the j-th AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L; the first communication The device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information, and obtains multiple groups, including: the server obtains a first intermediate matrix D by calculating according to the channel matrix W, the first intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000002
D 1 is a matrix with K rows by K columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000003
The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, respectively, and the off-diagonal elements of D 1 The elements are all zero; D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000004
The element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the jth AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, and 0 K×L is K rows multiplied by For a matrix of L columns, the elements in 0 K×L are all zero, and 0 L×K is a matrix of L rows multiplied by K columns, and the elements in 0 L×K are all zero; the server is based on the channel matrix W and the The first intermediate matrix D determines a second intermediate matrix, each row vector in the second intermediate matrix corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an STA or AP in the first network; The row vectors of the two intermediate matrices are clustered to obtain a first clustering result, where the first clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups; the The server determines the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供第一信道参数信息的具体内容,以及该服务器对第一网 络的所有AP和所有STA进行分组的分组过程。具体通过聚类的方式对第一网络的网络节点进行划分分组,实现对第一网络的所有AP和所有STA的分组,提升方案的可行性。In this possible implementation manner, the specific content of the first channel parameter information and the grouping process for the server to group all APs and all STAs in the first network are provided. Specifically, the network nodes of the first network are divided into groups by means of clustering, so as to realize the grouping of all APs and all STAs of the first network, and improve the feasibility of the solution.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该信道矩阵W为带权二分图的边权矩阵W,该带权二分图包括第一类型顶点和第二类型顶点,该第一类型顶点表示该第一网络中的STA,该第二类型顶点表示该第一网络中的AP,该边权矩阵W的元素为该带权二分图的边权,该带权二分图的边权为该第一网络中的STA与AP之间的信道增益,该第一中间矩阵为该带权二分图的度矩阵。In another possible implementation manner, the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix W of a weighted bipartite graph, the weighted bipartite graph includes a first type vertex and a second type vertex, and the first type vertex represents the first network The STA in , the second type vertex represents the AP in the first network, the element of the edge weight matrix W is the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph, and the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph is the first network. The channel gain between the STA and the AP, the first intermediate matrix is the degree matrix of the weighted bipartite graph.
在该可能的实现方式中,第一信道参数信息通过带权二分图的边权矩阵来表示,这样服务器可以结合图谱的方法和谱聚类的方式对第一网络的所有AP和所有STA进行分组,这样得到的多个分组中每个分组对应形成的子网络之间的信号干扰程度较小,子网络内的有效强度较大。In this possible implementation, the first channel parameter information is represented by an edge weight matrix of a weighted bipartite graph, so that the server can combine the graph method and the spectral clustering method to group all APs and all STAs in the first network , the signal interference degree between the sub-networks formed corresponding to each of the multiple groups obtained in this way is relatively small, and the effective strength in the sub-network is relatively large.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该服务器根据该信道矩阵W和该第一中间矩阵D确定第二中间矩阵,包括:该服务器根据该信道矩阵W和该第一中间矩阵D确定第三中间矩阵R,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000005
W T为W的转置;该服务器对该第三中间矩阵R进行奇异值分解,得到该第三中间矩阵R的左奇异矩阵和该第三中间矩阵R的右奇异矩阵;其中,该第三中间矩阵R=UΣV T,该Σ为对角矩阵,该V T为该右奇异矩阵V的转置;该对角矩阵Σ的第r列向量上对应的主对角线元素为该左奇异矩阵U的第r列向量对应的奇异值,该对角矩阵Σ的第r列向量上对应的主对角线元素为右奇异矩阵V的第r列向量对应的奇异值,r为大于或等于1且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,min(K,L)指取K和L中最小值;该服务器按照该对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从该左奇异矩阵U中选取对应的M个列向量,得到第四中间矩阵U M,以及按照该对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从该右奇异矩阵V中选取对应M个列向量,得到第五中间矩阵V M,M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,log 2(K+L)指以2为底数对K+L求对数;该服务器根据该第四中间矩阵、该第五中间矩阵和该第一中间矩阵计算得到该第二中间矩阵Z,该
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000006
In another possible implementation manner, the server determines the second intermediate matrix according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D, including: the server determines the third intermediate matrix according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D R,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000005
W T is the transpose of W; the server performs singular value decomposition on the third intermediate matrix R to obtain the left singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R and the right singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R; wherein, the third intermediate matrix R The intermediate matrix R=UΣV T , the Σ is a diagonal matrix, and the V T is the transpose of the right singular matrix V; the corresponding main diagonal element on the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix Σ is the left singular matrix The singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of U, the corresponding main diagonal element on the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix Σ is the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of the right singular matrix V, and r is greater than or equal to 1 and an integer less than or equal to min(K, L), min(K, L) refers to the minimum value between K and L; the server follows the order of the singular values in the diagonal matrix Σ from large to small, from the left singular Select the corresponding M column vectors from the matrix U to obtain the fourth intermediate matrix U M , and select the corresponding M column vectors from the right singular matrix V according to the size order of the singular values in the diagonal matrix Σ from large to small, Obtain the fifth intermediate matrix V M , where M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), and log 2 (K+L) refers to the base 2 for K+L logarithm; the server calculates and obtains the second intermediate matrix Z according to the fourth intermediate matrix, the fifth intermediate matrix and the first intermediate matrix, and the
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000006
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了服务器确定第二中间矩阵Z的具体过程,服务器按照奇异值大小从该左奇异矩阵U中选取的M个列向量和从右奇异矩阵V中的M个列向量中包含更多表征该带权二分图的特征信息,服务器通过谱聚类的方式对第二中间矩阵Z进行聚类,从而实现服务器对第一网络中的STA和AP的分组效果较好。例如,对于各个分组内的AP和STA形成的子网络内的有效信号强度总和较大,且该子网络内与子网络外的网络节点(AP或STA)之间的信号干扰强度较低。In this possible implementation manner, the specific process of determining the second intermediate matrix Z by the server is shown. The server selects M column vectors from the left singular matrix U and M column vectors from the right singular matrix V according to the size of the singular values. The column vector contains more feature information that characterizes the weighted bipartite graph, and the server clusters the second intermediate matrix Z by spectral clustering, so that the server has a better grouping effect on the STAs and APs in the first network. . For example, the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the signal interference strength between the network nodes (APs or STAs) in the sub-network and outside the sub-network is relatively low.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一通信装置根据聚类算法对该第二中间矩阵的行向量 进行聚类,得到第一聚类结果,包括:该服务器根据聚类算法对该第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000007
包括的K+L个行向量进行聚类,得到多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中的一个簇对应该多个分组中的一个分组;该服务器根据该多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点,包括:该服务器将多个簇的行向量中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。
In another possible implementation manner, the first communication device performs clustering on the row vectors of the second intermediate matrix according to a clustering algorithm to obtain a first clustering result, including: the server performing the clustering on the second intermediate matrix according to the clustering algorithm. Intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000007
The included K+L row vectors are clustered to obtain row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups; the server determines the multiple clusters according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters. The network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups include: the server divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the row vectors of the multiple clusters into the same group.
在该可能的实现方式中,服务器根据聚类算法对第二中间矩阵的行向量进行聚类,以得到每个簇包括的行向量,再结合每个行向量对应的网络节点确定每个分组包括的网络节点,实现对该第一网络的所有AP和所有STA的分组。In this possible implementation, the server clusters the row vectors of the second intermediate matrix according to a clustering algorithm to obtain row vectors included in each cluster, and then determines that each group includes a network node corresponding to each row vector. The network node implements grouping of all APs and all STAs of the first network.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一通信装置为该第一AP,该第一STA包括该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内与该第一AP已建立连接的STA;该方法还包括:该第一AP根据该第一AP所属的分组调整该第一AP连接的STA。In another possible implementation manner, the first communication device is the first AP, and the first STA includes a STA that has established a connection with the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP; the method further includes: The first AP adjusts the STA to which the first AP is connected according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
在该可能的实现方式中,采用分布式的网络管理系统,通过该分布式的网络管理系统中的第一AP对第一AP和第一AP连接的STA进行分组,再由第一AP调整该第一AP连接的STA,实现对第一AP连接的STA的连接管理和规划,减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。In this possible implementation, a distributed network management system is adopted, the first AP and the STAs connected to the first AP are grouped through the first AP in the distributed network management system, and then the first AP adjusts the The STA connected to the first AP implements connection management and planning for the STA connected to the first AP, reduces interference between user equipments, and improves network transmission performance.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP为该第一网络中的第p个AP,该第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W的第p个列向量,该信道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000008
w ij为第i个STA与第j个AP之间的信道增益,i为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的整数,j为大于或等于1且小于或等于L的整数,p为小于或等于所述L的整数,L为第一网络包括的AP数目,K为第一网络包括的STA数目;该第一通信装置根据该第一信道参数信息对该第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,包括:该第一AP根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量计算得到第一中间矩阵D的第p+K个主对角线元素b p
In another possible implementation manner, the first AP is the pth AP in the first network, and the first channel parameter information includes the pth column vector of the channel matrix W, and the channel matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000008
w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L, p is less than or equal to an integer equal to the L, where L is the number of APs included in the first network, and K is the number of STAs included in the first network; the first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information , to obtain a plurality of groupings, including: the first AP obtains the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D according to the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W;
其中,该第一中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000009
该D 1为K行乘以K列的矩阵,该
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000011
D 1的主对角线上的元素a i为第一网络中的第i个STA与第一网络中的所有AP之间的信道增益之和,D 1的非对角线上的元素均为零;D 2为L行乘以L列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000012
D 2的主对角线上的元素b j为第一网络中的第j个AP与第一网络中 的所有STA之间的信道增益之和,0 K×L为乘以L列的矩阵,0 K×L中的元素均为零,0 L×K为L行乘以K列的矩阵,0 L×K中的元素均为零;
Among them, the first intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000009
The D 1 is a matrix of K rows by K columns, the
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000011
The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, and the elements on the off-diagonal of D 1 are zero ; D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000012
The element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the j-th AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, 0 K×L is a matrix multiplied by L columns, The elements in 0 K×L are all zero, 0 L×K is a matrix of L rows by K columns, and the elements in 0 L×K are all zero;
该第一AP获取该第一中间矩阵D的前K个主对角线元素;The first AP acquires the first K main diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D;
该第一AP根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量、该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量和第K+p行向量,该第六中间矩阵Q的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,该网络节点为该第一网络中的AP或STA,该第六中间矩阵Q的第i个行向量为第i个STA对应的行向量,该第六中间矩阵Q的第K+j个行向量为第j个AP对应的行向量;该第一AP根据聚类算法对目标行向量进行聚类,得到第二聚类结果;其中,该目标行向量包括与所述第一AP对应的所述第K+p行向量以及所述第六中间矩阵Q的前K个行向量中与所述第一STA对应的行向量,该第二聚类结果包括多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中一个簇对应该多个分组的一个分组;该第一AP根据该多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点。 The first AP is based on the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K main diagonals in the first intermediate matrix D The elements determine the first K row vectors and the K+pth row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q, each row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node, and the network node is the AP or STA in the first network, The i-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the i-th STA, and the K+j-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the j-th AP; the first AP The target row vector is clustered according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result; wherein, the target row vector includes the K+pth row vector corresponding to the first AP and the sixth intermediate matrix Q The row vector corresponding to the first STA in the first K row vectors of An AP determines the network nodes respectively included in the multiple packets according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
在该实现方式中,示出了分布式的网络管理系统中,第一AP对第一AP和第一AP连接的STA进行分组的分组过程,为方案的实现提供具体的实现方式,提升了方案的可行性和多样性。In this implementation manner, a grouping process in which the first AP groups the STAs connected to the first AP and the first AP in the distributed network management system is shown, which provides a specific implementation manner for the implementation of the solution and improves the solution. feasibility and diversity.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP根据该信道矩阵W的第p个行向量、该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量和第K+p行向量,包括: In another possible implementation manner, the first AP is based on the p-th row vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first intermediate matrix D The first K main diagonal elements in determine the first K row vectors and the K+pth row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q, including:
该第一AP根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量、该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000013
该第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000014
所述W T为所述W转置;
The first AP is based on the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K main diagonals in the first intermediate matrix D The elements determine the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000013
the second intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000014
The W T is the W transpose;
该第一AP根据随机梯度下降算法和所述第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000015
确定第一矩阵X M的p个行向量和第二矩阵Y M,该第一矩阵X M与第三矩阵的近似度大于或等于第一预设阈值,该第二矩阵Y M与第四矩阵的近似度大于或等于第二预设阈值;
The first AP is based on the stochastic gradient descent algorithm and the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000015
Determine the p row vectors of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M , the degree of approximation between the first matrix X M and the third matrix is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the second matrix Y M and the fourth matrix The degree of approximation is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold;
其中,该第三矩阵为从该第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的左奇异矩阵选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,该左奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,该第三矩阵的M个列向量为从该左奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量;Wherein, the third matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the left singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the left singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, The M column vectors of the third matrix are M column vectors selected from the left singular matrix in descending order according to the size of the singular values;
该第四矩阵为从该第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的右奇异矩阵中选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,该右奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,该第四矩阵的M个列向量为从该右奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量;The fourth matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the right singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R. Each column vector in the right singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, and the The M column vectors of the fourth matrix are the M column vectors selected from the right singular matrix in descending order of singular values;
该M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,该log 2(K+L)指以2为底数对K+L求对数,该min(K,L)指取K和L中的最小值; The M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), the log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2, the min( K, L) refers to taking the minimum value of K and L;
该第一AP根据该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p、该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素、该第一矩阵X M的第p个行向量和该第二矩阵Y M计算得到第六中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000016
的前K行向量和第K+p行向量。
The first AP is based on the p +K th main diagonal element bp of the first intermediate matrix D, the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D, and the p th element of the first matrix X M row vectors and the second matrix Y M are calculated to obtain the sixth intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000016
The first K row vector and the K+pth row vector of .
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了第一AP确定第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量和第K+p行向量的具体实现过程,由于第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量分别对应第一网络的STA和第K+p行向量对应第一AP,这样便于后续第一AP对第一AP和第一AP连接的STA所对应的行向量进行聚类,以实现对第一AP对第一AP和第一AP连接的STA的分组。In this possible implementation, a specific implementation process for determining the first K row vectors and the K+p th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q by the first AP is provided, because the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q correspond to the first K row vectors respectively. The STA of a network and the K+p th row vector correspond to the first AP, which facilitates the subsequent first AP to cluster the row vectors corresponding to the first AP and the STA connected to the first AP, so as to realize the first AP to the th row vector. A grouping of APs and STAs connected to the first AP.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP根据聚类算法对目标行向量进行聚类,得到第二聚类结果,包括:该第一AP根据第一随机种子生成第一聚类中心,该第一聚类中心包括该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,每个簇对应一个聚类中心;该第一AP根据该第一聚类中心确定该目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇,得到该多个簇中每个簇包括的行向量;该第一AP根据该多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点,包括:当满足第一预设条件时,该第一AP将该多个簇中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。In another possible implementation manner, the first AP performs clustering on the target row vector according to a clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result, including: the first AP generates a first cluster center according to a first random seed, The first clustering center includes clustering centers corresponding to the multiple clusters, and each cluster corresponds to a clustering center; the first AP determines, according to the first clustering center, to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs the clusters, obtain the row vector included in each cluster in the multiple clusters; the first AP determines the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters, including: when the first preset condition is satisfied , the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供第一AP根据聚类算法对目标行向量的聚类过程,提升了方案的可实现性。In this possible implementation manner, the clustering process of the target row vector by the first AP according to the clustering algorithm is provided, which improves the implementability of the solution.
另一种可能的实现方式中,当不满足该第一预设条件时,该方法还包括:In another possible implementation manner, when the first preset condition is not satisfied, the method further includes:
该第一AP根据gossip协议计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第一平均向量;该第一AP将该多个簇中每个簇的行向量的第一平均向量分别作为该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,得到第二聚类中心;该第一AP根据该第二聚类中心确定该目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇;当满足该第二预设条件时,该第一AP将该多个簇中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。The first AP calculates the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol; the first AP calculates the first average vector of the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters as the The cluster centers corresponding to a plurality of clusters, respectively, obtain the second cluster center; the first AP determines the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs according to the second cluster center; when the second preset is satisfied When conditions are met, the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了不满足第一预设条件时,第一AP再次根据聚类算法对目标行向量的聚类,以实现对第一AP和第一AP连接的STA的分组。In this possible implementation, it is provided that when the first preset condition is not satisfied, the first AP clusters the target row vector again according to the clustering algorithm, so as to realize the grouping of the first AP and the STAs connected to the first AP. .
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一预设条件包括:In another possible implementation manner, the first preset condition includes:
该多个分组分别对应的簇的聚类中心的更新次数大于或等于第三预设阈值。The update times of the cluster centers of the clusters corresponding to the multiple groups respectively is greater than or equal to the third preset threshold.
在该可能的实现方式中,该第一预设条件可以设置为上述聚类的迭代次数,即多个簇分别对应的聚类中心的更新次数。In this possible implementation manner, the first preset condition may be set as the number of iterations of the foregoing clustering, that is, the number of updates of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一预设条件包括:In another possible implementation manner, the first preset condition includes:
第一收敛精度小于或等于预设的收敛精度;The first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy;
其中,该第一收敛精度为第一差值的绝对值与所述第一全局误差的比值,第一差值为第一全局误差与预设的初始化误差的差值;Wherein, the first convergence accuracy is the ratio of the absolute value of the first difference to the first global error, and the first difference is the difference between the first global error and a preset initialization error;
该第一全局误差为该第一网络中的所有AP分别计算得到的第一局部误差的和;The first global error is the sum of the first local errors calculated respectively by all APs in the first network;
该第一AP的第一局部误差包括该第一AP确定的该多个簇每个簇对应的误差的和;The first local error of the first AP includes a sum of errors corresponding to each of the multiple clusters determined by the first AP;
该每个簇对应的误差为该每个簇包括的行向量分别与该每个簇对应的第一平均向量之间的误差的和,该每个簇对应的第一平均向量为该第一AP根据流言协议(gossip protocol)计算得到的。The error corresponding to each cluster is the sum of the errors between the row vector included in each cluster and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster, and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster is the first AP Calculated according to the gossip protocol.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了另一种第一预设条件,由于第一AP没有第一网络的全 局干扰信息,因此第一AP可以通过gossip协议获取其他AP的第一局部误差,并通过所有AP的第一局部误差确定第一全局误差,并根据第一全局误差和预设的初始化误差确定第一收敛精度,即第一收敛精度等于该第一全局误差与预设的初始化误差的差值的绝对值。第一AP再将该第一收敛精度与预设的收敛精度对比,如果小于或等于该预设的收敛精度,则第一AP可以确定对目标行向量的聚类迭代达到收敛程度,使得第一AP根据多个簇的行向量划分该多个分组,这样使得多个分组中每个分组对应形成的子网络之间的信号干扰程度较小,子网络内的有效强度较大。In this possible implementation manner, another first preset condition is provided. Since the first AP does not have the global interference information of the first network, the first AP can obtain the first local errors of other APs through the gossip protocol, and The first global error is determined by the first local errors of all APs, and the first convergence accuracy is determined according to the first global error and the preset initialization error, that is, the first convergence accuracy is equal to the difference between the first global error and the preset initialization error The absolute value of the difference. The first AP then compares the first convergence accuracy with the preset convergence accuracy, and if it is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy, the first AP can determine that the clustering iteration on the target row vector reaches the convergence degree, so that the first The AP divides the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters, so that the degree of signal interference between the sub-networks formed corresponding to each group in the multiple groups is relatively small, and the effective strength within the sub-network is relatively large.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP根据该第一AP所属的分组调整该第一AP连接的STA,包括:该第一AP发送该第一AP所属的分组的信息,该第一AP所属的分组的信息用于该第一网络中的STA判断是否接入第一AP。In another possible implementation manner, the first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs, including: the first AP sending information of the group to which the first AP belongs, the first AP The information of the group to which the AP belongs is used by the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the first AP.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了一种第一AP根据该第一AP所属的分组调整第一AP连接的STA的具体调整方式。即由STA根据接收到的第一AP所属的分组的信息来确定是否连接该第一AP,从而实现对第一AP连接的STA的连接管理和规划。In this possible implementation manner, a specific adjustment manner in which the first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs is provided. That is, the STA determines whether to connect to the first AP according to the received information of the group to which the first AP belongs, so as to implement connection management and planning for the STA connected to the first AP.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP所属的分组的信息包括该第一AP所属的分组的第一分组编号;该第一AP发送该第一AP所属的分组的信息,包括:该第一AP发送第一信标帧,该第一信标帧携带该第一分组编号。In another possible implementation manner, the information of the group to which the first AP belongs includes a first group number of the group to which the first AP belongs; the first AP sends the information of the group to which the first AP belongs, including: the The first AP sends a first beacon frame, where the first beacon frame carries the first group number.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了第一AP通过该第一AP的信标帧携带该第一AP所属的分组的分组编号的方式,以便于第一网络的STA通过该信标帧确定是否连接该第一AP。In this possible implementation, a method is provided in which the first AP carries the group number of the group to which the first AP belongs through the beacon frame of the first AP, so that the STA of the first network can determine whether to use the beacon frame. Connect to the first AP.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP根据该第一AP所属的分组调整该第一AP连接的STA,包括:In another possible implementation manner, the first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs, including:
该第一AP判断与该第一AP已建立连接的第二STA是否属于同一分组;The first AP determines whether the second STA that has established a connection with the first AP belongs to the same group;
若是,则该第一AP保持为所述第二STA提供服务;If so, the first AP keeps providing services for the second STA;
若否,则该第一AP确定该第二STA所属的分组,并向第三AP发送第一指示信息;If not, the first AP determines the group to which the second STA belongs, and sends the first indication information to the third AP;
该第一指示信息用于指示该第三AP为该第二STA提供服务,该第三AP与该第二STA属于同一分组。The first indication information is used to indicate that the third AP provides services for the second STA, and the third AP and the second STA belong to the same group.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了第一AP根据该第一AP所属的分组调整该第一AP连接的STA的另一种实现方式,第一AP通过判断与第一AP已建立连接的第二STA是否属于同一分组,如果不属于,则第一AP可以向与该第二STA属于同一分组的第三AP发送指示信息,由该第三AP为该第二STA提供服务,从而实现对第一AP连接的STA的连接管理和规划。并且,该实现方式对STA是透明的,STA不感知,这样可以避免对STA的改进。In this possible implementation, another implementation is provided in which the first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs. Whether the two STAs belong to the same group, if not, the first AP can send indication information to a third AP that belongs to the same group as the second STA, and the third AP provides services for the second STA, thereby realizing the Connection management and planning for STAs connected to an AP. Moreover, this implementation is transparent to the STA, and the STA is not aware of it, so that the improvement to the STA can be avoided.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一AP接收第四AP发送的第一分组信息,该第一分组信息包括该第四AP所属的分组信息和该第四AP的标识,该第四AP包括该第一网络中除该第一AP之外的AP;该第一AP根据该第一分组信息确定第五AP与该第一AP属于同一分组,该第五AP为该第四AP中的部分AP;该第一AP根据该第五AP的标识、该第一AP的标识和预设的AP优先级规则判断该第一AP的优先级是否高于该第五AP的优先级;若该第一AP的优先级高于该第五AP的优先级,则该第一AP通过扫描信道选择第一信道,并将该第一AP接入的信道调整为该第一信道;该第一AP向该第五AP发送第一信道 分配信息,该第一信道分配信息用于指示该第五AP接入该第一信道。In another possible implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving, by the first AP, first grouping information sent by a fourth AP, where the first grouping information includes grouping information to which the fourth AP belongs and an identifier of the fourth AP , the fourth AP includes APs other than the first AP in the first network; the first AP determines according to the first group information that the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group, and the fifth AP is the Some APs in the fourth AP; the first AP judges whether the priority of the first AP is higher than that of the fifth AP according to the identification of the fifth AP, the identification of the first AP and the preset AP priority rule Priority; if the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP, the first AP selects the first channel by scanning channels, and adjusts the channel accessed by the first AP to the first channel ; The first AP sends first channel allocation information to the fifth AP, where the first channel allocation information is used to instruct the fifth AP to access the first channel.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了在分布式的网络管理系统中,同一分组内由第一AP分配信息,并通知同一分组内的多个AP的信道分配信息的过程,从而实现多AP联合传输,以提高网络吞吐量和网络传输性能。In this possible implementation, in a distributed network management system, the first AP allocates information in the same group and notifies the channel allocation information of multiple APs in the same group, so as to realize multi-AP joint transmission to improve network throughput and network transmission performance.
另一种可能的实现方式中,若该第一AP的优先级低于该第五AP的优先级,该方法还包括:该第一AP接收第六AP发送第二信道分配信息,该第二信道分配信息为该第六AP选择的第二信道的信息,该第六AP为该第五AP中优先级最高的AP;该第一AP根据该第二信道分配信息将该第一AP接入的信道调整为该第二信道。In another possible implementation manner, if the priority of the first AP is lower than the priority of the fifth AP, the method further includes: the first AP receives the second channel allocation information sent by the sixth AP, and the second The channel allocation information is information of the second channel selected by the sixth AP, and the sixth AP is the AP with the highest priority in the fifth AP; the first AP accesses the first AP according to the second channel allocation information The channel is adjusted to the second channel.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了在分布式的网络管理系统中,同一分组内由其他AP选择信道并通知该第一AP该信道分配信息的过程,以便于第一AP调整接入的信道,从而实现多AP联合传输,以提高网络吞吐量和网络传输性能。In this possible implementation, in a distributed network management system, a process of selecting a channel by other APs in the same group and notifying the first AP of the channel allocation information is provided, so that the first AP can adjust the access channel , so as to realize multi-AP joint transmission to improve network throughput and network transmission performance.
本申请实施例第二方面提供一种网络管理方法,该网络管理方法包括:A second aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management method, where the network management method includes:
控制设备向服务器发送第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括第一网络的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息,该第一网络为该控制设备控制的网络;该控制设备接收服务器多个分组的分组结果,该多个分组包括该第一网络中的所有STA和所有AP;该控制设备根据该分组结果确定该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA;该控制设备发送第二分组信息,该第二分组信息包括该第一网络的AP分别所属的分组的信息和该第一网络的STA分别所属的分组的信息。The control device sends first channel parameter information to the server, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs of the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP, the first channel parameter information The network is a network controlled by the control device; the control device receives grouping results of multiple groups from the server, and the multiple groups include all STAs and all APs in the first network; the control device determines the multiple groups according to the grouping results APs and STAs included in each group; the control device sends second grouping information, where the second grouping information includes information about groups to which APs of the first network belong respectively and information about groups to which STAs of the first network belong respectively .
本实施例中,在集中式的网络管理系统,控制设备收集有该第一网络中的全局干扰信息,并上报给服务器,再接收服务器发送的多个分组的分组结果,然后由控制设备发送多个分组的分组信息,以便于第一网络的AP根据分组信息调整连接的STA,从而实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划。由于该多个分组是服务器根据第一信道参数信息划分的,因此,通过本申请实施例的方案实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。In this embodiment, in the centralized network management system, the control device collects the global interference information in the first network, reports it to the server, and then receives the grouping results of multiple packets sent by the server, and then the control device sends the multiple packets. The grouping information of each group is convenient for the AP of the first network to adjust the connected STAs according to the grouping information, so as to realize the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP. Since the multiple groups are divided by the server according to the first channel parameter information, implementing the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving the performance of network transmission .
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该控制设备为该多个分组中同一分组的AP分配相同的信道;该控制设备发送第二分组信息,包括:该控制设备发送该第二分组信息,该第二分组信息包括该多个分组分别对应的信道分配信息。In another possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the control device assigns the same channel to APs in the same group in the multiple groups; the control device sending the second grouping information includes: the control device sending the second group information Grouping information, the second grouping information includes channel allocation information corresponding to the multiple groups respectively.
在该可能的实现方式中,该控制设备可以进一步为同一分组内的AP分配相同的信道,以便于同一分组内的AP接入同一信道,从而实现多AP联合传输,提高网络吞吐量和网络传输性能。In this possible implementation, the control device can further allocate the same channel to the APs in the same group, so that the APs in the same group can access the same channel, thereby realizing multi-AP joint transmission and improving network throughput and network transmission performance.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该控制设备为该多个分组中同一分组的AP分配相同的信道,包括:该控制设备根据该第一信道参数信息为该多个分组中每个分组的AP分配相应的信道,其中,该控制设备为同一分组的AP分配的信道相同。In another possible implementation manner, the control device assigns the same channel to the APs in the same group in the multiple groups, including: the control device assigns the AP of each group in the multiple groups according to the first channel parameter information Corresponding channels are allocated, wherein the channels allocated by the control device to APs in the same group are the same.
在该可能的实现方式中,该控制设备可以结合第一信道参数信息为同一分组内的AP分配信道,以使得分配的信道符合当前信道状态,从而提高网络传输性能。In this possible implementation manner, the control device may allocate channels to APs in the same group in combination with the first channel parameter information, so that the allocated channels conform to the current channel state, thereby improving network transmission performance.
本申请实施例第三方面提供一种网络管理方法,该网络管理方法包括:A third aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management method, where the network management method includes:
第二AP向控制设备发送第二信道参数信息,该第二信道参数信息包括该第二AP与该 第二AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;该第二AP接收该控制设备发送的第二分组信息,该第二分组信息包括该第一网络的AP分别所属的分组的信息和该第一网络的STA分别所属的分组的信息;该第二AP根据该第二分组信息确定该第二AP所属的分组;该第二AP根据该第二AP所属的分组调整该第二AP连接的STA。The second AP sends second channel parameter information to the control device, where the second channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the second AP and STAs within the signal coverage of the second AP; the second AP receives the control The second grouping information sent by the device, the second grouping information includes the information of the groups to which the APs of the first network belong respectively and the information of the groups to which the STAs of the first network belong respectively; the second AP according to the second grouping information Determine the group to which the second AP belongs; the second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
本实施例中,该第二AP获取第二信道参数信息,并发送给控制设备;然后,控制设备向该第二AP发送第二分组信息,第二AP根据该第二分组信息调整该第二AP连接的STA,从而实现第二AP对第二AP连接的STA的连接管理和规划。并且,由于该多个分组是服务器根据第一信道参数信息划分的,因此,通过本申请实施例的方案实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。In this embodiment, the second AP acquires the second channel parameter information and sends it to the control device; then, the control device sends the second grouping information to the second AP, and the second AP adjusts the second grouping information according to the second grouping information The STA connected to the AP, thereby implementing the connection management and planning of the STA connected to the second AP by the second AP. In addition, since the multiple groups are divided by the server according to the first channel parameter information, implementing the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission. performance.
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二分组信息还包括第三信道分配信息,该第三信道分配信息包括该控制设备为该第二AP分配的第三信道的信息;该方法还包括:In a possible implementation manner, the second grouping information further includes third channel assignment information, where the third channel assignment information includes information about a third channel assigned by the control device to the second AP; the method further includes:
该第二AP根据该第三信道分配信息将第二AP接入的信道调整为该第三信道。The second AP adjusts the channel accessed by the second AP to the third channel according to the third channel allocation information.
在该可能的实现方式中,该第二AP可以根据控制设备分配的第三信道的信息调整该第二AP接入的信道,从而实现同一分组内的多个AP接入同一信道,以实现多AP联合传输,提高网络吞吐量。In this possible implementation manner, the second AP can adjust the channel accessed by the second AP according to the information of the third channel allocated by the control device, so that multiple APs in the same group can access the same channel, so as to realize multiple AP joint transmission to improve network throughput.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二AP根据该第二AP所属的分组调整该第二AP连接的STA,包括:该第二AP发送该第二AP所属的分组的信息,该第二AP所属的分组的信息用于指示第一网络中的STA判断是否接入该第二AP,该第一网络为该控制设备控制的网络。In another possible implementation manner, the second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs, including: the second AP sends information of the group to which the second AP belongs, and the second AP sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs. The information of the group to which the AP belongs is used to instruct the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the second AP, where the first network is a network controlled by the control device.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了一种第二AP调整该第二AP连接的STA的管理和规划。In this possible implementation manner, a management and planning for the second AP to adjust the STA connected to the second AP is provided.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二AP所属的分组的信息包括该第二AP所属的分组的第二分组编号;该第二AP发送该第二AP所属的分组的信息,包括:In another possible implementation manner, the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes a second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs; the second AP sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs, including:
该第二AP发送第二信标帧,该第二信标帧携带该第二分组编号。The second AP sends a second beacon frame, where the second beacon frame carries the second group number.
在该可能的实现方式中,第二AP可以通过信标帧携带该第二分组编号,以通知该第一网络中的STA和其他AP该第二AP所属的分组,使得同一分组的STA连接到该第二AP上。In this possible implementation manner, the second AP may carry the second group number through a beacon frame to notify the STA in the first network and other APs of the group to which the second AP belongs, so that STAs in the same group are connected to on the second AP.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二AP根据该第二AP所属的分组调整该第二AP连接的STA,包括:该第二AP确定该第二AP所属的分组中包括的STA;该第二AP判断该第二AP和第三STA是否属于同一分组,该第三STA为与该第二AP已建立连接的STA;若是,则该第二AP保持为该第三STA提供服务;若否,则该第二AP根据该第三STA所属的分组确定第七AP,并向该第七AP发送第三指示信息;其中,该第三指示信息用于指示该第七AP为该第三STA提供服务,该第七AP与该第三STA属于同一分组。In another possible implementation manner, the second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs, including: the second AP determining the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs; the The second AP determines whether the second AP and the third STA belong to the same group, and the third STA is a STA that has established a connection with the second AP; if so, the second AP keeps providing services for the third STA; if If no, the second AP determines the seventh AP according to the group to which the third STA belongs, and sends third indication information to the seventh AP; wherein the third indication information is used to indicate that the seventh AP is the third AP The STA provides services, and the seventh AP and the third STA belong to the same group.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了第二AP根据该第二AP所属的分组调整该第二AP连接的STA的另一种实现方式,第二AP通过判断与第二AP已建立连接的第三STA是否属于同一分组,如果不属于,则第二AP可以向与该第三STA属于同一分组的第七AP发送指示信息,由该第七AP为该第三STA提供服务,从而实现对第二AP连接的STA的连接管理和规划。并且,该实现方式对STA是透明的,STA不感知,这样可以避免对STA的改进。In this possible implementation, another implementation is provided in which the second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs. Whether the three STAs belong to the same group, if not, the second AP may send indication information to the seventh AP that belongs to the same group as the third STA, and the seventh AP provides services for the third STA, thereby realizing the Connection management and planning of STAs connected to two APs. Moreover, this implementation is transparent to the STA, and the STA is not aware of it, so that the improvement to the STA can be avoided.
本申请实施例第四方面提供一种网络管理方法,该网络管理方法包括:A fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management method, where the network management method includes:
第四STA接收第二AP发送的第二AP所属的分组的信息;然后,第四STA根据第二AP 所属的分组的信息确定第二AP与第四STA属于同一分组;该第四STA将其连接的AP调整为该第二AP。The fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and sent by the second AP; then, the fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs; the fourth STA The connected AP is adjusted to the second AP.
在该可能的实现方式中,该第四STA根据第二AP所属的分组的信息和该第四STA所属的分组确定第二AP与第四STA属于同一分组,并调整该第四STA连接的AP为该第二AP,从而实现对AP连接的STA的连接管理和规划。并且,由于该多个分组是服务器根据第一信道参数信息划分的,因此,通过本申请实施例的方案实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。In this possible implementation manner, the fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and the group to which the fourth STA belongs, and adjusts the AP to which the fourth STA is connected It is the second AP, so as to realize the connection management and planning of the STA connected to the AP. In addition, since the multiple groups are divided by the server according to the first channel parameter information, implementing the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission. performance.
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二AP所属的分组的信息包括该第二AP所属的分组的第二分组编号;该第四STA接收第二AP发送该第二AP所属的分组的信息,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes a second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs; the fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the second AP belongs sent by the second AP, include:
该第四STA接收该第二AP发送的第二信标帧,该第一信标帧携带该第二分组编号;The fourth STA receives a second beacon frame sent by the second AP, where the first beacon frame carries the second group number;
该第四STA根据该第二分组编号确定该第二AP与该第四STA属于同一分组;The fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the second group number;
若该第二分组编号与该第四STA所属的分组的分组编号一致,该第四STA确定该第二AP与该第四STA属于同一分组。If the second group number is consistent with the group number of the group to which the fourth STA belongs, the fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group.
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了第四STA通过接收第二AP的第二信标帧来确定第二AP所属的分组的方式,并根据该第二AP所属的分组和第四STA所属的分组确定是否连接该第二AP。In this possible implementation manner, a manner is provided in which the fourth STA determines the group to which the second AP belongs by receiving the second beacon frame of the second AP, and according to the group to which the second AP belongs and the group to which the fourth STA belongs The group determines whether to connect the second AP.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:In another possible implementation manner, the method further includes:
该第四STA接收第八AP发送的该第四STA所属的分组的信息,该第八AP为该第四STA调整连接之前所连接的AP。The fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs and is sent by the eighth AP, where the eighth AP is the AP connected before the fourth STA adjusts the connection.
在该可能的实现方式中,该第四STA先获取该第四STA所属的分组的信息,具体可以与该第四STA属于同一分组的第八AP获取该第四STA所属的分组信息。In this possible implementation manner, the fourth STA first obtains the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs. Specifically, the eighth AP that belongs to the same group as the fourth STA may obtain the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs.
本申请实施例第五方面提供一种网络管理系统,该网络管理系统包括服务器、控制设备、第二AP和第四STA;A fifth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management system, where the network management system includes a server, a control device, a second AP, and a fourth STA;
该第二AP,用于向控制设备发送第二信道参数信息;The second AP is used to send the second channel parameter information to the control device;
该控制设备,用于接收第二AP发送的第二信道参数信息;向服务器发送第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括该第一网络的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;The control device is configured to receive second channel parameter information sent by a second AP; send first channel parameter information to a server, where the first channel parameter information includes each AP and each AP in all APs of the first network Channel parameter information between STAs within the signal coverage range;
该服务器,用于接收控制设备发送的第一信道参数信息;根据该第一信道参数信息对第一网络的所有AP和第一网络的所有STA进行分组,得到多个分组;向控制设备发送该多个分组的分组结果,该分组结果用于指示该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA;The server is configured to receive first channel parameter information sent by the control device; group all APs of the first network and all STAs of the first network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups; send the first channel parameter information to the control device Grouping results of multiple groups, where the grouping results are used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups;
该控制设备,用于接收该多个分组的分组结果;根据该分组结果确定该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA;发送第二分组信息,该第二分组信息包括第一网络的AP分别所属的分组的信息和第一网络的STA分别所属的分组的信息;The control device is configured to receive grouping results of the multiple groups; determine APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups according to the grouping results; send second grouping information, where the second grouping information includes information about the first network Information about the groups to which the APs belong respectively and information about the groups to which the STAs of the first network belong respectively;
该第二AP,还用于根据该第二分组信息确定第二AP所属的分组,并根据该第二AP所属的分组调整该第二AP连接的STA。The second AP is further configured to determine the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information, and adjust the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
一种可能的实现方式中,该第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W,该信道矩阵W为K行乘以L列的矩阵,K为该第一网络包括的STA数目,L为该第一网络包括的AP数目,该信 道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000017
w ij为第i个STA与第j个AP之间的信道增益,i为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的整数,j为大于或等于1且小于或等于L的整数,该服务器具体用于:
In a possible implementation manner, the first channel parameter information includes a channel matrix W, where the channel matrix W is a matrix of K rows multiplied by L columns, K is the number of STAs included in the first network, and L is the first network. The number of APs included, the channel matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000017
w ij is the channel gain between the i-th STA and the j-th AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L, the server uses At:
根据该信道矩阵W计算得到第一中间矩阵D,该第一中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000018
D 1为K行乘以K列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000019
D 1的主对角线上的元素a i为该第一网络中的第i个STA分别与该第一网络中的所有AP之间的信道增益之和,D 1的非对角线上的元素均为零;D 2为L行乘以L列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000020
D 2的主对角线上的元素b j为该第一网络中的第j个AP分别与该第一网络中的所有STA之间的信道增益之和,0 K×L为K行乘以L列的矩阵,0 K×L中的元素均为零,0 L×K为L行乘以K列的矩阵,0 L×K中的元素均为零;根据该信道矩阵W和该第一中间矩阵D确定第二中间矩阵,该第二中间矩阵中的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,该网络节点为该第一网络中的STA或AP;根据聚类算法对该第二中间矩阵的行向量进行聚类,得到第一聚类结果,该第一聚类结果包括多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中的一个簇对应该多个分组中的一个分组;根据该多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点。
According to the channel matrix W, a first intermediate matrix D is obtained, and the first intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000018
D 1 is a matrix with K rows by K columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000019
The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, respectively, and the off-diagonal elements of D 1 The elements are all zero; D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000020
The element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the jth AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, and 0 K×L is K rows multiplied by For a matrix of L columns, the elements in 0 K×L are all zero, and 0 L×K is a matrix of L rows multiplied by K columns, and the elements in 0 L×K are all zero; according to the channel matrix W and the first The intermediate matrix D determines a second intermediate matrix, each row vector in the second intermediate matrix corresponds to a network node, and the network node is the STA or AP in the first network; The row vector is clustered to obtain a first clustering result, where the first clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups; according to the multiple clusters The row vector of determines the network nodes respectively included in the plurality of packets.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该信道矩阵W为带权二分图的边权矩阵W,该带权二分图包括第一类型顶点和第二类型顶点,该第一类型顶点表示该第一网络中的STA,该第二类型顶点表示该第一网络中的AP,该边权矩阵W的元素为该带权二分图的边权,该带权二分图的边权为该第一网络中的STA与AP之间的信道增益,该第一中间矩阵为该带权二分图的度矩阵。In another possible implementation manner, the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix W of a weighted bipartite graph, the weighted bipartite graph includes a first type vertex and a second type vertex, and the first type vertex represents the first network The STA in , the second type vertex represents the AP in the first network, the element of the edge weight matrix W is the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph, and the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph is the first network. The channel gain between the STA and the AP, the first intermediate matrix is the degree matrix of the weighted bipartite graph.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该服务器具体用于:In another possible implementation, the server is specifically used for:
该服务器根据该信道矩阵W和该第一中间矩阵D确定第三中间矩阵R,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000021
W T为W的转置;对该第三中间矩阵R进行奇异值分解,得到该第三中间矩阵R的左奇异矩阵和该第三中间矩阵R的右奇异矩阵;其中,该第三中间矩阵R=UΣV T,该Σ为对角矩阵,该V T为该右奇异矩阵V的转置;该对角矩阵Σ的第r列向量上对应的主对角线元素为该左奇异矩阵U的第r列向量对应的奇异值,该对角矩阵Σ的第r列向量上对应的主对角线元素为 右奇异矩阵V的第r列向量对应的奇异值,r为大于或等于1且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,min(K,L)指取K和L中最小值;按照该对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从该左奇异矩阵U中选取对应的M个列向量,得到第四中间矩阵U M,以及按照该对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从该右奇异矩阵V中选取对应M个列向量,得到第五中间矩阵V M,M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,log 2(K+L)指以2为底数对K+L求对数;根据该第四中间矩阵、该第五中间矩阵和该第一中间矩阵计算得到该第二中间矩阵Z,该
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000022
The server determines a third intermediate matrix R according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000021
W T is the transpose of W; perform singular value decomposition on the third intermediate matrix R to obtain the left singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R and the right singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R; wherein, the third intermediate matrix R=UΣV T , the Σ is a diagonal matrix, and the V T is the transpose of the right singular matrix V; the corresponding main diagonal element on the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix Σ is the left singular matrix U The singular value corresponding to the rth column vector, the corresponding main diagonal element on the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix Σ is the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of the right singular matrix V, and r is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or an integer equal to min(K, L), min(K, L) refers to the minimum value between K and L; select from the left singular matrix U in descending order of the singular values in the diagonal matrix Σ The corresponding M column vectors are obtained to obtain the fourth intermediate matrix U M , and the corresponding M column vectors are selected from the right singular matrix V according to the size order of the singular values in the diagonal matrix Σ, and the fifth intermediate matrix is obtained. Matrix V M , where M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), and log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2; according to The fourth intermediate matrix, the fifth intermediate matrix and the first intermediate matrix are calculated to obtain the second intermediate matrix Z, the
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000022
另一种可能的实现方式中,该服务器具体用于:In another possible implementation, the server is specifically used for:
根据聚类算法对该第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000023
包括的K+L个行向量进行聚类,得到多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中的一个簇对应该多个分组中的一个分组;
According to the clustering algorithm, the second intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000023
The included K+L row vectors are clustered to obtain row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups;
将多个簇的行向量中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。The network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the row vectors of multiple clusters are divided into the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该控制设备还用于:In another possible implementation manner, the control device is also used for:
为该多个分组中同一分组的AP分配相同的信道;Allocate the same channel for APs in the same group in the multiple groups;
该控制设备具体用于:The control device is specifically used for:
向第二AP发送该第二分组信息,该第二分组信息包括第三信道分配信息,该第三信道分配信息包括该控制设备为该第二AP分配的第三信道的信息;sending the second grouping information to the second AP, where the second grouping information includes third channel allocation information, and the third channel allocation information includes information about the third channel allocated by the control device to the second AP;
该第二AP还用于:The second AP is also used to:
根据该第二分组信息包括的该第三信道分配信息将第二AP接入的信道调整为第三信道。The channel accessed by the second AP is adjusted to the third channel according to the third channel allocation information included in the second grouping information.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该控制设备具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the control device is specifically used for:
根据该第一信道参数信息为该多个分组中每个分组的AP分配相应的信道,其中,该控制设备为同一分组的AP分配的信道相同。According to the first channel parameter information, a corresponding channel is allocated to APs in each group of the multiple groups, wherein the channels allocated by the control device to APs in the same group are the same.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该控制设备具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the control device is specifically used for:
根据该第一信道参数信息为该多个分组中每个分组的AP分配相应的信道,其中,该控制设备为同一分组的AP分配的信道相同。According to the first channel parameter information, a corresponding channel is allocated to APs in each group of the multiple groups, wherein the channels allocated by the control device to APs in the same group are the same.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二AP具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the second AP is specifically used for:
发送该第二AP所属的分组的信息,该第二AP所属的分组的信息用于指示第一网络中的STA判断是否接入该第二AP,该第一网络为该控制设备控制的网络。The information of the group to which the second AP belongs is sent, where the information of the group to which the second AP belongs is used to instruct the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the second AP, and the first network is a network controlled by the control device.
该第四STA,用于接收第二AP发送的该第二AP所属的分组的信息;根据第二AP所属的分组的信息确定第二AP与第四STA属于同一分组;将其连接的AP调整为该第二AP。The fourth STA is used to receive the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and sent by the second AP; determine that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs; adjust the AP to which it is connected is the second AP.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二AP具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the second AP is specifically used for:
该第二AP发送第二信标帧,该第一信标帧携带该第二AP所属的分组的第二分组编号;The second AP sends a second beacon frame, where the first beacon frame carries the second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs;
该第四STA具体用于:The fourth STA is specifically used for:
根据该第二分组编号确定该第二AP与该第四STA属于同一分组;Determine according to the second group number that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group;
若该第二分组编号与该第四STA所属的分组的分组编号一致,确定该第二AP与该第四STA属于同一分组。If the second group number is consistent with the group number of the group to which the fourth STA belongs, it is determined that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第四STA还用于:In another possible implementation manner, the fourth STA is also used for:
接收第八AP发送的该第四STA所属的分组的信息,该第八AP为该第四STA调整连接之前所连接的AP。Receive the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs and is sent by the eighth AP, where the eighth AP is the AP connected before the fourth STA adjusts the connection.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二AP具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the second AP is specifically used for:
确定该第二AP所属的分组中包括的STA;determining the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs;
判断该第二AP和第三STA是否属于同一分组,该第三STA为与该第二AP已建立连接的STA;Determine whether the second AP and the third STA belong to the same group, and the third STA is a STA that has established a connection with the second AP;
若是,则保持为该第三STA提供服务;If so, keep serving the third STA;
若否,则根据该第三STA所属的分组确定第七AP,并向该第七AP发送第三指示信息;其中,该第三指示信息用于指示该第七AP为该第三STA提供服务,该第七AP与该第三STA属于同一分组。If not, determine a seventh AP according to the group to which the third STA belongs, and send third indication information to the seventh AP; wherein the third indication information is used to instruct the seventh AP to provide services for the third STA , the seventh AP and the third STA belong to the same group.
本申请实施例第六方面提供一种网络管理系统,该网络管理系统包括第一AP和第一STA;A sixth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a network management system, where the network management system includes a first AP and a first STA;
该第一AP,用于获取第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括第一网络中的第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;根据该第一信道参数信息对该第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,该第一STA包括该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的且与第一AP已建立连接的STA;发送该多个分组的分组结果,该分组结果用于指示该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA;根据该第一AP所属的分组调整该第一AP连接的STA。The first AP is used to acquire first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; according to the The first channel parameter information groups the first AP and the first STA to obtain multiple groups, and the first STA includes the STA within the signal coverage of the first AP and having established a connection with the first AP; sending the Grouping results of multiple groups, where the grouping results are used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups; adjust the STAs connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP为该第一网络中的第p个AP,该第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W的第p个列向量,该信道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000024
w ij为第i个STA与第j个AP之间的信道增益,i为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的整数,j为大于或等于1且小于或等于L的整数,p为小于或等于所述L的整数,L为第一网络包括的AP数目,K为第一网络包括的STA数目;该第一AP具体用于:
In a possible implementation manner, the first AP is the pth AP in the first network, and the first channel parameter information includes the pth column vector of the channel matrix W, and the channel matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000024
w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L, p is less than or equal to is an integer equal to the L, where L is the number of APs included in the first network, and K is the number of STAs included in the first network; the first AP is specifically used for:
根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量计算得到第一中间矩阵D的第p+K个主对角线元素b pAccording to the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D is obtained;
其中,该第一中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000025
该D 1为K行乘以K列的矩阵,该
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000027
D 1的主对角线上的元素a i为第一网络中的第i个STA与第一网络中的 所有AP之间的信道增益之和,D 1的非对角线上的元素均为零;D 2为L行乘以L列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000028
D 2的主对角线上的元素b j为第一网络中的第j个AP与第一网络中的所有STA之间的信道增益之和,0 K×L为乘以L列的矩阵,0 K×L中的元素均为零,0 L×K为L行乘以K列的矩阵,0 L×K中的元素均为零;
Among them, the first intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000025
The D 1 is a matrix of K rows by K columns, the
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000027
The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, and the elements on the off-diagonal of D 1 are zero ; D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000028
The element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the j-th AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, 0 K×L is a matrix multiplied by L columns, The elements in 0 K×L are all zero, 0 L×K is a matrix of L rows by K columns, and the elements in 0 L×K are all zero;
获取该第一中间矩阵D的前K个主对角线元素;Obtain the first K main diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D;
根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量、该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量和第K+p行向量,该第六中间矩阵Q的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,该网络节点为该第一网络中的AP或STA,该第六中间矩阵Q的第i个行向量为第i个STA对应的行向量,该第六中间矩阵Q的第K+j个行向量为第j个AP对应的行向量; According to the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K main diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D, determine the sixth The first K row vectors and the K+pth row vector of the intermediate matrix Q, each row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an AP or STA in the first network, and the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node. The i-th row vector of the matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the i-th STA, and the K+j-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the j-th AP;
根据聚类算法对目标行向量进行聚类,得到第二聚类结果;其中,该目标行向量包括与所述第一AP对应的所述第K+p行向量以及所述第六中间矩阵Q的前K个行向量中与所述第一STA对应的行向量,该第二聚类结果包括多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中一个簇对应该多个分组的一个分组;The target row vector is clustered according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result; wherein, the target row vector includes the K+pth row vector corresponding to the first AP and the sixth intermediate matrix Q The row vector corresponding to the first STA in the first K row vectors of , the second clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, and one cluster in the multiple clusters corresponds to a grouping of the multiple groupings;
根据该多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点。The network nodes respectively included in the plurality of groups are determined according to the row vectors of the plurality of clusters.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the first AP is specifically used for:
根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量、该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000029
该第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000030
所述W T为所述W转置;
Determine the third the p-th row vector of the intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000029
the second intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000030
The W T is the W transpose;
根据随机梯度下降算法和所述第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000031
确定第一矩阵X M的p个行向量和第二矩阵Y M,该第一矩阵X M与第三矩阵的近似度大于或等于第一预设阈值,该第二矩阵Y M与第四矩阵的近似度大于或等于第二预设阈值;
According to the stochastic gradient descent algorithm and the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000031
Determine the p row vectors of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M , the degree of approximation between the first matrix X M and the third matrix is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the second matrix Y M and the fourth matrix The degree of approximation is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold;
其中,该第三矩阵为从该第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的左奇异矩阵选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,该左奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,该第三矩阵的M个列向量为从该左奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量;Wherein, the third matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the left singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the left singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, The M column vectors of the third matrix are M column vectors selected from the left singular matrix in descending order according to the size of the singular values;
该第四矩阵为从该第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的右奇异矩阵中选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,该右奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,该第四矩阵的M个列向量为从该右奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量;The fourth matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the right singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R. Each column vector in the right singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, and the The M column vectors of the fourth matrix are the M column vectors selected from the right singular matrix in descending order of singular values;
该M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,该log 2(K+L)指以2为底数对K+L求对数,该min(K,L)指取K和L中的最小值; The M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), the log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2, the min( K, L) refers to taking the minimum value of K and L;
根据该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p、该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对 角线元素、该第一矩阵X M的第p个行向量和该第二矩阵Y M计算得到第六中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000032
的前K行向量和第K+p行向量。
According to the p+K th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D, the p th row vector sum of the first matrix X M The second matrix Y M is calculated to obtain the sixth intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000032
The first K row vector and the K+pth row vector of .
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the first AP is specifically used for:
根据第一随机种子生成第一聚类中心,该第一聚类中心包括该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,每个簇对应一个聚类中心;Generate a first cluster center according to the first random seed, the first cluster center includes the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively, and each cluster corresponds to a cluster center;
根据该第一聚类中心确定该目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇,得到该多个簇中每个簇包括的行向量;Determine the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs according to the first cluster center, and obtain the row vector included in each cluster in the multiple clusters;
根据该多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点,包括:当满足第一预设条件时,该第一AP将该多个簇中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。Determining the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters includes: when a first preset condition is satisfied, the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vectors of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,当不满足该第一预设条件时,该第一AP还用于:In another possible implementation manner, when the first preset condition is not met, the first AP is further used for:
根据gossip协议计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第一平均向量;Calculate the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol;
将该多个簇中每个簇的行向量的第一平均向量分别作为该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,得到第二聚类中心;Taking the first average vector of the row vectors of each cluster in the multiple clusters as the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters, respectively, to obtain the second cluster center;
根据该第二聚类中心确定该目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇;当满足该第二预设条件时,该第一AP将该多个簇中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。The cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs is determined according to the second cluster center; when the second preset condition is satisfied, the first AP determines the network corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters Nodes are grouped into the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一预设条件包括:In another possible implementation manner, the first preset condition includes:
该多个分组分别对应的簇的聚类中心的更新次数大于或等于第三预设阈值。The update times of the cluster centers of the clusters corresponding to the multiple groups respectively is greater than or equal to the third preset threshold.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一预设条件包括:In another possible implementation manner, the first preset condition includes:
第一收敛精度小于或等于预设的收敛精度;The first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy;
其中,该第一收敛精度为第一差值的绝对值与所述第一全局误差的比值,第一差值为第一全局误差与预设的初始化误差的差值;Wherein, the first convergence accuracy is the ratio of the absolute value of the first difference to the first global error, and the first difference is the difference between the first global error and a preset initialization error;
该第一全局误差为该第一网络中的所有AP分别计算得到的第一局部误差的和;The first global error is the sum of the first local errors calculated respectively by all APs in the first network;
该第一AP的第一局部误差包括该第一AP确定的该多个簇每个簇对应的误差的和;The first local error of the first AP includes a sum of errors corresponding to each of the multiple clusters determined by the first AP;
该每个簇对应的误差为该每个簇包括的行向量分别与该每个簇对应的第一平均向量之间的误差的和,该每个簇对应的第一平均向量为该第一AP根据gossip协议计算得到的。The error corresponding to each cluster is the sum of the errors between the row vector included in each cluster and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster, and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster is the first AP Calculated according to the gossip protocol.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the first AP is specifically used for:
发送该第一AP所属的分组的信息,该第一AP所属的分组的信息用于该第一网络中的STA判断是否接入第一AP;Sending information about the group to which the first AP belongs, where the information about the group to which the first AP belongs is used for the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the first AP;
该网络管理系统还包括第五STA,该第五STA与第一AP未建立连接;The network management system further includes a fifth STA, and the fifth STA does not establish a connection with the first AP;
根据第一AP所属的分组的信息和该第五STA所属的分组确定该第一AP与该第五STA属于同一分组;Determine that the first AP and the fifth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the first AP belongs and the group to which the fifth STA belongs;
所述第五STA将该第五STA连接的AP调整为该第一AP。The fifth STA adjusts the AP connected to the fifth STA to the first AP.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP所属的分组的信息包括该第一AP所属的分组的第一分组编号;该第一AP具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the information of the group to which the first AP belongs includes a first group number of the group to which the first AP belongs; the first AP is specifically used for:
发送第一信标帧,该第一信标帧携带该第一分组编号;sending a first beacon frame, where the first beacon frame carries the first group number;
该第五STA具体用于:The fifth STA is specifically used for:
根据该第一信标帧确定该第一AP所属的分组的第一分组编号;determining the first group number of the group to which the first AP belongs according to the first beacon frame;
所述第五STA根据所述第一分组编号和所述第五STA所属的分组编号确定该第一AP与该第五STA属于同一分组。The fifth STA determines that the first AP and the fifth STA belong to the same group according to the first group number and the group number to which the fifth STA belongs.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该网络管理系统还包括第二STA;该第一AP具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the network management system further includes a second STA; the first AP is specifically used for:
判断与该第一AP已建立连接的第二STA是否属于同一分组;Determine whether the second STA that has established a connection with the first AP belongs to the same group;
若是,则保持为所述第二STA提供服务;If so, keep serving the second STA;
若否,则确定该第二STA所属的分组,并向第三AP发送第一指示信息;If not, determine the group to which the second STA belongs, and send the first indication information to the third AP;
该第一指示信息用于指示该第三AP为该第二STA提供服务,该第三AP与该第二STA属于同一分组。The first indication information is used to indicate that the third AP provides services for the second STA, and the third AP and the second STA belong to the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该网络管理系统还包括第五AP;该第一AP还用于:In another possible implementation manner, the network management system further includes a fifth AP; the first AP is further used for:
接收第四AP发送的第一分组信息,该第一分组信息包括该第四AP所属的分组信息和该第四AP的标识,该第四AP包括该第一网络中除该第一AP之外的AP;Receive first grouping information sent by a fourth AP, where the first grouping information includes grouping information to which the fourth AP belongs and an identifier of the fourth AP, where the fourth AP includes elements other than the first AP in the first network AP;
根据该第一分组信息确定第五AP与该第一AP属于同一分组,该第五AP为该第四AP中的部分AP;该第一AP根据该第五AP的标识、该第一AP的标识和预设的AP优先级规则判断该第一AP的优先级是否高于该第五AP的优先级;According to the first group information, it is determined that the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group, and the fifth AP is a part of the AP in the fourth AP; the first AP The identification and the preset AP priority rule determine whether the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP;
若该第一AP的优先级高于该第五AP的优先级,则通过扫描信道选择第一信道,并将该第一AP接入的信道调整为该第一信道;If the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP, selecting the first channel by scanning channels, and adjusting the channel accessed by the first AP to the first channel;
向该第五AP发送第一信道分配信息,该第一信道分配信息用于指示该第五AP接入该第一信道;sending first channel allocation information to the fifth AP, where the first channel allocation information is used to instruct the fifth AP to access the first channel;
该第五AP,用于根据第一信道分配信息确定第一信道,并将该第五AP接入的信道调整为该第一信道。The fifth AP is configured to determine the first channel according to the first channel allocation information, and adjust the channel accessed by the fifth AP to the first channel.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP还用于:In another possible implementation manner, the first AP is also used for:
若该第一AP的优先级低于该第五AP的优先级,接收第六AP发送第二信道分配信息,该第二信道分配信息为该第六AP选择的第二信道的信息,该第六AP为该第五AP中优先级最高的AP;If the priority of the first AP is lower than the priority of the fifth AP, the second channel allocation information sent by the sixth AP is received, and the second channel allocation information is the information of the second channel selected by the sixth AP, and the second channel allocation information is sent by the sixth AP. Six APs are the APs with the highest priority among the fifth APs;
根据该第二信道分配信息将该第一AP接入的信道调整为该第二信道。The channel accessed by the first AP is adjusted to the second channel according to the second channel allocation information.
本申请实施例第七方面提供一种第一通信装置,该第一通信装置包括:A seventh aspect of an embodiment of the present application provides a first communication device, where the first communication device includes:
收发模块,用于获取第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括第一网络中的第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;a transceiver module, configured to acquire first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP;
分组模块,用于根据该第一信道参数信息对该第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,该第一STA包括该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA中的部分或全部STA;a grouping module, configured to group the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, where the first STA includes part or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP STA;
该收发模块,用于发送该多个分组的分组结果,该分组结果用于指示该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA。The transceiver module is configured to send grouping results of the multiple groups, where the grouping results are used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置为服务器,该第一AP包括该第一网络的所有AP,该第一STA包括该第一网络的所有STA;该收发模块具体用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication device is a server, the first AP includes all APs of the first network, and the first STA includes all STAs of the first network; the transceiver module is specifically configured to:
接收控制设备发送的该第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括该第一网络的所 有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息,该第一网络为该控制设备控制的网络;Receive the first channel parameter information sent by the control device, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs of the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP, the The first network is a network controlled by the control device;
该收发模块具体用于:The transceiver module is specifically used for:
向该控制设备发送该多个分组的分组结果。The grouping results of the plurality of groups are sent to the control device.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W,该信道矩阵W为K行乘以L列的矩阵,K为该第一网络包括的STA数目,L为该第一网络包括的AP数目,该信道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000033
w ij为第i个STA与第j个AP之间的信道增益,i为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的整数,j为大于或等于1且小于或等于L的整数;
In another possible implementation manner, the first channel parameter information includes a channel matrix W, where the channel matrix W is a matrix of K rows multiplied by L columns, K is the number of STAs included in the first network, and L is the first The number of APs included in the network, the channel matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000033
w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L;
该分组模块具体用于:This grouping module is specifically used for:
根据该信道矩阵W计算得到第一中间矩阵D,该第一中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000034
D 1为K行乘以K列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000035
D 1的主对角线上的元素a i为该第一网络中的第i个STA分别与该第一网络中的所有AP之间的信道增益之和,D 1的非对角线上的元素均为零;D 2为L行乘以L列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000036
D 2的主对角线上的元素b j为该第一网络中的第j个AP分别与该第一网络中的所有STA之间的信道增益之和,0 K×L为K行乘以L列的矩阵,0 K×L中的元素均为零,0 L×K为L行乘以K列的矩阵,0 L×K中的元素均为零;
According to the channel matrix W, a first intermediate matrix D is obtained, and the first intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000034
D 1 is a matrix with K rows by K columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000035
The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, respectively, and the off-diagonal elements of D 1 The elements are all zero; D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000036
The element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the jth AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, and 0 K×L is K rows multiplied by For a matrix of L columns, the elements in 0 K×L are all zero, and 0 L×K is a matrix of L rows multiplied by K columns, and the elements in 0 L×K are all zero;
根据该信道矩阵W和该第一中间矩阵D确定第二中间矩阵,该第二中间矩阵中的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,该网络节点为该第一网络中的STA或AP;Determine a second intermediate matrix according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D, each row vector in the second intermediate matrix corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an STA or an AP in the first network;
根据聚类算法对该第二中间矩阵的行向量进行聚类,得到第一聚类结果,该第一聚类结果包括多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中的一个簇对应该多个分组中的一个分组;The row vectors of the second intermediate matrix are clustered according to a clustering algorithm, and a first clustering result is obtained. The first clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to the multiple clusters. a group within a group;
根据该多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点。The network nodes respectively included in the plurality of groups are determined according to the row vectors of the plurality of clusters.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该信道矩阵W为带权二分图的边权矩阵W,该带权二分图包括第一类型顶点和第二类型顶点,该第一类型顶点表示该第一网络中的STA,该第二类型顶点表示该第一网络中的AP,该边权矩阵W的元素为该带权二分图的边权,该带权二分图的边权为该第一网络中的STA与AP之间的信道增益,该第一中间矩阵为该带权二分图的度矩阵。In another possible implementation manner, the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix W of a weighted bipartite graph, the weighted bipartite graph includes a first type vertex and a second type vertex, and the first type vertex represents the first network The STA in , the second type vertex represents the AP in the first network, the element of the edge weight matrix W is the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph, and the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph is the first network. The channel gain between the STA and the AP, the first intermediate matrix is the degree matrix of the weighted bipartite graph.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该分组模块具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the grouping module is specifically used for:
根据该信道矩阵W和该第一中间矩阵D确定第三中间矩阵R,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000037
W T为W的转置;
Determine the third intermediate matrix R according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000037
W T is the transpose of W;
对该第三中间矩阵R进行奇异值分解,得到该第三中间矩阵R的左奇异矩阵和该第三中间矩阵R的右奇异矩阵;其中,该第三中间矩阵R=UΣV T,该Σ为对角矩阵,该V T为该右奇异矩阵V的转置; Perform singular value decomposition on the third intermediate matrix R to obtain the left singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R and the right singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R; wherein, the third intermediate matrix R=UΣV T , and the Σ is Diagonal matrix, the V T is the transpose of the right singular matrix V;
该对角矩阵Σ的第r列向量上对应的主对角线元素为该左奇异矩阵U的第r列向量对应的奇异值,该对角矩阵Σ的第r列向量上对应的主对角线元素为右奇异矩阵V的第r列向量对应的奇异值,该r为大于或等于1且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,该min(K,L)指取该K和该L中最小值;The main diagonal element corresponding to the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix Σ is the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of the left singular matrix U, and the corresponding main diagonal element on the rth column vector of the diagonal matrix Σ The line element is the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of the right singular matrix V, where r is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to min(K, L), which refers to the K and the The minimum value in L;
按照该对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从该左奇异矩阵U中选取对应的M个列向量,得到第四中间矩阵U M,以及按照该对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从该右奇异矩阵V中选取对应M个列向量,得到第五中间矩阵V M,该M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,该log 2(K+L)指以2为底数对K+L求对数; Select corresponding M column vectors from the left singular matrix U in descending order of the singular values in the diagonal matrix Σ to obtain a fourth intermediate matrix U M , and according to the singular values in the diagonal matrix Σ Select the corresponding M column vectors from the right singular matrix V in order of size to obtain a fifth intermediate matrix V M , where M is greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L ), the log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2;
根据该第四中间矩阵、该第五中间矩阵和该第一中间矩阵计算得到该第二中间矩阵Z,该
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000038
The second intermediate matrix Z is calculated and obtained according to the fourth intermediate matrix, the fifth intermediate matrix and the first intermediate matrix, and the
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000038
另一种可能的实现方式中,该分组模块具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the grouping module is specifically used for:
根据聚类算法对该第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000039
包括的K+L个行向量进行聚类,得到多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中的一个簇对应多个分组中的一个分组;
According to the clustering algorithm, the second intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000039
The included K+L row vectors are clustered to obtain row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups;
将多个簇的行向量中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。The network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the row vectors of multiple clusters are divided into the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置为该第一AP,该第一STA包括该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内与该第一AP已建立连接的STA;该第一AP还包括分组管理模块,该分组管理模块用于:In another possible implementation manner, the communication device is the first AP, and the first STA includes a STA that has established a connection with the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP; the first AP further includes a packet Management module, the group management module is used for:
根据该第一AP所属的分组调整该第一AP连接的STA。Adjust the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置为该第一网络中的第p个AP,该第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W的第p个列向量,该信道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000040
w ij为第i个STA与第j个AP之间的信道增益,i为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的整数,j为大于或等于1且小于或等于L的整数,该p为小于或等于该L的整数,该L为该第一网络包括的AP数目,该K为该第一网络包括的STA数目;
In another possible implementation manner, the communication device is the pth AP in the first network, and the first channel parameter information includes the pth column vector of the channel matrix W, and the channel matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000040
w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L, and p is less than or equal to 1 or an integer equal to the L, where L is the number of APs included in the first network, and K is the number of STAs included in the first network;
该分组模块具体用于:This grouping module is specifically used for:
根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量计算得到第一中间矩阵D的第p+K个主对角线元素b pAccording to the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D is obtained;
其中,该第一中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000041
该D 1为K行乘以K列的矩阵,该
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000042
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000043
该D 1的主对角线上的元素a i为该第一网络中的第i个STA与该第一网络中的所有AP之间的信道增益之和,该D 1的非对角线上的元素均为零;该D 2为L行乘以L列的矩阵,该
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000044
该D 2的主对角线上的元素b j为该第一网络中的第j个AP与该第一网络中的所有STA之间的信道增益之和,0 K×L为乘以L列的矩阵,0 K×L中的元素均为零,0 L×K为L行乘以K列的矩阵,0 L×K中的元素均为零;
Among them, the first intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000041
The D 1 is a matrix of K rows by K columns, the
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000042
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000043
The element a i on the main diagonal of the D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, and the off-diagonal line of the D 1 The elements of are all zero; the D 2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns, the
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000044
The element b j on the main diagonal of the D2 is the sum of the channel gains between the jth AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, 0 K×L is multiplied by the L column , the elements in 0 K×L are all zero, 0 L×K is a matrix of L rows by K columns, and the elements in 0 L×K are all zero;
获取该第一中间矩阵D的前K个主对角线元素;Obtain the first K main diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D;
根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量、该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量和第K+p行向量,该第六中间矩阵Q的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,该网络节点为该第一网络中的AP或STA,该第六中间矩阵Q的第i个行向量为第i个STA对应的行向量,该第六中间矩阵Q的第K+j个行向量为第j个AP对应的行向量; According to the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K main diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D, determine the sixth The first K row vectors and the K+pth row vector of the intermediate matrix Q, each row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an AP or STA in the first network, and the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node. The i-th row vector of the matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the i-th STA, and the K+j-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the j-th AP;
根据聚类算法对目标行向量进行聚类,得到第二聚类结果;According to the clustering algorithm, the target row vector is clustered to obtain the second clustering result;
其中,该目标行向量包括与所述第一AP对应的所述第K+p行向量以及所述第六中间矩阵Q的前K个行向量中与所述第一STA对应的行向量,该第二聚类结果包括多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中一个簇对应该多个分组的一个分组;Wherein, the target row vector includes the K+p th row vector corresponding to the first AP and the row vector corresponding to the first STA among the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q, the The second clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one group of the multiple groups;
根据该多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点。The network nodes respectively included in the plurality of groups are determined according to the row vectors of the plurality of clusters.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该分组模块具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the grouping module is specifically used for:
根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量、该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000045
该第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000046
该W T为该W转置;
Determine the third the p-th row vector of the intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000045
the second intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000046
the W T is the W transpose;
根据随机梯度下降算法和该第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000047
确定第一矩阵X M的p个行向量和第二矩阵Y M,该第一矩阵X M与第三矩阵的近似度大于或等于第一预设阈值,该第二矩阵Y M与第四矩阵的近似度大于或等于第二预设阈值;
According to the stochastic gradient descent algorithm and the p-th row vector of this third intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000047
Determine the p row vectors of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M , the degree of approximation between the first matrix X M and the third matrix is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the second matrix Y M and the fourth matrix The degree of approximation is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold;
其中,该第三矩阵为从该第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的左奇异矩阵选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,该左奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,该第三矩阵的M个列向量为从该左奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量;Wherein, the third matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the left singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the left singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, The M column vectors of the third matrix are M column vectors selected from the left singular matrix in descending order according to the size of the singular values;
该第四矩阵为从该第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的右奇异矩阵中选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,该右奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,该第四矩阵的M个列向量为从该右奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量;The fourth matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the right singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R. Each column vector in the right singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, and the The M column vectors of the fourth matrix are the M column vectors selected from the right singular matrix in descending order of singular values;
该M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,该log 2(K+L)指以2为底数对K+L求对数,该min(K,L)指取该K和该L中的最小值; The M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), the log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2, the min( K, L) refers to the minimum value in this K and this L;
根据该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p、该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素、该第一矩阵X M的第p个行向量和该第二矩阵Y M计算得到第六中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000048
的前K行向量和第K+p行向量。
According to the p+K th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D, the p th row vector sum of the first matrix X M The second matrix Y M is calculated to obtain the sixth intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000048
The first K row vector and the K+pth row vector of .
另一种可能的实现方式中,该分组模块具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the grouping module is specifically used for:
根据第一随机种子生成第一聚类中心,该第一聚类中心包括该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,每个簇对应一个聚类中心;Generate a first cluster center according to the first random seed, the first cluster center includes the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively, and each cluster corresponds to a cluster center;
根据该第一聚类中心确定该目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇,得到该多个簇中每个簇包括的行向量;Determine the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs according to the first cluster center, and obtain the row vector included in each cluster in the multiple clusters;
当满足第一预设条件时,将该多个簇中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。When the first preset condition is satisfied, the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters are divided into the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,当不满足该第一预设条件时,该分组模块还用于:In another possible implementation manner, when the first preset condition is not met, the grouping module is further configured to:
根据gossip协议计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第一平均向量;Calculate the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol;
将该多个簇中每个簇的行向量的第一平均向量分别作为该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,得到第二聚类中心;Taking the first average vector of the row vectors of each cluster in the multiple clusters as the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters, respectively, to obtain the second cluster center;
根据该第二聚类中心确定该目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇;Determine the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs according to the second cluster center;
当满足该第二预设条件时,将该多个簇中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。When the second preset condition is satisfied, the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters are divided into the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一预设条件包括:In another possible implementation manner, the first preset condition includes:
该多个分组分别对应的簇的聚类中心的更新次数大于或等于第三预设阈值。The update times of the cluster centers of the clusters corresponding to the multiple groups respectively is greater than or equal to the third preset threshold.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一预设条件包括:In another possible implementation manner, the first preset condition includes:
第一收敛精度小于或等于预设的收敛精度;The first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy;
其中,该第一收敛精度为第一差值的绝对值与所述第一全局误差的比值,第一差值为第一全局误差与预设的初始化误差的差值;Wherein, the first convergence accuracy is the ratio of the absolute value of the first difference to the first global error, and the first difference is the difference between the first global error and a preset initialization error;
该第一全局误差为该第一网络中的所有AP分别计算得到的第一局部误差的和;The first global error is the sum of the first local errors calculated respectively by all APs in the first network;
该第一AP的第一局部误差包括该第一AP确定的该多个簇每个簇对应的误差的和;The first local error of the first AP includes a sum of errors corresponding to each of the multiple clusters determined by the first AP;
该每个簇对应的误差为该每个簇包括的行向量分别与该每个簇对应的第一平均向量之 间的误差的和,该每个簇对应的第一平均向量为该第一AP根据流言协议(gossip protocol)计算得到的。The error corresponding to each cluster is the sum of the errors between the row vector included in each cluster and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster, and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster is the first AP Calculated according to the gossip protocol.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该分组管理模块通过该收发模块发送该第一AP所属的分组的信息,该第一AP所属的分组的信息用于该第一网络中的STA判断是否接入第一AP。In another possible implementation manner, the group management module sends the information of the group to which the first AP belongs through the transceiver module, and the information of the group to which the first AP belongs is used for the STA in the first network to determine whether to access or not First AP.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一AP所属的分组的信息包括该第一AP所属的分组的第一分组编号;该分组管理模块通过该收发模块发送第一信标帧,该第一信标帧携带该第一分组编号。In another possible implementation manner, the information of the group to which the first AP belongs includes a first group number of the group to which the first AP belongs; the group management module sends a first beacon frame through the transceiver module, and the first beacon frame is sent by the group management module. The beacon frame carries the first packet number.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该分组管理模块具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the group management module is specifically used for:
判断与该第一AP已建立连接的第二STA是否属于同一分组;Determine whether the second STA that has established a connection with the first AP belongs to the same group;
若是,则保持为该第二STA提供服务;If so, keep providing services for the second STA;
若否,则确定该第二STA所属的分组,并向第三AP发送第一指示信息;If not, determine the group to which the second STA belongs, and send the first indication information to the third AP;
该第一指示信息用于指示该第三AP为该第二STA提供服务,该第三AP与该第二STA属于同一分组。The first indication information is used to indicate that the third AP provides services for the second STA, and the third AP and the second STA belong to the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:In another possible implementation manner, the transceiver module is also used for:
接收第四AP发送的第一分组信息,该第一分组信息包括该第四AP所属的分组信息和该第四AP的标识,该第四AP包括该第一网络中除该第一AP之外的AP;Receive first grouping information sent by a fourth AP, where the first grouping information includes grouping information to which the fourth AP belongs and an identifier of the fourth AP, where the fourth AP includes elements other than the first AP in the first network AP;
该分组管理模块还用于:The group management module is also used to:
根据该第一分组信息确定第五AP与该第一AP属于同一分组,该第五AP为该第四AP中的部分AP;It is determined according to the first grouping information that the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group, and the fifth AP is a part of the APs in the fourth AP;
根据该第五AP的标识、该第一AP的标识和预设的AP优先级规则判断该第一AP的优先级是否高于该第五AP的优先级;Determine whether the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP according to the identity of the fifth AP, the identity of the first AP and the preset AP priority rule;
若该第一AP的优先级高于该第五AP的优先级,则通过扫描信道选择第一信道,并将该第一AP接入的信道调整为该第一信道;If the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP, selecting the first channel by scanning channels, and adjusting the channel accessed by the first AP to the first channel;
该收发模块还用于:The transceiver module is also used to:
向该第五AP发送第一信道分配信息,该第一信道分配信息用于指示该第五AP接入该第一信道。Send first channel allocation information to the fifth AP, where the first channel allocation information is used to instruct the fifth AP to access the first channel.
另一种可能的实现方式中,若该第一AP的优先级低于该第五AP的优先级,该收发模块还用于:In another possible implementation manner, if the priority of the first AP is lower than the priority of the fifth AP, the transceiver module is further configured to:
接收第六AP发送第二信道分配信息,该第二信道分配信息为该第六AP选择的第二信道的信息,该第六AP为该第五AP中优先级最高的AP;receiving the second channel allocation information sent by the sixth AP, where the second channel allocation information is the information of the second channel selected by the sixth AP, and the sixth AP is the AP with the highest priority in the fifth AP;
该分组管理模块还用于:The group management module is also used to:
根据该第二信道分配信息将该第一AP接入的信道调整为该第二信道。The channel accessed by the first AP is adjusted to the second channel according to the second channel allocation information.
本申请实施例第八方面提供一种控制设备,该控制设备包括:An eighth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a control device, where the control device includes:
收发模块,用于向服务器发送第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括第一网络的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息,该第一网络为该控制设备控制的网络;接收服务器多个分组的分组结果,该多个分组包括该第一网络中的所有STA和所有AP;a transceiver module, configured to send first channel parameter information to the server, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs of the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP, The first network is a network controlled by the control device; receiving grouping results of multiple groups from the server, where the multiple groups include all STAs and all APs in the first network;
分组管理模块,用于根据该分组结果确定该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA;a grouping management module, configured to determine APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups according to the grouping result;
该收发模块,还用于发送第二分组信息,该第二分组信息包括该第一网络的AP分别所属的分组的信息和该第一网络的STA分别所属的分组的信息。The transceiver module is further configured to send second grouping information, where the second grouping information includes information about groups to which APs of the first network respectively belong and information about groups to which STAs of the first network respectively belong.
一种可能的实现方式中,该分组管理模块还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the group management module is further used for:
为该多个分组中同一分组的AP分配相同的信道;Allocate the same channel for APs in the same group in the multiple groups;
该收发模块具体用于:The transceiver module is specifically used for:
发送该第二分组信息,该第二分组信息包括该多个分组分别对应的信道分配信息。Send the second grouping information, where the second grouping information includes channel allocation information corresponding to the multiple groups respectively.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该分组管理模块还用于:In another possible implementation manner, the group management module is also used for:
根据该第一信道参数信息为该多个分组中每个分组的AP分配相应的信道,其中,该控制设备为同一分组的AP分配的信道相同。According to the first channel parameter information, a corresponding channel is allocated to APs in each group of the multiple groups, wherein the channels allocated by the control device to APs in the same group are the same.
本申请实施例第九方面提供一种第二AP,该第二AP包括:A ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a second AP, where the second AP includes:
收发模块,用于向控制设备发送第二信道参数信息,该第二信道参数信息包括该第二AP与该第二AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;接收该控制设备发送的第二分组信息,该第二分组信息包括该第一网络的AP分别所属的分组的信息和该第一网络的STA分别所属的分组的信息;a transceiver module, configured to send second channel parameter information to the control device, where the second channel parameter information includes the channel parameter information between the second AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the second AP; receive the transmission from the control device The second grouping information, the second grouping information includes the information of the groups to which the APs of the first network belong respectively and the information of the groups to which the STAs of the first network belong respectively;
分组管理模块,用于根据该第二分组信息确定该第二AP所属的分组;根据该第二AP所属的分组调整该第二AP连接的STA。The group management module is configured to determine the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information; and adjust the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二分组信息还包括第三信道分配信息,该第三信道分配信息包括该控制设备为该第二AP分配的第三信道的信息;该分组管理模块还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the second grouping information further includes third channel assignment information, and the third channel assignment information includes information about the third channel assigned by the control device to the second AP; the grouping management module also uses At:
根据该第三信道分配信息将第二AP接入的信道调整为该第三信道。The channel accessed by the second AP is adjusted to the third channel according to the third channel allocation information.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该分组管理模块通过该收发模块发送该第二AP所属的分组的信息,该第二AP所属的分组的信息用于指示第一网络中的STA判断是否接入该第二AP,该第一网络为该控制设备控制的网络。In another possible implementation manner, the group management module sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs through the transceiver module, and the information of the group to which the second AP belongs is used to instruct the STA in the first network to determine whether to access or not The second AP and the first network are networks controlled by the control device.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二AP所属的分组的信息包括该第二AP所属的分组的第二分组编号;In another possible implementation manner, the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes a second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs;
该分组管理模块通过该收发模块发送第二信标帧,该第二信标帧携带该第二分组编号。The group management module sends a second beacon frame through the transceiver module, and the second beacon frame carries the second group number.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该分组管理模块具体用于:In another possible implementation manner, the group management module is specifically used for:
确定该第二AP所属的分组中包括的STA;determining the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs;
判断该第二AP和第三STA是否属于同一分组,该第三STA为与该第二AP已建立连接的STA;Determine whether the second AP and the third STA belong to the same group, and the third STA is a STA that has established a connection with the second AP;
若是,则保持为该第三STA提供服务;If so, keep serving the third STA;
若否,则根据该第三STA所属的分组确定第七AP,并向该第七AP发送第三指示信息;If not, determine a seventh AP according to the group to which the third STA belongs, and send third indication information to the seventh AP;
其中,该第三指示信息用于指示该第七AP为该第三STA提供服务,该第七AP与该第三STA属于同一分组。The third indication information is used to indicate that the seventh AP provides services for the third STA, and the seventh AP and the third STA belong to the same group.
本申请实施例第十方面提供一种第四STA,该第四STA包括:A tenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a fourth STA, where the fourth STA includes:
收发模块,用于接收第二AP发送该第二AP所属的分组的信息;a transceiver module, configured to receive information sent by the second AP of the grouping to which the second AP belongs;
分组管理模块,用于根据该第二AP所属的分组的信息确定该第二AP与该第四STA属 于分组;将其连接的AP调整为该第二AP。A grouping management module, configured to determine that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to a group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs; and adjust the connected AP to be the second AP.
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二AP所属的分组的信息包括该第二AP所属的分组的第二分组编号;该收发模块具体用于:In a possible implementation manner, the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes the second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs; the transceiver module is specifically used for:
接收该第二AP发送的第二信标帧,该第一信标帧携带该第二分组编号;receiving a second beacon frame sent by the second AP, where the first beacon frame carries the second group number;
该分组管理模块具体用于:The group management module is specifically used for:
若该第二分组编号与该第四STA所属的分组的分组编号一致,确定该第二AP与该第四STA属于同一分组。If the second group number is consistent with the group number of the group to which the fourth STA belongs, it is determined that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:In another possible implementation manner, the transceiver module is also used for:
接收第八AP发送的该第四STA所属的分组的信息,该第八AP为该第四STA调整连接之前所连接的AP。Receive the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs and is sent by the eighth AP, where the eighth AP is the AP connected before the fourth STA adjusts the connection.
本申请第十一方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第一方面中的任意一种实现方式。An eleventh aspect of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device includes: a processor and a memory. The memory stores a computer program or computer instructions, and the processor is used to call and execute the computer program or computer instructions stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the first aspect.
可选的,该通信装置还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。Optionally, the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
本申请第十二方面提供一种控制设备,该控制设备包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第二方面中的任意一种实现方式。A twelfth aspect of the present application provides a control device, the control device includes: a processor and a memory. The memory stores a computer program or computer instructions, and the processor is used to call and execute the computer program or computer instructions stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the second aspect.
可选的,该控制设备还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。Optionally, the control device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
本申请第十三方面提供一种第二AP,该第二AP包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第三方面中的任意一种实现方式。A thirteenth aspect of the present application provides a second AP, where the second AP includes: a processor and a memory. The memory stores a computer program or computer instructions, and the processor is used to call and execute the computer program or computer instructions stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the third aspect.
可选的,该第二AP还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。Optionally, the second AP further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
本申请第十四方面提供一种第四STA,该第四STA包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第四方面中的任意一种实现方式。A fourteenth aspect of the present application provides a fourth STA, where the fourth STA includes: a processor and a memory. The memory stores a computer program or computer instructions, and the processor is used to call and execute the computer program or computer instructions stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the fourth aspect.
可选的,该第四STA还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。Optionally, the fourth STA further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
本申请第十五方面提供一种包括指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面和第四方面中任一种的实现方式。A fifteenth aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions, characterized in that, when run on a computer, the computer is caused to perform any one of the first, second, third and fourth aspects. an implementation.
本申请第十六方面提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机指令,当该指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面和第四方面任一方面中的任一种实现方式。A sixteenth aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, comprising computer instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform any one of the first, second, third and fourth aspects any of the implementations.
本申请第十七方面提供一种芯片装置,包括处理器,用于调用该存储器中的计算机程序或计算机指令,以使得该处理器执行上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面和第四方面中的任一方面中的任一种实现方式。A seventeenth aspect of the present application provides a chip device, comprising a processor for invoking a computer program or computer instructions in the memory, so that the processor executes the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect and the fourth aspect Any implementation of any of the aspects.
可选的,该芯片装置还包括存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程度或计算机指令等。该芯片装置由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。Optionally, the chip device further includes a memory, and the memory is used for storing computer programs or computer instructions. The chip arrangement is composed of chips, and may also include chips and other discrete devices.
可选的,该处理器通过接口与该存储器耦合。Optionally, the processor is coupled to the memory through an interface.
从以上技术方案可以看出,本申请实施例具有以下优点:As can be seen from the above technical solutions, the embodiments of the present application have the following advantages:
经由上述技术方案可知,第一通信装置获取第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括第一网络中的第一AP与第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;该第一通信装置根据第一信道参数信息对第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,第一STA包括所述第一AP信号覆盖范围内的STA中的部分或全部STA;然后,第一通信装置发送该多个分组的分组结果,该分组结果用于指示该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA。这样,AP或STA接收该分组结果,可以结合自身所属分组调整连接,从而实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划。由于该多个分组是第一通信装置根据第一信道参数信息划分的,因此,通过本申请实施例的方案实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。It can be known from the above technical solutions that the first communication device acquires first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; The first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, where the first STA includes part or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; then , the first communication apparatus sends the grouping result of the multiple groups, where the grouping result is used to indicate the AP and the STA included in each of the multiple groups. In this way, when the AP or STA receives the grouping result, it can adjust the connection according to the group to which it belongs, so as to realize the management and planning of the STA connected to the AP. Since the multiple groups are divided by the first communication apparatus according to the first channel parameter information, the implementation of the management and planning of the STAs connected to the AP through the solutions in the embodiments of the present application can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving the network transmission performance.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1A为本申请实施例网络管理系统一个示意图;1A is a schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图1B为本申请实施例服务器的一个结构示意图;1B is a schematic structural diagram of a server according to an embodiment of the present application;
图1C为本申请实施例控制设备的一个结构示意图;1C is a schematic structural diagram of a control device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图1D为本申请实施例AP的一个结构示意图;FIG. 1D is a schematic structural diagram of an AP according to an embodiment of the present application;
图1E为本申请实施例STA的一个结构示意图;FIG. 1E is a schematic structural diagram of an STA according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2A为本申请实施例网络管理系统的另一个实施例示意图;2A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2B为本申请实施例第一AP的一个结构示意图;FIG. 2B is a schematic structural diagram of a first AP according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2C为本申请实施例第二STA的一个结构示意图;FIG. 2C is a schematic structural diagram of a second STA according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例网络管理方法的一个实施例示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4A为本申请实施例网络管理方法的另一个实施例示意图;4A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4B为本申请实施例带权二分图的一个示意图;4B is a schematic diagram of a weighted bipartite graph according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4C-1为传统单AP传输机制下第一网络中STA与AP的之间的连接状态示意图;4C-1 is a schematic diagram of a connection state between a STA and an AP in the first network under a traditional single-AP transmission mechanism;
图4C-2为按照区域划分的多个分组的分组分布示意图;4C-2 is a schematic diagram of the grouping distribution of a plurality of groupings divided according to regions;
图4C-3为本申请实施例集中式的网络管理系统中服务器划分得到的多个分组的分组的分组分布示意图;FIG. 4C-3 is a schematic diagram of group distribution of multiple groups obtained by dividing a server in a centralized network management system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4D为本申请实施例第二信标帧的帧结构示意图;4D is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of a second beacon frame according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5A为本申请实施例网络管理方法的另一个实施例示意图;5A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5B为本申请实施例分布式的网络管理系统中多AP通过协同的方式划分得到的多个分组的分组分布示意图;5B is a schematic diagram of group distribution of multiple groups obtained by multiple APs in a distributed network management system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6A为本申请实施例网络管理方法的另一个实施例示意图;6A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6B为本申请实施例第一广播消息的一个结构示意图;6B is a schematic structural diagram of a first broadcast message according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例网络管理方法的另一个实施例示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8A为本申请实施例网络管理方法的另一个实施例示意图;FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8B为本申请实施例第二广播消息的一个结构示意图;8B is a schematic structural diagram of a second broadcast message according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例通信装置的一个结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例控制设备的一个结构示意图;10 is a schematic structural diagram of a control device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例第二AP的一个结构示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a second AP according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例第四STA的一个结构示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a fourth STA according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例网络管理系统的一个示意图;13 is a schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例网络管理系统的另一个示意图。FIG. 14 is another schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本申请实施例提供了一种网络管理方法及其相关装置,用于实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。The embodiments of the present application provide a network management method and a related apparatus, which are used to implement management and planning of STAs connected to an AP, which can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission performance.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于无线局域网(wireless local area network,WLAN),通常被称为无线WiFi网络,采用的标准为电气和电子工程师协会(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,IEEE)802.11系列标准。WLAN可以包括的网络节点为站点(Station,STA),站点包括接入点类的站点(access point,AP)和非接入点类的站点(None Access Point Station,Non-AP STA)。后文将接入点类站点称为AP,将非接入点类的站点称为STA。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to a wireless local area network (WLAN), commonly referred to as a wireless WiFi network, and the adopted standard is the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 series standard. The network nodes that a WLAN can include are stations (Station, STA), and the stations include an access point type station (access point, AP) and a non-access point type station (None Access Point Station, Non-AP STA). Hereinafter, the access point type station is called AP, and the non-access point type station is called STA.
接入点类站点,也称之为无线访问接入点或热点等。AP是移动用户进入有线网络的接入点,主要部署于家庭、大楼内部以及园区内部,典型覆盖半径为几十米至上百米,当然,也可以部署于户外。AP相当于一个连接有线网和无线网的桥梁,其主要作用是将各个无线网络客户端连接到一起,然后将无线网络接入以太网。具体地,AP可以是带有WiFi芯片的终端设备或者网络设备。可选的,AP可以为支持802.11ax制式的设备。进一步,可选的,该AP可以为支持802.11be、802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a等多种WLAN制式的设备。Access point type sites, also known as wireless access points or hotspots, etc. APs are access points for mobile users to access wired networks. They are mainly deployed in homes, buildings, and campuses, with a typical coverage radius ranging from tens of meters to hundreds of meters. Of course, they can also be deployed outdoors. AP is equivalent to a bridge connecting wired network and wireless network. Its main function is to connect various wireless network clients together, and then connect the wireless network to Ethernet. Specifically, the AP may be a terminal device or a network device with a WiFi chip. Optionally, the AP may be a device supporting the 802.11ax standard. Further, optionally, the AP may be a device supporting multiple WLAN standards such as 802.11be, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, and 802.11a.
非接入点类的站点(none access point station,Non-AP STA),可以是无线通讯芯片、无线传感器或无线通信终端。例如:支持WiFi通讯功能的移动电话、支持WiFi通讯功能的平板电脑、支持WiFi通讯功能的机顶盒、支持WiFi通讯功能的智能电视、支持WiFi通讯功能的智能可穿戴设备、支持WiFi通讯功能的车载通信设备和支持WiFi通讯功能的计算机。具体地,STA可以是带有无线保真芯片的终端设备或者网络设备。可选的,站点可以支持802.11ax制式,进一步可选的,该站点支持802.11be、802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a等多种WLAN制式。A non-access point station (none access point station, Non-AP STA) can be a wireless communication chip, a wireless sensor or a wireless communication terminal. For example: mobile phones that support WiFi communication, tablet computers that support WiFi communication, set-top boxes that support WiFi communication, smart TVs that support WiFi communication, smart wearable devices that support WiFi communication, in-vehicle communication that supports WiFi communication Devices and computers that support WiFi communication. Specifically, the STA may be a terminal device or a network device with a Wi-Fi chip. Optionally, the site may support the 802.11ax standard, and further optionally, the site may support multiple WLAN standards such as 802.11be, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, and 802.11a.
需要说明的是,设备之间的无线信号干扰是由于无线网络中设备密集部署导致的,因此本申请实施例的技术方案也适用于其他设备部署密集的无线通信网络的网络管理和规划。It should be noted that wireless signal interference between devices is caused by dense deployment of devices in a wireless network, so the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to network management and planning of other wireless communication networks where devices are densely deployed.
本申请实施例,为了实现对WiFi网络的管理和规划,本申请实施例中引入两种可能的网络管理系统,分别为集中式的网络管理系统和分布式的网络管理系统。下面分别通过图1A和图2A进行详细介绍。In the embodiments of the present application, in order to implement management and planning of the WiFi network, two possible network management systems are introduced in the embodiments of the present application, namely, a centralized network management system and a distributed network management system. 1A and FIG. 2A are described in detail below.
请参阅图1A,图1A为本申请实施例网络管理系统的一个示意图。图1A示出的网络管理系统为集中式的网络管理系统。该集中式的网络管理系统包括服务器、控制设备、WiFi 网络中的AP和STA(图1A中仅示出5个AP和3个STA)。Please refer to FIG. 1A . FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application. The network management system shown in FIG. 1A is a centralized network management system. The centralized network management system includes servers, control devices, APs and STAs in the WiFi network (only 5 APs and 3 STAs are shown in FIG. 1A ).
控制设备获取第一信道参数信息,并向服务器发送该第一信道参数信息。该第一信道参数信息包括该WiFi网络中的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息。例如,如图1A所示,AP2的信号覆盖范围为图1A所示的虚线圆圈内的范围,该虚线圆圈内的范围内包括STA1和STA2。那么,控制设备可以获取该AP2分别与该STA1和STA2之间的信道参数信息。对于该WiFi网络中的其他AP类似,具体不一一说明。The control device acquires the first channel parameter information, and sends the first channel parameter information to the server. The first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs in the WiFi network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP. For example, as shown in FIG. 1A , the signal coverage range of AP2 is the range within the dotted circle shown in FIG. 1A , and the range within the dotted circle includes STA1 and STA2 . Then, the control device can acquire the channel parameter information between the AP2 and the STA1 and STA2 respectively. Similar to other APs in the WiFi network, the details are not described one by one.
然后,该服务器根据该第一信道参数信息对WiFi网络中的所有AP和STA进行分组,得到多个分组,再将该多个分组的分组结果反馈给控制设备。控制设备根据该分组结果对WiFi网络进行管理和规划。Then, the server groups all APs and STAs in the WiFi network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, and then feeds back the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device. The control device manages and plans the WiFi network according to the grouping result.
具体的,控制设备对该WiFi网络的管理和规划主要为:控制设备通知该WiFi网络中的AP和STA所属的分组。然后,该WiFi网络中的AP调整该AP连接的STA,以实现对STA的连接管理,减少设备之间的相互干扰。进一步地,该控制设备还可以为同一分组内的AP分配相同的信道,这样同一分组内的多个AP可以实现多AP联合传输,从而满足WiFi网络高吞吐量和低时延的需求,同时也提高了频谱利用率。Specifically, the management and planning of the WiFi network by the control device mainly include: the control device notifies the groups to which APs and STAs in the WiFi network belong. Then, the AP in the WiFi network adjusts the STA to which the AP is connected, so as to realize the connection management of the STA and reduce the mutual interference between the devices. Further, the control device can also allocate the same channel to the APs in the same group, so that multiple APs in the same group can realize multi-AP joint transmission, so as to meet the requirements of high throughput and low delay of the WiFi network, and also Improve spectrum utilization.
上述图1A中,该服务器为云服务器,或者云计算中心服务器,或者其他类型服务器,具体本申请不做限定。控制设备为中心控制器,或主(master)AP等,具体本申请不做限定。In the above FIG. 1A , the server is a cloud server, or a cloud computing center server, or other types of servers, which are not specifically limited in this application. The control device is a central controller, or a master (master) AP, etc., which is not specifically limited in this application.
基于图1A所示的网络管理系统,下面通过图1B、图1C、图1D和图1E分别介绍该网络管理系统的服务器、控制设备、AP和STA的结构。图1C所示的AP为该第一网络中的任一AP,图1E所示的STA为该第一网络中的任一STA。Based on the network management system shown in FIG. 1A , the following describes the structures of the server, control device, AP and STA of the network management system through FIG. 1B , FIG. 1C , FIG. 1D and FIG. 1E respectively. The AP shown in FIG. 1C is any AP in the first network, and the STA shown in FIG. 1E is any STA in the first network.
首先,先介绍该网络管理系统中的服务器。请参阅图1B,图1B为本申请实施例服务器的一个结构示意图。在图1B中,该服务器包括第一收发模块101和第一分组模块102。First, the server in the network management system is introduced. Please refer to FIG. 1B , which is a schematic structural diagram of a server according to an embodiment of the present application. In FIG. 1B , the server includes a first transceiver module 101 and a first grouping module 102 .
该收发模块101用于接收控制设备发送的第一信道参数信息。The transceiver module 101 is configured to receive the first channel parameter information sent by the control device.
该分组模块102用于根据第一信道参数信息对该第一网络中的所有AP和所有STA进行分组,得到多个分组的分组结果;The grouping module 102 is configured to group all APs and all STAs in the first network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain grouping results of multiple groups;
该收发模块101,还用于向控制设备发送该多个分组的分组结果。The transceiver module 101 is further configured to send the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device.
图1B所示的服务器用于执行后文图3所示的实施例中的部分或全部步骤,和执行后文图4A所示的实施例中服务器执行的部分或全部步骤。例如,该收发模块101用于执行后文图3所示的实施例中的步骤301和步骤303,以及图4A所示的实施例中的步骤402和步骤404。该分组模块102用于执行后文图3所示的实施例中的步骤302以及图4A所示的实施例中的步骤403。具体请参阅后文图3和图4A所示的实施例中的相关介绍。The server shown in FIG. 1B is configured to perform some or all of the steps in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and some or all of the steps performed by the server in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A . For example, the transceiver module 101 is configured to execute step 301 and step 303 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , and step 402 and step 404 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A . The grouping module 102 is configured to perform step 302 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and step 403 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A . For details, please refer to the related introductions in the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4A later.
请参阅图1C,图1C为本申请实施例控制设备的一个结构示意图。该控制设备包括收发模块103和分组管理模块104。Please refer to FIG. 1C , which is a schematic structural diagram of a control device according to an embodiment of the present application. The control device includes a transceiver module 103 and a group management module 104 .
该收发模块103用于接收WiFi网络中的AP或STA上报的第一信道参数信息,并向服务器发送该第一信道参数信息;接收服务器发送的多个分组的分组结果;The transceiver module 103 is configured to receive the first channel parameter information reported by the AP or STA in the WiFi network, and send the first channel parameter information to the server; receive the grouping results of multiple groups sent by the server;
该分组管理模块104,用于根据该多个分组的分组结果确定该多个分组中每个分组包 括的AP和STA。The group management module 104 is configured to determine APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups according to the grouping results of the multiple groups.
该收发模块103还用于向该WiFi网络中的AP或STA发送该多个分组的分组信息。The transceiver module 103 is further configured to send the grouping information of the multiple groups to the AP or the STA in the WiFi network.
可选的,该分组管理模块104还用于为同一分组的AP分配相同的信道。该收发模块103还用于向该WiFi网络中的AP或STA发送该多个分组中每个分组对应的信道分配信息。Optionally, the group management module 104 is further configured to allocate the same channel to APs in the same group. The transceiver module 103 is further configured to send channel allocation information corresponding to each of the multiple groups to the AP or the STA in the WiFi network.
图1C所示的控制设备用于执行后文图4A所示的实施例中控制设备执行的部分或全部步骤。例如,该收发模块103用于执行后文图4A所示的实施例中的步骤401和步骤405。该分组管理模块104用于执行后文图4A所示的实施例中的步骤405a,具体请参阅后文图4A所示的实施例中的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。The control device shown in FIG. 1C is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the control device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A . For example, the transceiver module 103 is used to execute step 401 and step 405 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A later. The group management module 104 is configured to execute step 405a in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A hereinafter. For details, please refer to the related introduction in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , which will not be repeated here.
请参阅图1D,图1D为本申请实施例AP的一个结构示意图。该AP包括收发模块105和分组管理模块106。可选的,该AP包括信号测量模块107。Please refer to FIG. 1D , which is a schematic structural diagram of an AP according to an embodiment of the present application. The AP includes a transceiver module 105 and a group management module 106 . Optionally, the AP includes a signal measurement module 107 .
该收发模块105用于接收控制设备发送的多个分组的分组信息。The transceiver module 105 is configured to receive grouping information of multiple groups sent by the control device.
该分组管理模块106用于根据该分组信息确定该AP所属的分组;根据该AP所属的分组调整该AP连接的STA。The group management module 106 is configured to determine the group to which the AP belongs according to the group information; and adjust the STA connected to the AP according to the group to which the AP belongs.
可选的,该分组信息还包括该控制设备为该AP分配的信道分配信息。该分组管理模块106还用于根据该信道分配信息确定对应的信道,并将该第一AP接入的信道调整该信道分配信息对应的信道。Optionally, the grouping information further includes channel allocation information allocated by the control device to the AP. The group management module 106 is further configured to determine the corresponding channel according to the channel allocation information, and adjust the channel accessed by the first AP to the channel corresponding to the channel allocation information.
在该WiFi网络中,该AP可以测量该AP与该AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA的信道参数信息。可选的,该信号测量模块107用于测量该AP与该AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA的信道参数信息。In the WiFi network, the AP can measure the channel parameter information of the AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the AP. Optionally, the signal measurement module 107 is configured to measure the channel parameter information of the AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the AP.
图1D所示的AP用于执行后文图4A所示的第二AP执行的部分或全部步骤。例如,该收发模块105用于后文图4A所示的实施例中的步骤401和步骤405。该分组管理模块106用于执行后文图4A所示的实施例中的步骤406和步骤407。该信号测量模块107用于执行测量得到图4A所示的实施例中的步骤401的第二信道参数信息。The AP shown in FIG. 1D is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the second AP shown in FIG. 4A later. For example, the transceiver module 105 is used for step 401 and step 405 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A later. The group management module 106 is configured to execute step 406 and step 407 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A later. The signal measurement module 107 is configured to perform measurement to obtain the second channel parameter information of step 401 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
请参阅图1E,图1E为本申请实施例STA的一个结构示意图。在图1E中,该STA包括收发模块108和分组管理模块109。可选的,该STA还包括信号测量模块110。Please refer to FIG. 1E. FIG. 1E is a schematic structural diagram of an STA according to an embodiment of the present application. In FIG. 1E , the STA includes a transceiver module 108 and a packet management module 109 . Optionally, the STA further includes a signal measurement module 110 .
该收发模块108用于接收控制设备发送的多个分组的分组信息。The transceiver module 108 is configured to receive grouping information of multiple groups sent by the control device.
该分组管理模块109用于根据该分组信息确定该STA所属的分组,并根据该STA所属的分组调整该STA连接的AP。The group management module 109 is configured to determine the group to which the STA belongs according to the group information, and adjust the AP to which the STA is connected according to the group to which the STA belongs.
在该WiFi网络中,该STA可以测量该STA与该第一网络中的AP之间的信道参数信息。可选的,信号测量模块110用于测量该STA与该第一网络中的AP之间的信道参数信息。该收发模块108还用于向该STA连接的AP发送该信道参数信息,再由该AP发送给控制设备。In the WiFi network, the STA may measure channel parameter information between the STA and the AP in the first network. Optionally, the signal measurement module 110 is configured to measure channel parameter information between the STA and the AP in the first network. The transceiver module 108 is further configured to send the channel parameter information to the AP connected to the STA, and then the AP sends the information to the control device.
具体的,该STA用于执行后文图4A所示的实施例中第四STA执行的部分或全部步骤。例如,该收发模块108用于执行图4A所示的实施例中步骤407b。该分组管理模块109用于执行上述图4A所示的实施例中步骤407c至步骤407eSpecifically, the STA is configured to perform some or all of the steps performed by the fourth STA in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A later. For example, the transceiver module 108 is used to execute step 407b in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A . The group management module 109 is configured to execute steps 407c to 407e in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4A
需要说明的是,上述图1A所示的集中式的网络管理系统中,也可以由控制设备根据第一信道参数信息对该WiFi网络中的所有AP和STA进行分组,得到多个分组,并由控制设备根据该分组结果对该WiFi网络进行管理和规划,具体本申请不做限定。也就是图1A所 示的网络管理系统中可以不包括该服务器。It should be noted that, in the centralized network management system shown in FIG. 1A above, the control device may also group all APs and STAs in the WiFi network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, which are grouped by the control device. The control device manages and plans the WiFi network according to the grouping result, which is not specifically limited in this application. That is, the server may not be included in the network management system shown in Fig. 1A.
请参阅图2A,图2A为本申请实施例网络管理系统的另一个示意图。图2A示出的网络管理系统为分布式的网络管理系统。该分布式的网络管理系统包括多个AP和多个STA(图2A中仅示出5个AP和3个STA)。Please refer to FIG. 2A , which is another schematic diagram of a network management system according to an embodiment of the present application. The network management system shown in FIG. 2A is a distributed network management system. The distributed network management system includes multiple APs and multiple STAs (only 5 APs and 3 STAs are shown in FIG. 2A ).
下面以AP2为例介绍在该分布式的网络管理系统。AP2获取第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括该AP2与该AP2的信号覆盖范围内的STA的信道参数信息。然后,该AP1根据该第一信道参数信息对该AP2和该AP2的信号覆盖范围内与该AP2连接的STA进行分组,得到多个分组。该AP2根据该多个分组的分组结果对该AP2连接的STA进行连接管理以及调整该AP2接入的信道,对于其他AP也执行类似操作,从而实现对WiFi网络中的STA的连接管理。通过上述过程实现对STA的连接管理,减少设备之间的相互干扰。进一步地,同一分组内的多个AP可以接入同一信道,这样同一分组内的多个AP可以实现多AP联合传输,从而满足WiFi网络高吞吐量和低时延的需求,同时也提高了频谱利用率。The following takes AP2 as an example to introduce the distributed network management system. AP2 acquires first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information of the AP2 and the STAs within the signal coverage of the AP2. Then, the AP1 groups the AP2 and the STAs connected to the AP2 within the signal coverage of the AP2 according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups. The AP2 performs connection management on the STA connected to the AP2 and adjusts the channel accessed by the AP2 according to the grouping results of the multiple groups, and performs similar operations on other APs, thereby implementing connection management for the STA in the WiFi network. Through the above process, the connection management of the STA is realized, and the mutual interference between the devices is reduced. Further, multiple APs in the same group can access the same channel, so that multiple APs in the same group can realize multi-AP joint transmission, so as to meet the requirements of high throughput and low latency of WiFi network, and also improve the frequency spectrum. utilization.
并且,图2A所示的网络管理系统中,该WiFi网络中,不同AP之间可以进行信息交换,即AP之间通过协同的方式实现对该WiFi网络的AP和STA进行分组。具体的,不同AP之间可以通过有线网进行信息交换。例如,以太网等。Moreover, in the network management system shown in FIG. 2A , in the WiFi network, information exchange can be performed between different APs, that is, the APs can group the APs and STAs of the WiFi network in a coordinated manner. Specifically, information can be exchanged between different APs through a wired network. For example, Ethernet, etc.
基于图2A所示的网络管理系统,下面通过图2B和图2C分别介绍该网络管理系统的第一AP和第二STA的结构。该第二STA为该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA。Based on the network management system shown in FIG. 2A , the structures of the first AP and the second STA of the network management system are respectively introduced below through FIG. 2B and FIG. 2C . The second STA is a STA within the signal coverage of the first AP.
请参阅图2B,图2B为本申请实施例第一AP的一个结构示意图。在图2B中,该第一AP包括收发模块201、分组模块202和分组管理模块203。可选的,该第一AP还包括信号测量模块204。Please refer to FIG. 2B , which is a schematic structural diagram of a first AP according to an embodiment of the present application. In FIG. 2B , the first AP includes a transceiver module 201 , a grouping module 202 and a grouping management module 203 . Optionally, the first AP further includes a signal measurement module 204 .
该收发模块201用于获取第一信道参数信息;The transceiver module 201 is used to obtain first channel parameter information;
该分组模块202用于根据第一信道参数信息对第一AP和在该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内且与该第一AP已建立连接的第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,得到多个分组的分组结果及第一AP所属的分组。The grouping module 202 is configured to group the first AP and the first STA that is within the signal coverage of the first AP and has established a connection with the first AP according to the first channel parameter information, to obtain multiple groups, and obtain multiple The grouping result of each group and the group to which the first AP belongs.
该分组管理模块203用于根据该第一AP所属的分组调整该第一AP连接的STA。The group management module 203 is configured to adjust the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
该收发模块201还用于发送该多个分组的分组结果。The transceiver module 201 is further configured to send the grouping results of the multiple groups.
在该WiFi网络中,该第一AP可以测量该第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA的信道参数信息。可选的,该信号测量模块204用于测量该第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的第一信道参数信息。In the WiFi network, the first AP may measure channel parameter information of the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP. Optionally, the signal measurement module 204 is configured to measure the first channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
具体的,该第一AP用于执行后文图3所示的实施例中的步骤301至步骤303,以及执行后文图5A、图6、图7和图8A所示的实施例中第一AP执行的部分或全部步骤。例如,收发模块201用于执行图5A所示的实施例中步骤501、步骤505和步骤509。分组模块201用于执行图5A所示的实施例中步骤502。该分组管理模块203用于执行图5A所示的实施例中的步骤504。具体请参阅后文图3、图5A、图6、图7和图8A所示的实施例中的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the first AP is used to execute steps 301 to 303 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and execute the first AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , and FIG. 8A . Some or all of the steps performed by the AP. For example, the transceiver module 201 is configured to execute step 501 , step 505 and step 509 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A . The grouping module 201 is configured to execute step 502 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A . The group management module 203 is used to execute step 504 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A . For details, please refer to the related introductions in the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 , FIG. 5A , FIG. 6 , FIG. 7 , and FIG. 8A , which will not be repeated here.
请参阅图2C,图2C为本申请实施例第二STA的结构示意图。在图2C中,该第二STA包括收发模块205和分组管理模块206。可选的,该第二STA还包括信号测量模块207。Please refer to FIG. 2C , which is a schematic structural diagram of a second STA according to an embodiment of the present application. In FIG. 2C , the second STA includes a transceiver module 205 and a packet management module 206 . Optionally, the second STA further includes a signal measurement module 207 .
该收发模块205用于接收第一AP发送的多个分组的分组结果。The transceiver module 205 is configured to receive grouping results of multiple groups sent by the first AP.
该分组管理模块206用于根据该分组结果确定该第二STA所属的分组,并根据该第二STA所属的分组调整该第二STA连接的AP。The group management module 206 is configured to determine the group to which the second STA belongs according to the grouping result, and adjust the AP to which the second STA is connected according to the group to which the second STA belongs.
在该WiFi网络中,该第二STA可以测量该第二STA与该第一AP之间的信道参数信息。可选的,该信号测量模块207用于测量该第二STA与该第一AP之间的信道参数信息;该收发模块205用于向该第一AP发送该信号参数信息。In the WiFi network, the second STA may measure channel parameter information between the second STA and the first AP. Optionally, the signal measurement module 207 is configured to measure channel parameter information between the second STA and the first AP; the transceiver module 205 is configured to send the signal parameter information to the first AP.
下面结合实施例介绍本申请实施例的技术方案。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are described below with reference to the embodiments.
请参阅图3,图3为本申请实施例网络管理方法的一个实施例示意图。在图3中,该网络管理方法包括:Please refer to FIG. 3 , which is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application. In Figure 3, the network management method includes:
301、第一通信装置获取第一信道参数信息。301. The first communication apparatus acquires first channel parameter information.
其中,该第一信道参数信息包括第一网络中的第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息。Wherein, the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
可选的,该第一信道参数信息包括第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信号增益,该信号增益也称为接收信号强度,或者称为干扰信号强度。具体该信号强度的测量方式包括以下两种可能的实现方式:Optionally, the first channel parameter information includes a signal gain between the first AP and a STA within a signal coverage of the first AP, where the signal gain is also referred to as received signal strength or interference signal strength. Specifically, the measurement method of the signal strength includes the following two possible implementation methods:
1、第一AP在第一AP接入的信道上发送数据包,而第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA接收该第一AP发送的数据包,并分别测量接收该第一AP发送的数据报的接收信号强度。1. The first AP sends data packets on the channel accessed by the first AP, and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP receive the data packets sent by the first AP, and measure and receive the data sent by the first AP respectively. reported received signal strength.
2、第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA接入该第一AP所接入的信道。第一AP接收第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA发送的数据包;然后,该第一AP分别测量接收该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA发送的数据包的接收信号强度。2. STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP access the channel accessed by the first AP. The first AP receives the data packets sent by the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; then, the first AP measures the received signal strength of the data packets sent by the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP respectively.
一、基于图1A所示的集中式的网络管理系统,第一通信装置可以为服务器,第一信道参数信息包括第一网络中的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息。即该第一信道参数信息可以理解为该第一网络的全局干扰信息,该全局干扰信息包括第一网络中的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的干扰信号强度。该第一AP包括第一网络中的所有AP。具体服务器获取第一信道参数信息的过程请参阅后文图4A所示的实施例中的相关介绍。1. Based on the centralized network management system shown in FIG. 1A , the first communication device may be a server, and the first channel parameter information includes each AP in all APs in the first network and the signal coverage of each AP. channel parameter information between STAs. That is, the first channel parameter information can be understood as the global interference information of the first network, and the global interference information includes the communication between each AP in all APs in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP. Interfering signal strength. The first AP includes all APs in the first network. For a specific process of the server acquiring the parameter information of the first channel, please refer to the related introduction in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A later.
二、基于图2A所示的分布式的网络管理系统,第一通信装置可以为第一AP。那么,该第一信道参数信息包括该第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息。即该第一信道参数信息可以理解为该第一AP得到的该第一网络的局部干扰信息,该局部干扰信息包括第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的干扰信号强度。具体第一AP获取第一信道参数信息的过程请参阅后文图5A所示的实施例中的相关介绍。2. Based on the distributed network management system shown in FIG. 2A , the first communication device may be the first AP. Then, the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP. That is, the first channel parameter information can be understood as the local interference information of the first network obtained by the first AP, and the local interference information includes interference signals between the first AP and STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP strength. For a specific process of the first AP acquiring the first channel parameter information, please refer to the related introduction in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A later.
需要说明的是,上述示出了第一信道参数信息包括第一AP与第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息的实现方式。在实际应用中,该第一信道参数信息也可以包括的是第一AP与该第一AP的预设范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息。其中,该预设范围为按照地理位置划分的范围;或者,该预设范围为大于或等于第四预设阈值的信号增益对应的STA所在的范围。It should be noted that the above shows an implementation manner in which the first channel parameter information includes the channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP. In practical applications, the first channel parameter information may also include channel parameter information between the first AP and a STA within a preset range of the first AP. Wherein, the preset range is a range divided according to geographic location; or, the preset range is a range where the STA corresponding to the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold is located.
其中,该大于或等于第四预设阈值的信号增益为第一AP测量得到的第一AP与大于或 等于第四预设阈值的信号增益对应的STA之间的信道增益,或者是,该大于或等于第四预设阈值的信号增益为该大于或等于第四预设阈值的信号增益对应的STA分别测量得到的与该第一AP之间的信道增益。Wherein, the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold is the channel gain between the first AP measured by the first AP and the STA corresponding to the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold, or the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold The signal gain equal to or equal to the fourth preset threshold is the channel gain between the STA and the first AP measured respectively by the STA corresponding to the signal gain greater than or equal to the fourth preset threshold.
该第四预设阈值的设定考虑因素包括该第一通信装置的计算能力、对分组结果的精度要求、第一网络的网络状态和信道等,具体本申请不做限定。Consideration factors for the setting of the fourth preset threshold include the computing capability of the first communication device, the precision requirement for the grouping result, the network state and channel of the first network, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
例如,第四预设阈值可以取值为5dB(分贝)或10dB。For example, the fourth preset threshold may be 5dB (decibel) or 10dB.
在后文的实施例中,仅以该第一信道参数信息包括第一AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息为例进行说明,具体本申请不做限定。In the following embodiments, only the first channel parameter information includes the channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP as an example for description, which is not specifically limited in this application.
302、第一通信装置根据第一信道参数信息对第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组。302. The first communication apparatus groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups.
其中,第一STA包括第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA中的部分或全部STA。The first STA includes some or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
一、基于图1A所示的集中式的网络管理系统,该第一STA包括第一网络中的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的全部STA。即第一STA包括第一网络中的所有STA。具体的,基于集中式的网络管理系统,服务器的具体执行流程请参阅图4A所示的实施例。1. Based on the centralized network management system shown in FIG. 1A , the first STA includes each AP of all APs in the first network and all STAs within the signal coverage of each AP. That is, the first STA includes all STAs in the first network. Specifically, based on the centralized network management system, for the specific execution flow of the server, please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
二、基于图2A所示的分布式的网络管理系统,该第一STA包括该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的与第一AP已建立连接的STA。具体的,基于分布式的网络管理系统,第一AP的具体执行流程请参阅图5A所示的实施例。2. Based on the distributed network management system shown in FIG. 2A , the first STA includes a STA that has established a connection with the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP. Specifically, based on the distributed network management system, please refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A for the specific execution flow of the first AP.
303、第一通信装置发送该多个分组的分组结果。303. The first communication apparatus sends the grouping results of the multiple groups.
其中,该分组结果用于指示该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA。The grouping result is used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
本申请实施例中,第一通信装置获取第一信道参数信息,该第一信道参数信息包括第一网络中的第一AP与第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;该第一通信装置根据第一信道参数信息对第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,第一STA包括所述第一AP信号覆盖范围内的STA中的部分或全部STA;然后,第一通信装置发送该多个分组的分组结果,该分组结果用于指示该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA。这样,AP或STA接收该分组结果,可以结合自身所属分组调整连接,从而实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划。本申请实施例的技术方案中,该多个分组是第一通信装置根据第一信道参数信息划分的,这样可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。In this embodiment of the present application, the first communication device acquires first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; The first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, where the first STA includes part or all of the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP; then , the first communication apparatus sends the grouping result of the multiple groups, where the grouping result is used to indicate the AP and the STA included in each of the multiple groups. In this way, when the AP or STA receives the grouping result, it can adjust the connection according to the group to which it belongs, so as to realize the management and planning of the STA connected to the AP. In the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the multiple groups are divided by the first communication apparatus according to the first channel parameter information, which can reduce interference between user equipments, thereby improving network transmission performance.
下面具体结合图1A所示的集中式的网络管理系统介绍本申请实施例的技术方案。The following describes the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application in detail with reference to the centralized network management system shown in FIG. 1A .
请参阅图4A,图4A为本申请实施例网络管理方法的一个实施例示意图。在图4A中,该网络管理方法包括:Please refer to FIG. 4A , which is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application. In Figure 4A, the network management method includes:
401、第二AP向控制设备发送第二信道参数信息。401. The second AP sends second channel parameter information to the control device.
其中,第二信道参数信息为第二AP与该第二AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息,第二AP为第一网络中的AP,第一网络为该控制设备控制的网络。The second channel parameter information is the channel parameter information between the second AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the second AP, the second AP is an AP in the first network, and the first network is controlled by the control device The internet.
具体的,如图1A所示,第一网络为图1A所示控制设备控制的WiFi网络。该WiFi网络中的STA按照已有方式从该WiFi网络中选择一个AP进行连接。例如,STA可以与具有最高信号强度的信标帧对应的AP连接。该WiFi网络中的AP可以通过已有技术选择一个信 道并接入该信道。例如,AP通过LCSS技术选择信道并接入该信道。然后,第二AP测量该第二AP与该第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的第二信道参数信息,并向控制设备发送该第二信道参数信息。该WiFi网络中的其他AP也执行相应的测量,并上报信道参数信息。那么,该控制设备可以收集到该WiFi网络中的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的第一信道参数信息。Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1A , the first network is a WiFi network controlled by the control device shown in FIG. 1A . The STA in the WiFi network selects an AP from the WiFi network for connection according to the existing method. For example, the STA may connect with the AP corresponding to the beacon frame with the highest signal strength. The APs in the WiFi network can select a channel and access the channel through the prior art. For example, the AP selects a channel and accesses the channel through the LCSS technology. Then, the second AP measures the second channel parameter information between the second AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP, and sends the second channel parameter information to the control device. Other APs in the WiFi network also perform corresponding measurements and report channel parameter information. Then, the control device may collect the first channel parameter information between each AP in all APs in the WiFi network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP.
402、该控制设备向服务器发送第一信道参数信息。402. The control device sends first channel parameter information to the server.
其中,该第一信道参数信息包括该第一网络中的所有AP中每个AP与该每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息。Wherein, the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP.
可选的,第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W,该信道矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000049
该信道矩阵W为K行乘以L列的矩阵,K为第一网络包括的STA的数目,L为第一网络包括的AP数目。该信道矩阵W中的元素w ij为第i个STA与第j个AP之间的信道增益(也可以是平均信道增益),i为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的整数,j为大于或等于1且小于或等于L的整数。
Optionally, the first channel parameter information includes a channel matrix W, and the channel matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000049
The channel matrix W is a matrix with K rows multiplied by L columns, K is the number of STAs included in the first network, and L is the number of APs included in the first network. The element w ij in the channel matrix W is the channel gain between the i-th STA and the j-th AP (it may also be the average channel gain), i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, and j is greater than or equal to K or an integer equal to 1 and less than or equal to L.
具体的,该第一网络包括K个STA和L个AP。将该第一网络建模为一张二分图G=(V,E)。顶点集合V可分割为两个互不相交的顶点子集V STA和顶点子集V AP,该顶点子集V STA和顶点子集V AP满足以下式(1)和式(2): Specifically, the first network includes K STAs and L APs. The first network is modeled as a bipartite graph G=(V,E). The vertex set V can be divided into two mutually disjoint vertex subsets V STA and vertex subset V AP , and the vertex subset V STA and vertex subset V AP satisfy the following equations (1) and (2):
V STA∪V AP=V    式(1) V STA ∪ V AP =V Formula (1)
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000050
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000050
其中,上述式(2)中的
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000051
为空集。
Wherein, in the above formula (2)
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000051
is the empty set.
例如,如图4B所示,该带权二分图包括两个类型顶点,第一类型顶点为第一网络中的STA,第二类型顶点为第一网络中的AP。For example, as shown in FIG. 4B , the weighted bipartite graph includes two types of vertices, the first type of vertex is an STA in the first network, and the second type of vertex is an AP in the first network.
而该带权二分图的边集E表示第一网络中的STA与第一网络中的AP之间的信道条件。And the edge set E of the weighted bipartite graph represents the channel condition between the STA in the first network and the AP in the first network.
该带权二分图的边权表示该第一网络中的STA与AP之间的信道增益,即该带权二分图的边上标注的权值。例如,STA1为第一网络中的第一个STA,AP1为第一网络中的第一个AP,那么STA1与AP1之间连接的边的边权为w 11,表示该STA1与AP1之间的信道增益。对于图4B中的其他边的边权类似,这里不再一一说明。 The edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph represents the channel gain between the STA and the AP in the first network, that is, the weight marked on the edge of the weighted bipartite graph. For example, if STA1 is the first STA in the first network, and AP1 is the first AP in the first network, then the edge weight of the edge connecting STA1 and AP1 is w 11 , indicating that the connection between STA1 and AP1 is channel gain. The edge weights of other edges in FIG. 4B are similar, and will not be described one by one here.
可选的,该信道矩阵W为该带权二分图的边权矩阵。Optionally, the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix of the weighted bipartite graph.
403、服务器根据第一信道参数信息对第一网络中的所有AP和所有STA进行分组,得到多个分组。403. The server groups all APs and all STAs in the first network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups.
下面结合上述步骤402中第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W介绍步骤403。具体的,步骤403具体包括步骤403a至步骤403d。Step 403 is described below with reference to the first channel parameter information including the channel matrix W in the above step 402. Specifically, step 403 specifically includes steps 403a to 403d.
步骤403a:服务器根据信道矩阵W计算得到第一中间矩阵D。Step 403a: The server calculates and obtains the first intermediate matrix D according to the channel matrix W.
其中,第一中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000052
D 1为K行*K列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000053
D 1的主对角线上的元素a i为所述第一网络中的第i个STA分别与所述第一网络中的所有AP之间的信道增益之和,D 1的非对角线上的元素均为零。
Among them, the first intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000052
D 1 is a matrix with K rows*K columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000053
The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, respectively, and the off-diagonal line of D 1 All elements on are zero.
D 2为L行乘以L列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000054
D 2的主对角线上的元素b j为所述第一网络中的第j个AP分别与所述第一网络中的所有STA之间的信道增益之和。
D 2 is a matrix with L rows by L columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000054
The element b j on the main diagonal of D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the j-th AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, respectively.
0 K×L为K行乘以L列的矩阵,0 K×L中的元素均为零。0 L×K为L行乘以K列的矩阵,0 L×K中的元素均为零。 0 K×L is a matrix of K rows by L columns, and the elements in 0 K×L are all zero. 0 L×K is a matrix of L rows by K columns, and the elements in 0 L×K are all zero.
可选的,当信道矩阵W为带权二分图的边权矩阵W时,步骤403a具体为:服务器根据该边权矩阵W生成该边权矩阵W的度矩阵。其中,边权矩阵W的度矩阵的每个对角线元素为每个对角线元素对应的节点的度,该每个对角线元素对应的节点的度为图4B中的该带权二分图中与该节点关联的边(即该带权二分图中与该节点有连接的边)的边权之和。例如,如图4B中所示,与STA1连接的节点包括AP1、AP2、AP3和AP4,那么该STA1的度为该STA1与AP1之间连接的边的边权、该STA1与AP2之间连接的边的边权、该STA1与AP3之间连接的边的边权和该STA1与AP4之间连接的边的边权的和。该边权矩阵W的度矩阵即为上述第一中间矩阵D。Optionally, when the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix W of a weighted bipartite graph, step 403a is specifically as follows: the server generates a degree matrix of the edge weight matrix W according to the edge weight matrix W. Wherein, each diagonal element of the degree matrix of the edge weight matrix W is the degree of the node corresponding to each diagonal element, and the degree of the node corresponding to each diagonal element is the weighted dichotomy in FIG. 4B The sum of the edge weights of the edges associated with the node in the graph (that is, the edges connected to the node in the weighted bipartite graph). For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the nodes connected to STA1 include AP1, AP2, AP3 and AP4, then the degree of the STA1 is the edge weight of the edge connected between the STA1 and AP1, the degree of the connection between the STA1 and AP2 The sum of the edge weight of the edge, the edge weight of the edge connected between the STA1 and AP3, and the edge weight of the edge connected between the STA1 and AP4. The degree matrix of the edge weight matrix W is the above-mentioned first intermediate matrix D.
步骤403b:服务器根据信道矩阵W和第一中间矩阵D确定第二中间矩阵Z。Step 403b: The server determines the second intermediate matrix Z according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D.
其中,第二中间矩阵Z中的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,该网络节点为第一网络中的STA或AP。Wherein, each row vector in the second intermediate matrix Z corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an STA or an AP in the first network.
下面结合步骤1至步骤3介绍上述步骤服务器确定第二中间矩阵Z的过程。The process of determining the second intermediate matrix Z by the server in the above steps will be described below with reference to steps 1 to 3.
步骤1:服务器根据信道矩阵W和第一中间矩阵D确定第三中间矩阵R。Step 1: The server determines the third intermediate matrix R according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D.
其中,第三中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000055
W T为信道矩阵W的转置。
Among them, the third intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000055
WT is the transpose of the channel matrix W.
步骤2:服务器对第三中间矩阵R进行奇异值分解,得到第三中间矩阵R的左奇异矩阵U和右奇异矩阵,Step 2: The server performs singular value decomposition on the third intermediate matrix R to obtain the left singular matrix U and the right singular matrix of the third intermediate matrix R,
其中,第三中间矩阵R=UΣV T,Σ为第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的对角矩阵,V T为第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的右奇异矩阵V的转置。 Wherein, the third intermediate matrix R=UΣV T , Σ is the diagonal matrix obtained by the singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and V T is the transpose of the right singular matrix V obtained by the singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R.
步骤3:服务器按照对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从左奇异矩阵U中选取对应的M个列向量,得到第四中间矩阵U M,以及按照对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从右奇异矩阵V中选取对应M个列向量,得到第五中间矩阵V MStep 3: The server selects the corresponding M column vectors from the left singular matrix U in descending order of the singular values in the diagonal matrix Σ, to obtain the fourth intermediate matrix U M , and according to the singular values in the diagonal matrix Σ The corresponding M column vectors are selected from the right singular matrix V in descending order of value size to obtain the fifth intermediate matrix V M .
其中,M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数。log 2(K+L)指 以2为底数对K+L求对数,min(K,L)指从K和L中取最小值。 Wherein, M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L). log 2 (K+L) refers to taking the logarithm of K+L in base 2, and min(K, L) refers to taking the minimum value from K and L.
可选的,M的取值可以为该多个分组的分组数目。该多个分组的分组数目为大于1且小于min(K,L)的整数。Optionally, the value of M may be the number of groups of the multiple groups. The number of groups of the plurality of groups is an integer greater than 1 and less than min(K, L).
需要说明的是,M的取值也可以结合实际情况确定,具体本申请不做限定。上述M的取值范围示例是由实验数据分析确定,M的取值范围在log 2(K+L)至min(K,L)之间的整数时,服务器对第一网络中的STA和AP的分组效果较好。例如,对于各个分组内的AP和STA形成的子网络内的有效信号强度总和较大,且该子网络内与子网络外的网络节点(AP或STA)之间的信号干扰强度较低。 It should be noted that the value of M can also be determined in combination with the actual situation, which is not specifically limited in this application. The above example of the value range of M is determined by the analysis of experimental data. When the value range of M is an integer between log 2 (K+L) and min(K, L), the server will determine the value of the STA and AP in the first network. The grouping effect is better. For example, the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the signal interference strength between the network nodes (APs or STAs) in the sub-network and outside the sub-network is relatively low.
步骤4:服务器根据第四中间矩阵、第五中间矩阵和第一中间矩阵计算得到第二中间矩阵Z。Step 4: The server calculates and obtains the second intermediate matrix Z according to the fourth intermediate matrix, the fifth intermediate matrix and the first intermediate matrix.
其中,第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000056
where, the second intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000056
具体的,该第二中间矩阵Z中的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,该网络节点为第一网络中的STA或AP。具体的,第二中间矩阵Z的第i个行向量为第一网络中的第i个STA对应的行向量,第二中间矩阵Z的第K+j个行向量为第一网络中的第j个AP对应的行向量。Specifically, each row vector in the second intermediate matrix Z corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an STA or an AP in the first network. Specifically, the i-th row vector of the second intermediate matrix Z is the row vector corresponding to the i-th STA in the first network, and the K+j-th row vector of the second intermediate matrix Z is the j-th row vector in the first network. The row vector corresponding to each AP.
步骤403c:服务器根据聚类算法对第二中间矩阵的行向量进行聚类,得到第一聚类结果。Step 403c: The server performs clustering on the row vectors of the second intermediate matrix according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a first clustering result.
其中,第一聚类结果包括多个簇的行向量,该多个簇中的一个簇对应该多个分组中的一个分组。The first clustering result includes row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups.
具体的,上述步骤403b中,服务器按照奇异值大小从该左奇异矩阵U中选取的M个列向量和从右奇异矩阵V中的M个列向量中包含更多表征该带权二分图的特征信息,那么步骤403c中服务器通过谱聚类的方式对第二中间矩阵Z进行聚类,从而实现服务器对第一网络中的STA和AP的分组效果较好。例如,对于各个分组内的AP和STA形成的子网络内的有效信号强度总和较大,且该子网络内与子网络外的网络节点(AP或STA)之间的信号干扰强度较低。Specifically, in the above step 403b, the M column vectors selected by the server from the left singular matrix U and the M column vectors in the right singular matrix V according to the size of the singular values include more features representing the weighted bipartite graph information, then in step 403c, the server performs clustering on the second intermediate matrix Z by means of spectral clustering, so that the server performs better grouping of STAs and APs in the first network. For example, the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the signal interference strength between the network nodes (APs or STAs) in the sub-network and outside the sub-network is relatively low.
本实施例中,该聚类算法为k均值(k-means)算法、k-means++算法、均值漂移聚类、最大期望(expectation-maximization algorithm,EM)聚类算法、有代表性的基于密度的聚类算法(density-based spatial clustering of applications with noise,DBSCAN)、图团体检测(graph community detection)聚类算法、图神经网络(graph neural network,GCN)聚类算法等。In this embodiment, the clustering algorithm is k-means (k-means) algorithm, k-means++ algorithm, mean-shift clustering, expectation-maximization algorithm (EM) clustering algorithm, representative density-based Clustering algorithm (density-based spatial clustering of applications with noise, DBSCAN), graph community detection (graph community detection) clustering algorithm, graph neural network (graph neural network, GCN) clustering algorithm, etc.
可选的,该服务器根据聚类算法对第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000057
包括的K+L行向量进行聚类,得到多个簇的行向量。
Optionally, the server performs a clustering algorithm on the second intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000057
The included K+L row vectors are clustered to obtain row vectors of multiple clusters.
需要说明的是,该服务器在对第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000058
包括的K+L行向量进行聚类时,服务器可以使用该第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000059
包括的K+L行向量中的每一个行向量的全部或部分代表该行向量进行聚类。也就是服务器可以选择每个行向量的部分内容代表该行向量进行聚类。
It should be noted that the server is on the second intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000058
The server can use this second intermediate matrix when clustering the included K+L row vectors
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000059
All or part of each of the included K+L row vectors represents that row vector for clustering. That is, the server can select a part of each row vector to represent the row vector for clustering.
步骤403d:服务器根据多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组包括的网络节点。Step 403d: The server determines network nodes included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
具体的,由上述步骤403c可知,第二中间矩阵Z中的每个行向量都对应一个网络节点,那么服务器将该多个簇的行向量中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。Specifically, it can be seen from the above step 403c that each row vector in the second intermediate matrix Z corresponds to a network node, then the server divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster among the row vectors of the multiple clusters into the same group middle.
例如,如图1A所示,该WiFi网络中的AP和STA划分为两个分组,该两个分组对应两个簇。这里以该两个簇包括簇1和簇2、该两个分组包括分组1和分组2为例进行介绍。其中,簇1对应分组1,簇2对应分组2。For example, as shown in FIG. 1A , APs and STAs in the WiFi network are divided into two groups, and the two groups correspond to two clusters. Here, the two clusters include cluster 1 and cluster 2, and the two groups include group 1 and group 2 as an example for introduction. Among them, cluster 1 corresponds to group 1, and cluster 2 corresponds to group 2.
其中,STA1对应第二中间矩阵Z的行向量1,STA2对应第二中间矩阵Z的行向量2,STA3对应第二中间矩阵z的行向量3。AP1对应第二中间矩阵Z的行向量4,AP2对应第二中间矩阵的行向量5,AP3对应第二中间矩阵Z的行向量6,AP4对应第二中间矩阵Z的行向量7,AP5对应第二中间矩阵Z的行向量8。Wherein, STA1 corresponds to row vector 1 of the second intermediate matrix Z, STA2 corresponds to row vector 2 of the second intermediate matrix Z, and STA3 corresponds to row vector 3 of the second intermediate matrix z. AP1 corresponds to the row vector 4 of the second intermediate matrix Z, AP2 corresponds to the row vector 5 of the second intermediate matrix, AP3 corresponds to the row vector 6 of the second intermediate matrix Z, AP4 corresponds to the row vector 7 of the second intermediate matrix Z, and AP5 corresponds to the row vector 7 of the second intermediate matrix Z. Two row vectors 8 of the intermediate matrix Z.
簇1包括行向量1、行向量2、行向量4、行向量5和行向量6,而簇2包括行向量3、行向量7和行向量8。那么服务器根据簇1包括的行向量确定该分组1包括AP1、AP2、AP3、STA1和STA2。服务器根据簇2包括的行向量确定分组2包括AP4、AP5和STA3。Cluster 1 includes Row Vector 1, Row Vector 2, Row Vector 4, Row Vector 5, and Row Vector 6, while Cluster 2 includes Row Vector 3, Row Vector 7, and Row Vector 8. Then, the server determines that the group 1 includes AP1, AP2, AP3, STA1 and STA2 according to the row vector included in the cluster 1. The server determines that group 2 includes AP4, AP5 and STA3 according to the row vector included in cluster 2.
由上述可知,对于该多个分组的分组C来说,该分组C内的网络节点形成的子网络内的网络节点与该子网络外的网络节点相互干扰的信号强度的和可以表示为:As can be seen from the above, for the group C of the multiple groups, the sum of the signal strengths of the mutual interference between the network nodes in the sub-network formed by the network nodes in the group C and the network nodes outside the sub-network can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000060
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000060
其中,STA k表示第k个STA,AP l表示为第l个AP。 Wherein, STA k represents the k-th STA, and AP 1 represents the l-th AP.
该分组C内的网络节点形成的子网络的有效强度可以定义为该子网络内的网络节点之间的信号强度的总和,具体表示为:The effective strength of the sub-network formed by the network nodes in the group C can be defined as the sum of the signal strengths between the network nodes in the sub-network, specifically expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000061
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000061
为了降低网络的总体干扰,提高吞吐量,应使得各个分组内分别形成的子网络之间的相互干扰程度尽可能地小,同一子网络内地有效信号强度尽可能地大。这里以该多个分组为N,N为大于或等于2的整数,则该第一网络可以划分为N个分组对应的N个子网络,则为了达到各个分组内分别形成的子网络之间的相互干扰程度尽可能地小,同一子网络内地 有效信号强度尽可能地大的效果,可以将问题定位为:In order to reduce the overall interference of the network and improve the throughput, the degree of mutual interference between the sub-networks formed in each group should be as small as possible, and the effective signal strength in the same sub-network should be as large as possible. Here, the multiple groups are taken as N, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 2, then the first network can be divided into N sub-networks corresponding to the N groups. The interference degree is as small as possible and the effective signal strength in the same sub-network is as large as possible. The problem can be located as:
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000062
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000062
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000063
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000063
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000064
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000064
argmin为极小值自变量(arguments of the maxima)的操作符,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000065
指取使得
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000066
最小化的{G 1,G 2,...,G N}。
argmin is the operator for the arguments of the maxima,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000065
pointing to make
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000066
Minimized {G 1 ,G 2 ,...,G N }.
s.t.是约束条件的操作符。
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000067
表示应当满足
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000068
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000069
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000070
c为约束条件1,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000071
为约束条件2,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000072
为全称量词,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000073
为空集,G d∩G g指取G d和G g的交集,G b指第b个簇,b为大于或等于1且小于或等于N的整数。
st is the operator for constraints.
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000067
indicate that it should be satisfied
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000068
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000069
and
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000070
c is the constraint condition 1,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000071
is Constraint 2,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000072
is a universal quantifier,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000073
is an empty set, G d ∩ G g refers to the intersection of G d and G g , G b refers to the b-th cluster, and b is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to N.
上述步骤401中控制设备收集第一网络中的全局干扰信息,并在步骤402中向服务器发送该第一网络中的全局干扰信息。在上述步骤403中,服务器将第一网络抽象为带权二分图执行谱图分解,通过图论方法和谱聚类对该带权二分图进行谱图分解,以解决上述的问题。即通过图论方法和谱聚类实现对该第一网络的所有AP和所有STA进行分组,这样得到的多个分组中每个分组对应形成的子网络之间的信号干扰程度较小,子网络内的有效强度较大。In the above step 401, the control device collects the global interference information in the first network, and in step 402 sends the global interference information in the first network to the server. In the above step 403, the server abstracts the first network into a weighted bipartite graph to perform spectral graph decomposition, and performs spectral graph decomposition on the weighted bipartite graph through graph theory and spectral clustering to solve the above problem. That is, all APs and all STAs of the first network are grouped by graph theory method and spectral clustering, so that the degree of signal interference between the sub-networks formed corresponding to each grouping in the multiple groups obtained in this way is small, and the sub-networks The effective strength inside is greater.
例如,图4C-1为传统单AP传输机制下,第一网络中的AP与STA的连接状态示意图。在图4C-1中,STA选择最近的AP建立连接,由该AP为该STA提供服务。而图4C-2为按照地域划分的方式划分得到的分组的分布情况示意图。图4C-3为本申请实施例网络管理方法下多个分组的分组分布情况示意图,由图4C-3所示,该第一网络中的AP和STA被划分为多个分组,相比于图4C-2的划分方式,图4C-3中,位置比较靠近的网络节点都被划分到同一分组中。而相比于图4C-1的传统单AP传输机制,图4C-3中,同一分组的多个AP可以同时为同一分组中的STA提供服务,实现多AP联合传输,提高网络吞吐率和频谱利用率。For example, FIG. 4C-1 is a schematic diagram of a connection state between an AP and a STA in the first network under a traditional single-AP transmission mechanism. In Figure 4C-1, the STA selects the nearest AP to establish a connection, and the AP provides services for the STA. FIG. 4C-2 is a schematic diagram of the distribution of the groups obtained by division according to the geographical division. FIG. 4C-3 is a schematic diagram of group distribution of multiple groups under a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4C-3 , APs and STAs in the first network are divided into multiple groups. Compared with FIG. 4C-3 The division method of 4C-2, in Fig. 4C-3, the network nodes located relatively close are all divided into the same group. Compared with the traditional single-AP transmission mechanism in Figure 4C-1, in Figure 4C-3, multiple APs in the same group can simultaneously provide services for STAs in the same group, realizing multi-AP joint transmission and improving network throughput and spectrum. utilization.
404、服务器向控制设备发送该多个分组的分组结果。404. The server sends the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device.
其中,该多个分组的分组结果用于指示该多个分组中每个分组中包括的AP和STA。The grouping result of the multiple groups is used to indicate the APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
例如,该分组结果包括该多个分组中每个分组的分组编号,以及该每个分组编号对应的AP和STA(即每个分组包括的AP和STA)。For example, the grouping result includes a group number of each group in the plurality of groups, and APs and STAs corresponding to each group number (ie, APs and STAs included in each group).
405、控制设备发送第二分组信息。405. The control device sends the second grouping information.
其中,第二分组信息包括该第一网络中的所有AP分别所属的分组的信息和该第一网络的所有STA分别所属的分组的信息。The second group information includes information about groups to which all APs in the first network belong respectively and information about groups to which all STAs of the first network belong respectively.
例如,该第二分组信息包括该第一网络中的所有AP和所有STA分别所属的分组的分组编号。For example, the second group information includes group numbers of groups to which all APs and all STAs in the first network belong respectively.
可选的,本实施例还包括步骤405a,且步骤405a在步骤405之前执行。Optionally, this embodiment further includes step 405a, and step 405a is performed before step 405.
步骤405a:控制设备为该多个分组中同一分组内的AP分配相同的信道。Step 405a: The control device allocates the same channel to the APs in the same group among the multiple groups.
具体的,该控制设备根据该第一信道参数信息为多个分组中每个分组内的AP选择信道;并且,控制设备为每个分组内的AP选择的信道相同。Specifically, the control device selects a channel for the APs in each of the multiple groups according to the first channel parameter information; and the control device selects the same channel for the APs in each group.
基于步骤405a,可选的,上述第二分组信息还包括第三信道分配信息。该第三信道分配信息为该控制设备为该第一网络中的AP分配的信道的信息。Based on step 405a, optionally, the second grouping information further includes third channel allocation information. The third channel allocation information is information of a channel allocated by the control device to the AP in the first network.
需要说明的是,步骤405a示出了以控制设备为该多个分组分别分配对应的信道的实现方式中。在实际应用中,在集中式的网络管理系统中,也可以由同一分组内的AP选择信道,具体的选择过程与后续图5A所示的实施例中的步骤507至步骤511类似,具体请参阅后文的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。It should be noted that step 405a shows an implementation manner in which the control device allocates corresponding channels to the multiple groups respectively. In practical applications, in a centralized network management system, APs in the same group can also select channels. The specific selection process is similar to steps 507 to 511 in the subsequent embodiment shown in FIG. 5A . For details, please refer to The related introductions that follow will not be repeated here.
步骤405中以控制设备广播该第一网络中的所有AP和所有STA的第二分组信息为示例进行介绍。在实际应用中,该控制设备也可以从多个分组的分组结果确定第一网络中的每个网络节点所属的分组的信息,并向对应的网络节点发送该网络节点对应的分组信息。即控制设备通过单播的方式发送分组信息。Step 405 is introduced by taking the control device broadcasting the second grouping information of all APs and all STAs in the first network as an example. In practical applications, the control device may also determine the information of the group to which each network node in the first network belongs from the grouping results of the multiple groups, and send the grouping information corresponding to the network node to the corresponding network node. That is, the control device sends the packet information through unicast.
需要说明的是,控制设备也可以只给第一网络中的所有AP发送第二分组信息。可选的,服务器对第一网络中的所有AP和所有STA的分组管理透明;或者,由每个分组内的AP再通知同一分组内的STA相关的分组信息,具体本申请不做限定。It should be noted that the control device may also only send the second grouping information to all APs in the first network. Optionally, the server is transparent to the grouping management of all APs and all STAs in the first network; or, the APs in each group notify the STAs in the same group of related grouping information, which is not specifically limited in this application.
由于在集中式的网络管理系统,控制设备收集有该第一网络中的全局干扰信息,因此由控制设备根据该全局干扰信息为每个分组分配相应的信道是较为合理的。相比于通过同一分组内的AP选择信道的方式来说,由控制设备为每个分组选择对应的信道的方式可以减少设备之间的信息交互,降低信令开销,避免不必要的资源浪费。Since in a centralized network management system, the control device collects the global interference information in the first network, it is reasonable for the control device to allocate a corresponding channel to each group according to the global interference information. Compared with the method of selecting channels through APs in the same group, the method of selecting the corresponding channel for each group by the control device can reduce information exchange between devices, reduce signaling overhead, and avoid unnecessary waste of resources.
并且,该控制设备为同一分组内的AP分配相同的信道,这样同一分组内的多个AP可以实现多AP联合传输,从而满足WiFi网络高吞吐量和低时延的需求,同时也提高了频谱利用率。Moreover, the control device allocates the same channel to the APs in the same group, so that multiple APs in the same group can realize multi-AP joint transmission, so as to meet the requirements of high throughput and low delay of WiFi network, and also improve the frequency spectrum. utilization.
406、第二AP根据第二分组信息确定第二AP所属的分组。406. The second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information.
具体的,第二AP为该第一网络中的AP,该第二AP根据第二分组信息确定该第二AP所属的分组。可选的,该第二分组信息包括该第二AP所属的分组编号;该第二AP根据该第二AP所属的分组编号确定该第二AP所属的分组。Specifically, the second AP is an AP in the first network, and the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information. Optionally, the second group information includes the group number to which the second AP belongs; the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs according to the group number to which the second AP belongs.
可选的,该第二分组信息还包括第三信道分配信息。那么本实施例还包括步骤406a,步骤406a与步骤406可以同时执行,或者先执行步骤406,或者先执行步骤406a,具体本申请不做限定。Optionally, the second grouping information further includes third channel allocation information. Then, this embodiment further includes step 406a. Step 406a and step 406 may be performed simultaneously, or step 406 may be performed first, or step 406a may be performed first, which is not specifically limited in this application.
步骤406a:第二AP根据该第三信道分配信息确定控制设备为该第二AP选择的第三信道。Step 406a: The second AP determines the third channel selected by the control device for the second AP according to the third channel allocation information.
例如,第三信道分配信息包括用于该第三信道的频段的指示信息或者该第三信道的频段。第二AP可以根据该用于该第三信道的频段的指示信息确定第三信道的频段,并接入该频段;或者,第二AP接入该第三信道的频段。For example, the third channel allocation information includes indication information of the frequency band used for the third channel or the frequency band of the third channel. The second AP may determine the frequency band of the third channel according to the indication information of the frequency band used for the third channel, and access the frequency band; or, the second AP accesses the frequency band of the third channel.
步骤406b:第二AP将该第二AP接入的信道调整为该第三信道。Step 406b: The second AP adjusts the channel accessed by the second AP to the third channel.
407、第二AP根据第二AP所属的分组调整第二AP连接的STA。407. The second AP adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
步骤407中第二AP调整该第二连接的STA的调整方式有多种,下面示出两种可能的实现方式。In step 407, there are various adjustment modes for the second AP to adjust the STA of the second connection, and two possible implementation modes are shown below.
实现方式一:第二AP发送该第二AP所属的分组的信息,该第二AP所属的分组的信息用于第一网络中的STA判断是否接入该第二AP。Implementation mode 1: The second AP sends information of the group to which the second AP belongs, and the information of the group to which the second AP belongs is used for the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the second AP.
基于实现方式一,上述步骤407具体包括步骤407a。Based on the first implementation manner, the above step 407 specifically includes step 407a.
步骤407a:第二AP发送第二AP所属的分组的信息。Step 407a: The second AP sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs.
其中,该第二AP所属的分组的信息用于该第一网络中的STA判断是否接入第二AP。The information of the group to which the second AP belongs is used for the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the second AP.
具体的,第二AP可以通过广播的方式发送该第二AP所属的分组的信息。Specifically, the second AP may send the information of the group to which the second AP belongs by broadcasting.
可选的,该第二AP所属的分组的信息的发送形式可以是在第二AP广播的消息中,或者携带在信标帧中,具体本申请不做限定。Optionally, the sending form of the information of the group to which the second AP belongs may be in a message broadcast by the second AP or carried in a beacon frame, which is not specifically limited in this application.
下面示出第二AP通过信标帧发送第二AP所属的分组的信息的方式。可选的,该第二AP所属的分组的信息包括该第二AP所属的分组的第二分组编号,那么上述步骤407a具体包括:The following shows the manner in which the second AP sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs through the beacon frame. Optionally, the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes the second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs, then the above step 407a specifically includes:
该第二AP发送第二信标帧,该第二信标帧携带该第二AP所属的分组的第二分组编号。The second AP sends a second beacon frame, where the second beacon frame carries the second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs.
例如,如图4D所示,第二AP对该第二信标帧的格式进行修改。在图4D中,该第二信标帧包括固定字段域和可选项域。第二AP在可选项域中扩展分组编号字段,并在该分组编号字段对应的比特上承载该第二分组编号。For example, as shown in FIG. 4D, the second AP modifies the format of the second beacon frame. In FIG. 4D, the second beacon frame includes a fixed field field and an optional field. The second AP extends the packet number field in the optional field, and carries the second packet number on the bit corresponding to the packet number field.
基于实现方式一,本实施例还包括步骤407b至步骤407e,且步骤407b至步骤407e在步骤407a之后执行。Based on the first implementation, this embodiment further includes steps 407b to 407e, and steps 407b to 407e are executed after step 407a.
步骤407b:该第四STA接收该第二AP发送的该第二AP所属的分组的信息。Step 407b: The fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and sent by the second AP.
可选的,该第二AP所属的分组的信息包括该第二分组编号。Optionally, the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes the second group number.
可选的,该第四STA接收该第二AP发送的第二信标帧,该第二信标帧携带该第二分组编号。Optionally, the fourth STA receives a second beacon frame sent by the second AP, where the second beacon frame carries the second group number.
具体的,第四STA扫描所有信道,并接收第二AP发送的第二信标帧;然后,第四STA根据该第二信标帧携带的第二分组编号与第四STA所属的分组的分组编号进行比对。Specifically, the fourth STA scans all the channels, and receives the second beacon frame sent by the second AP; then, the fourth STA according to the second group number carried in the second beacon frame and the grouping of the group to which the fourth STA belongs number for comparison.
需要说明的是,在步骤407b之前,该第四STA接收第八AP发送的第四STA所属的分组的信息。该第八AP为该第四STA调整连接所连接的AP。也就是说第四STA可以通过其连接的第八AP发送的分组信息确定第四STA所属的分组。例如,如图第四STA为STA3,该STA3与AP2连接,AP2发送该第四STA所属的分组的信息给该STA3。It should be noted that, before step 407b, the fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs and sent by the eighth AP. The eighth AP is an AP to which the fourth STA adjusts the connection. That is to say, the fourth STA may determine the group to which the fourth STA belongs by using the group information sent by the eighth AP to which it is connected. For example, as shown in the figure, the fourth STA is STA3, the STA3 is connected to the AP2, and the AP2 sends the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs to the STA3.
步骤407c:该第四STA根据第二AP所属的分组的信息确定第二AP与第四STA是否属于同一分组,若是,则执行步骤407d;若否,则执行步骤407e。Step 407c: The fourth STA determines whether the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs. If so, execute step 407d; if not, execute step 407e.
可选的,该第二AP所属的分组的信息包括该第二分组编号,则步骤407c具体为第四STA判断该第四STA所属的分组的分组编号与该第二分组编号是否一致,若是,则执行步骤407d,若否,则执行步骤407e。Optionally, the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes the second group number, and step 407c is specifically for the fourth STA to determine whether the group number of the group to which the fourth STA belongs is consistent with the second group number, and if so, Then go to step 407d, if not, go to step 407e.
步骤407d:该第四STA将该第四STA连接的AP调整为第二AP。Step 407d: The fourth STA adjusts the AP connected to the fourth STA to the second AP.
例如,如图2A所示,第四STA为STA3,STA2在调整前连接的是AP2,第二AP为AP3。 那么STA3可以将该STA3从连接的AP2调整为AP3。For example, as shown in FIG. 2A , the fourth STA is STA3, STA2 is connected to AP2 before adjustment, and the second AP is AP3. Then STA3 can adjust the STA3 from the connected AP2 to AP3.
步骤407e:该第四STA保持与第八AP连接。Step 407e: the fourth STA keeps the connection with the eighth AP.
上述实现方式一的技术方案中,主要是由第四STA对其关联的AP进行调整,从而实现对STA的连接管理。In the technical solution of the first implementation manner, the fourth STA mainly adjusts its associated AP, so as to realize the connection management of the STA.
实现方式二:下面结合步骤407f至步骤407i介绍实现方式二。Implementation mode 2: The implementation mode 2 is described below in conjunction with steps 407f to 407i.
步骤407f:第二AP确定第二所属的分组中包括的STA。Step 407f: The second AP determines the STA included in the group to which the second belongs.
具体的,第二AP根据控制设备发送的第二分组信息确定第二AP所属的分组中包括的STA。Specifically, the second AP determines, according to the second grouping information sent by the control device, the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs.
步骤407g:第二AP判断该第二AP和第三STA是否属于同一分组,若是,则执行步骤407h;若否,则执行步骤407i。Step 407g: The second AP judges whether the second AP and the third STA belong to the same group, if so, execute step 407h; if not, execute step 407i.
其中,该第三STA为与该第二AP已建立连接的STA。The third STA is a STA that has established a connection with the second AP.
一种可能的实现方式中,第二AP根据第二分组信息确定该第二AP所属的分组中包括的STA,并判断该第二AP所属的分组中包括的STA是否包括该第三STA,若是,则执行步骤407h;若否,则执行步骤407i。In a possible implementation manner, the second AP determines the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information, and determines whether the STA included in the group to which the second AP belongs includes the third STA, and if so , then go to step 407h; if not, go to step 407i.
另一种可能的实现方式中,第二AP根据第二分组信息确定该第二AP所属的分组和第三STA所属的分组;然后,第二AP判断该第二AP所属的分组和第三STA所属的分组是否相同,若是,则执行步骤407h;若否,则执行步骤407i。In another possible implementation manner, the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs and the group to which the third STA belongs according to the second group information; then, the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs and the third STA Whether the belonging groups are the same, if yes, go to step 407h; if not, go to step 407i.
步骤407h:第二AP保持为第三STA提供服务。Step 407h: The second AP keeps serving the third STA.
如果第二AP与第三STA属于同一分组,则第二AP保持为第三STA提供服务。If the second AP and the third STA belong to the same group, the second AP keeps serving the third STA.
步骤407i:第二AP根据第三STA所属的分组确定第七AP,并向第七AP发送第三指示信息;或者,第二AP向第三STA发送第四指示信息。Step 407i: The second AP determines a seventh AP according to the group to which the third STA belongs, and sends third indication information to the seventh AP; or, the second AP sends fourth indication information to the third STA.
其中,该第三指示信息用于指示该第七AP为该第三STA提供服务,该第七AP与该第三STA属于同一分组。The third indication information is used to indicate that the seventh AP provides services for the third STA, and the seventh AP and the third STA belong to the same group.
具体的,该第二AP根据该第二分组信息确定该第三STA所属的分组,并从该第三STA所属的分组确定第七AP。例如,该第七AP可以为该第三STA所属的分组中信号强度最大或信号强度中等的AP,具体可以通过该第七AP发送的信标帧的信号强度确定。然后,第二AP向该第七AP发送第三指示信息,以指示该第七AP为该第三STA提供服务,从而实现对AP连接的STA的连接管理。Specifically, the second AP determines the group to which the third STA belongs according to the second group information, and determines the seventh AP from the group to which the third STA belongs. For example, the seventh AP may be an AP with the highest signal strength or medium signal strength in the group to which the third STA belongs, and may be specifically determined by the signal strength of the beacon frame sent by the seventh AP. Then, the second AP sends third indication information to the seventh AP to instruct the seventh AP to provide services for the third STA, so as to implement connection management for the STA connected to the AP.
在该实现方式中,主要是由第二AP调整对其连接的STA。即AP与STA之间的连接调整对于第一网络中的STA是透明的。由第二AP进行关联调整的机制可以兼容现有的WiFi7标准,关联调整过程对第一网络中的STA透明,不用对第一网络中的STA进行功能扩展和修改。In this implementation, it is mainly the second AP that adjusts the STAs connected to it. That is, the connection adjustment between the AP and the STA is transparent to the STA in the first network. The mechanism of association adjustment performed by the second AP can be compatible with the existing WiFi7 standard, and the association adjustment process is transparent to the STA in the first network, and does not need to perform function expansion and modification on the STA in the first network.
其中,第四指示信息用于指示该第三STA请求第七AP为该第三STA提供服务。The fourth indication information is used to indicate that the third STA requests the seventh AP to provide services for the third STA.
具体的,该第二AP根据该第二分组信息确定该第三STA所属的分组,并从该第三STA所属的分组确定第七AP。例如,该第七AP可以为该第三STA所属的分组中信号强度最大或信号强度中等的AP,具体可以通过该第七AP发送的信标帧的信号强度确定。然后,第二AP向该第七AP发送该第四指示信息,以指示该第三STA请求第七AP为该第三STA提供 服务。Specifically, the second AP determines the group to which the third STA belongs according to the second group information, and determines the seventh AP from the group to which the third STA belongs. For example, the seventh AP may be an AP with the highest signal strength or medium signal strength in the group to which the third STA belongs, and may be specifically determined by the signal strength of the beacon frame sent by the seventh AP. Then, the second AP sends the fourth indication information to the seventh AP to instruct the third STA to request the seventh AP to provide services for the third STA.
本申请实施例中,控制设备接收第二AP发送的第二信道参数信息;然后,控制设备向服务器发送第一信道参数信息。服务器根据第一信道参数信息对第一网络中的所有AP和所有STA进行分组,得到多个分组,并向控制设备发送该多个分组的分组结果。控制设备发送第二分组信息;然后,第二AP根据第二分组信息确定该第二AP所属的分组,并根据第二AP所属的分组调整第二AP连接的STA,从而实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划。其次,本申请实施例中通过图论方法和谱聚类实现对该第一网络的所有AP和所有STA进行分组,得到多个分组,这样多个分组中每个分组对应形成的子网络之间的信号干扰程度较小,子网络内的有效强度较大,这样可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。In the embodiment of the present application, the control device receives the second channel parameter information sent by the second AP; then, the control device sends the first channel parameter information to the server. The server groups all APs and all STAs in the first network according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, and sends the grouping results of the multiple groups to the control device. The control device sends the second group information; then, the second AP determines the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information, and adjusts the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs, so as to realize the STA connected to the AP management and planning. Secondly, in the embodiment of the present application, all APs and all STAs of the first network are grouped by using graph theory method and spectral clustering to obtain multiple groups. In this way, each group in the multiple groups corresponds to a sub-network formed between them. The degree of signal interference is small, and the effective strength in the sub-network is large, which can reduce the interference between user equipments, thereby improving the performance of network transmission.
请参阅图5A,图5A为本申请实施例网络管理方法的另一个实施例示意图。在图5A中,该网络管理方法包括:Please refer to FIG. 5A , which is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a network management method according to an embodiment of the present application. In Figure 5A, the network management method includes:
501、第一AP获取第一信道参数信息。501. The first AP acquires first channel parameter information.
该第一信道参数信息包括第一AP与第一AP信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息。The first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP.
具体的,如图2A所示,该WiFi网络中的STA按照已有方式从该WiFi网络中选择一个AP进行连接。例如,STA可以与具有最高信号强度的信标帧对应的AP连接。该WiFi网络中的AP可以通过已有技术选择一个信道并接入该信道。这里以第一AP为AP2,AP2获取AP2分别与该AP2信号覆盖范围内的STA(包括图2A中的STA1和STA2)之间的第一信道参数信息。具体可以是AP2测量该AP2分别与STA1和STA2之间的信道参数信息;或者是,STA1测量该STA1与AP2之间的信道参数信息,并上报给AP2;而STA2测量该STA2与该AP2之间的信道参数信息,并上报给AP2。Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2A , the STA in the WiFi network selects an AP from the WiFi network to connect to according to the existing method. For example, the STA may connect with the AP corresponding to the beacon frame with the highest signal strength. The AP in the WiFi network can select a channel and access the channel through the prior art. Here, the first AP is AP2, and AP2 obtains the first channel parameter information between AP2 and STAs (including STA1 and STA2 in FIG. 2A ) within the signal coverage of AP2 respectively. Specifically, AP2 measures the channel parameter information between the AP2 and STA1 and STA2 respectively; or, STA1 measures the channel parameter information between the STA1 and AP2 and reports it to AP2; and STA2 measures the channel parameter information between the STA2 and the AP2 channel parameter information and report it to AP2.
502、第一AP根据第一信道参数信息对第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组。502. The first AP groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups.
其中,该第一STA为该第一AP信号覆盖范围内的与第一AP已建立连接的STA。Wherein, the first STA is a STA that has established a connection with the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP.
下面结合步骤502a至步骤502e介绍该步骤502中第一AP确定该多个分组的过程。The following describes the process of determining the plurality of groups by the first AP in step 502 with reference to steps 502a to 502e.
步骤502a:第一AP根据信道矩阵W的第p个列向量计算得到第一中间矩阵D的第p+K个主对角线元素b pStep 502a: The first AP calculates the p+Kth main diagonal element bp of the first intermediate matrix D according to the pth column vector of the channel matrix W.
其中,该第一网络包括L个AP和K个STA,该第一AP为该第一网络中的第p个AP,L为大于或等于1的整数,K为大于或等于1的整数,p为大于1或等于1且小于或等于L的整数。The first network includes L APs and K STAs, the first AP is the pth AP in the first network, L is an integer greater than or equal to 1, K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and p is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L.
该信道矩阵W的相关介绍请参阅前述图4A所示的实施例中步骤402中对信道矩阵W的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。而第一中间矩阵D的相关介绍请参阅前述图4A所示的实施例中步骤403中的第一中间矩阵D的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。For the related introduction of the channel matrix W, please refer to the related introduction of the channel matrix W in step 402 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , and details are not repeated here. For the related introduction of the first intermediate matrix D, please refer to the related introduction of the first intermediate matrix D in step 403 in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , which will not be repeated here.
由于第一AP获取到的是该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量,因此第一AP根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量计算得到第一中间D的第p+K个主对角线元素b pSince the first AP obtains the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the first AP calculates the p+K-th main diagonal of the first middle D according to the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W element b p .
步骤502b:第一AP获取第一中间矩阵D的前K个主对角线元素。Step 502b: The first AP acquires the first K main diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D.
第一AP从第一网络中的STA和第一网络中的其他AP中获取该第一中间矩阵D的前K个对角线元素,即a 1至a K。具体的,第一AP与该第一网络中的其他AP之间可以使用接入 点交互协议(inter access point protocol,IAPP)通过有线网进行信息交换,以获取其他AP发送的信息。 The first AP acquires the first K diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D, ie a 1 to a K , from the STAs in the first network and other APs in the first network. Specifically, an access point protocol (inter access point protocol, IAPP) may be used to exchange information between the first AP and other APs in the first network through a wired network, so as to obtain information sent by other APs.
步骤502c:第一AP根据该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量和第K+p行向量。 Step 502c: The first AP determines the first part of the sixth intermediate matrix Q according to the p+Kth main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D and the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D; K-row vector and K+p-th row vector.
其中,第六中间矩阵Q的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,该网络节点为该第一网络中的AP或STA。Wherein, each row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node, and the network node is an AP or STA in the first network.
下面结合步骤1至步骤3介绍步骤502c。Step 502c will be described below in conjunction with steps 1 to 3.
步骤1:第一AP根据该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量、该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000074
Step 1: The first AP uses the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K main pairs in the first intermediate matrix D. The corner elements determine the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000074
其中,该第二中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000075
该W T为该W转置。
where the second intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000075
The W T is the W transpose.
由于该第一AP只获取有该信道矩阵W的第p个列向量,以及该第一中间矩阵的前K个主对角线元素和第p+K主对角线元素b p,因此,第一AP只能确定第一中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000076
Since the first AP only acquires the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, as well as the first K main diagonal elements and the p+K-th main diagonal elements b p of the first intermediate matrix, therefore, the th An AP can only determine the p-th row vector of the first intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000076
步骤2:第一AP根据随机梯度下降算法和第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000077
确定第一矩阵X M的第p行向量和第二矩阵Y M
Step 2: The first AP according to the stochastic gradient descent algorithm and the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000077
Determine the p-th row vector of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M .
其中,该第一矩阵X M与该第三矩阵的近似度大于或等于第一预设阈值,该第二矩阵Y M与第四矩阵的近似度大于或等于第二预设阈值。 Wherein, the degree of similarity between the first matrix X M and the third matrix is greater than or equal to a first preset threshold, and the degree of similarity between the second matrix Y M and the fourth matrix is greater than or equal to a second preset threshold.
该第三矩阵为从该第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的左奇异矩阵选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,该左奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,该第三矩阵的M个列向量为从该左奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量。The third matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the left singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the left singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, and the first The M column vectors of the three matrices are the M column vectors selected from the left singular matrix in descending order of singular values.
该第四矩阵为从该第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的右奇异矩阵中选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,该右奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,该第四矩阵的M个列向量为从该右奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量。The fourth matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the right singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R. Each column vector in the right singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, and the The M column vectors of the fourth matrix are M column vectors selected from the right singular matrix in descending order of singular values.
M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,log 2(K+L)指以2为底数对K+L求对数,min(K,L)指取K和L中的最小值。 M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with base 2, min(K, L ) means taking the minimum of K and L.
需要说明的是,M的取值也可以结合实际情况确定,具体本申请不做限定。上述M的取值范围示例是由实验数据分析确定,M的取值范围在log 2(K+L)至min(K,L)之间的整数时,服务器对第一网络中的STA和AP的分组效果能够达到较好的效果。例如,对于各个分组内的AP和STA形成的子网络内的有效信号强度总和较大,且该子网络内与子网络外的网络节点(AP或STA)之间的信号干扰强度较低。 It should be noted that the value of M can also be determined in combination with the actual situation, which is not specifically limited in this application. The above example of the value range of M is determined by the analysis of experimental data. When the value range of M is an integer between log 2 (K+L) and min(K, L), the server will determine the value of the STA and AP in the first network. The grouping effect can achieve better results. For example, the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the signal interference strength between the network nodes (APs or STAs) in the sub-network and outside the sub-network is relatively low.
可选的,M的取值可以为该多个分组的分组数目。该多个分组的分组数目为大于1且小于min(K,L)的整数。Optionally, the value of M may be the number of groups of the multiple groups. The number of groups of the plurality of groups is an integer greater than 1 and less than min(K, L).
其中,第一预设阈值和第二预设阈值的大小可以结合实验数据确定,具体可以结合下面式(5)确定该第一预设阈值和第二预设阈值的大小。Wherein, the size of the first preset threshold and the second preset threshold can be determined in combination with experimental data, and specifically, the sizes of the first preset threshold and the second preset threshold can be determined in combination with the following formula (5).
本实施例中,第一网络中的AP通过协同的方式实现在分布式的网络管理系统中对第三中间矩阵R的奇异值分解以及对第六中间矩阵Q的行向量的聚类。在分布式的网络管理系统中,每个AP测量该每个AP与该每个AP信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息(每个AP测量得到的信道参数信息对应该信道矩阵W的一列。例如,第一AP为第一网络中的第p个AP,那么该第一AP可以计算该第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000078
第一网络中AP之间通过分布式的随机梯度下降算法实现得到与通过对第三中间矩阵R进行奇异值分解的方式得到的结果类似的结果。具体可以将问题近似为:
In this embodiment, the APs in the first network implement singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R and clustering of row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q in a distributed network management system in a cooperative manner. In a distributed network management system, each AP measures the channel parameter information between each AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP (the channel parameter information measured by each AP corresponds to the value of the channel matrix W For example, if the first AP is the p-th AP in the first network, then the first AP can calculate the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000078
A distributed stochastic gradient descent algorithm is used between APs in the first network to achieve a result similar to that obtained by performing singular value decomposition on the third intermediate matrix R. Specifically, the problem can be approximated as:
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000079
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000079
其中,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000080
指取使得
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000081
的最小化的X M和Y M
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000082
为取
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000083
的Frobenius范数。
in,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000080
pointing to make
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000081
The minimized X M and Y M .
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000082
to take
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000083
The Frobenius norm of .
具体通过后文图6A所示的实施例的计算过程求解上述式(7)的问题,请参阅后文图6A中的相关介绍。Specifically, the problem of the above formula (7) is solved through the calculation process of the embodiment shown in FIG. 6A , please refer to the related introduction in FIG. 6A later.
步骤3:第一AP根据该第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p、该第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素、该第一矩阵X M的第p个行向量和该第二矩阵Y M计算得到第六中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000084
的前K行向量和第K+p行向量。
Step 3: The first AP is based on the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D, and the first matrix X M . The p-th row vector and the second matrix Y M are calculated to obtain the sixth intermediate matrix
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000084
The first K row vector and the K+pth row vector of .
其中,第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量为:Among them, the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q are:
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000085
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000085
而该第六中间矩阵Q的第K+p个行向量为:And the K+pth row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is:
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000086
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000086
其中,第六中间矩阵Q的第K+p个行向量对应第p个AP,第六中间矩阵Q的前K个行向量分别对应第一网络中的K个STA。The K+p th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to the p th AP, and the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q correspond to K STAs in the first network respectively.
步骤502d:第一AP根据聚类算法对目标行向量进行聚类,得到第二聚类结果。Step 502d: The first AP performs clustering on the target row vector according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result.
其中,该目标行向量包括与所述第一AP对应的第K+p行向量以及第六中间矩阵Q的前 K个行向量中与第一STA对应的行向量。该多个簇中一个簇对应多个分组中的一个分组。The target row vector includes the K+p th row vector corresponding to the first AP and the row vector corresponding to the first STA among the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q. One cluster in the plurality of clusters corresponds to one group in the plurality of groups.
可选的,该聚类算法为k-means算法、k-means++算法、均值漂移聚类、最大期望聚类算法、DBSCAN、图团体检测聚类算法、GCN聚类算法等。Optionally, the clustering algorithm is k-means algorithm, k-means++ algorithm, mean shift clustering, maximum expectation clustering algorithm, DBSCAN, graph community detection clustering algorithm, GCN clustering algorithm, and the like.
本实施例中,以第一AP通过k-means为例进行介绍,具体通过后文图7所示的实施例介绍步骤502d中第一AP的确定过程。In this embodiment, the first AP is introduced by using k-means as an example, and specifically, the process of determining the first AP in step 502d is introduced through the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 later.
步骤502e:第一AP根据多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点。Step 502e: The first AP determines network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
具体的,由于第六中间矩阵Q的第K+p个行向量对应第p个AP,第六中间矩阵Q的前K个行向量分布对应第一网络中的K个STA,因此第一AP可以将该多个簇中同一簇的行向量分别对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中,该网络节点为第一AP或第一STA。Specifically, since the K+p th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to the p th AP, and the first K row vector distributions of the sixth intermediate matrix Q correspond to the K STAs in the first network, the first AP can The network nodes corresponding to the row vectors of the same cluster in the multiple clusters are divided into the same group, and the network node is the first AP or the first STA.
503、第一AP发送多个分组的分组结果。503. The first AP sends grouping results of multiple groups.
其中,该分组结果用于指示该多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA。The grouping result is used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
由于第一AP分组的对象包括该第一AP和第一STA,因此该多个分组包括该第一AP和第一STA。该分组结果可以包括该每个分组对应的分组编号,以及该每个分组编号对应的AP和STA。Since the objects of the first AP grouping include the first AP and the first STA, the multiple groups include the first AP and the first STA. The grouping result may include a grouping number corresponding to each grouping, and APs and STAs corresponding to each grouping number.
504、第一AP根据第一AP所属的分组调整第一AP连接的STA。504. The first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
步骤504中第一AP的调整方式与前述图4A所示的实施例中步骤407中第二AP的调整方式类似,具体请参阅前述图4A所示的实施例中步骤407相关介绍,这里不再赘述。The adjustment method of the first AP in step 504 is similar to the adjustment method of the second AP in step 407 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A . For details, please refer to the related introduction of step 407 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , which is not repeated here. Repeat.
在分布式的网络管理系统中,多个AP通过协同的方式实现对第一网络中的所有AP和所有STA进行分组,具体多个分组的分布如图5B所示,多个分组的分组效果与前述图4C-3的多个分组的分组效果类似,对于各个分组内的AP和STA形成的子网络内的有效信号强度总和较大,且该子网络内与子网络外的网络节点(AP或STA)之间的信号干扰强度较低。In a distributed network management system, multiple APs group all APs and all STAs in the first network in a cooperative manner. The specific distribution of multiple groups is shown in Figure 5B. The grouping effect of multiple groups is similar to that of multiple groups. The grouping effects of the aforementioned multiple groups in FIG. 4C-3 are similar, and the sum of the effective signal strengths in the sub-network formed by the APs and STAs in each group is relatively large, and the network nodes (AP or The signal interference strength between STAs) is low.
本申请实施例中,第一AP获取第一信道参数信息;然后,第一AP根据第一信道参数信息对第一AP和第一AP信号覆盖范围内的与第一AP连接的STA进行分组,得到多个分组;然后,第一AP发送多个分组的分组结果,第一AP根据第一AP所属的分组调整第一AP连接的STA,从而实现对AP连接的STA的管理和规划。其次,本申请实施例中,分布式的网络管理系统中,第一网络的各个AP通过协同的方式、图论方法和谱聚类实现对该第一网络的所有AP和所有STA进行分组,得到多个分组,这样多个分组中每个分组对应形成的子网络之间的信号干扰程度较小,子网络内的有效信号强度较大,这样可以减少用户设备之间的干扰,从而提升网络传输的性能。In the embodiment of the present application, the first AP acquires the first channel parameter information; then, the first AP groups the first AP and the STAs connected to the first AP within the signal coverage of the first AP according to the first channel parameter information, Obtain multiple groups; then, the first AP sends the grouping results of the multiple groups, and the first AP adjusts the STAs connected to the first AP according to the groups to which the first AP belongs, so as to manage and plan the STAs connected to the AP. Secondly, in the embodiment of the present application, in the distributed network management system, each AP of the first network implements grouping of all APs and all STAs of the first network through a collaborative method, graph theory method and spectral clustering, and obtains Multiple groups, so that the signal interference between the sub-networks formed by each group in the multiple groups is small, and the effective signal strength in the sub-network is large, which can reduce the interference between user equipment and improve network transmission. performance.
在分布式的网络管理系统,多个AP通过协同的方式对第一网络中的所有AP和所有STA进行分组。各个AP可以为各个AP以及与该各个AP已建立连接的STA进行分组。那么,在分布式的网络管理系统下,同一分组内的AP的信道分配过程具体可以参阅下述步骤505至步骤511的相关介绍。In a distributed network management system, multiple APs group all APs and all STAs in the first network in a cooperative manner. Each AP may group each AP and the STAs that have established connections with the respective APs. Then, under the distributed network management system, for the channel allocation process of the APs in the same group, please refer to the related introduction of the following steps 505 to 511 for details.
那么,上述图5A所示的实施例还包括步骤505至步骤511。并且,步骤505至步骤511在步骤502之前执行。步骤505至步骤511与步骤503至步骤504没有明显执行顺序,可以先执行步骤503至步骤504,也可以先执行步骤505至步骤511;或者,依据情况同时执行步骤505至步骤511和步骤505至步骤511,具体本申请不做限定。Then, the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 5A further includes steps 505 to 511 . Also, steps 505 to 511 are executed before step 502 . Steps 505 to 511 and steps 503 to 504 have no obvious order of execution. Steps 503 to 504 can be executed first, or steps 505 to 511 can be executed first; or, depending on the situation, steps 505 to 511 and steps 505 to 505 can be executed simultaneously. Step 511, which is not specifically limited in this application.
505、第一AP接收第四AP发送的第一分组信息。505. The first AP receives the first packet information sent by the fourth AP.
其中,第一分组信息包括第四AP所属的分组信息和第四AP的标识,该第四AP包括第 一网络中除第一AP之外的AP。The first grouping information includes grouping information to which a fourth AP belongs and an identifier of the fourth AP, where the fourth AP includes APs other than the first AP in the first network.
具体的,该第一分组包括该第四AP所属的分组的分组编号。第一AP接收该第一网络中的其他AP广播的第一分组信息,以确定其他AP所属的分组。Specifically, the first group includes the group number of the group to which the fourth AP belongs. The first AP receives the first group information broadcast by other APs in the first network to determine the group to which the other APs belong.
506、第一AP根据第一分组信息确定第五AP与第一AP属于同一分组。506. The first AP determines, according to the first group information, that the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group.
其中,第五AP为第四AP中的部分AP,该第五AP与第一AP属于同一分组。The fifth AP is a part of APs in the fourth AP, and the fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group.
具体的,第一AP根据该第一分组信息包括的分组编号确定第一AP所属的分组的分组编号与该第五AP所属的分组的分组编号相同,即第一AP可以确定该第一AP与第五AP属于同一分组。Specifically, according to the group number included in the first group information, the first AP determines that the group number of the group to which the first AP belongs is the same as the group number of the group to which the fifth AP belongs, that is, the first AP can determine that the first AP and the group belong to the same group. The fifth AP belongs to the same group.
507、第一AP根据第一AP的标识、第五AP的标识和预设的AP优先级规则判断第一AP的优先级是否高于第五AP的优先级,若是,则执行步骤508;若否,则执行步骤510。507. The first AP judges whether the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP according to the identifier of the first AP, the identifier of the fifth AP and the preset AP priority rule, and if so, perform step 508; If not, step 510 is executed.
该预设的AP优先级规则包括第一网络中的每个AP的标识对应的优先级,第一AP可以根据该预设的AP优先级规则确定第一AP的优先级和第五AP的优先级,并判断该第一AP的优先级是否高于第五AP的优先级,若是,则执行步骤508;若否,则执行步骤510。The preset AP priority rule includes the priority corresponding to the identifier of each AP in the first network, and the first AP can determine the priority of the first AP and the priority of the fifth AP according to the preset AP priority rule level, and determine whether the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP, if so, go to step 508; if not, go to step 510.
可选的,该预设的AP优先级规则是预先配置在第一AP的,或者是通信协议规定的,或者是由其他网络设备发送给第一AP的。Optionally, the preset AP priority rule is pre-configured on the first AP, or specified by a communication protocol, or sent to the first AP by other network devices.
该预设的AP优先级规则可以按照以下任一种方式设定:The preset AP priority rule can be set in any of the following ways:
1、按照AP的硬件配置高低设定该预设的AP优先级规则。例如,AP的硬件配置越高,则该AP的优先级就越高。1. Set the preset AP priority rule according to the hardware configuration of the AP. For example, the higher the hardware configuration of the AP, the higher the priority of the AP.
2、按照AP的标识(index)顺序设定该预设的AP优先级规则。例如,AP的index越大,则该AP的优先级越高。2. Set the preset AP priority rule according to the order of the AP's index. For example, the larger the index of the AP, the higher the priority of the AP.
上述设定方式仅仅是一种示例,该预设的AP优先级规则还可以按照其他方式设定,具体本申请不做限定。The above setting method is only an example, and the preset AP priority rule may also be set in other manners, which are not specifically limited in this application.
508、第一AP通过扫描信道选择第一信道,并接入该第一信道。508. The first AP selects a first channel by scanning channels, and accesses the first channel.
例如,第一AP可以采用LCCS技术扫描信道和选择第一信道,并接入该第一信道。For example, the first AP may use the LCCS technology to scan channels and select the first channel, and access the first channel.
509、第一AP向第五AP发送第一信道分配信息。509. The first AP sends the first channel allocation information to the fifth AP.
其中,该第一信道分配信息用于指示第五AP接入该第一信道。Wherein, the first channel allocation information is used to instruct the fifth AP to access the first channel.
可选的,第一信道分配信息包括用于指示该第一信道的频段的指示信息或该第一信道的频段。Optionally, the first channel allocation information includes indication information for indicating the frequency band of the first channel or the frequency band of the first channel.
510、第一AP接收第六AP发送第二信道分配信息。510. The first AP receives the second channel allocation information sent by the sixth AP.
其中,第二信道分配信息为第六AP选择的第二信道的信息,第六AP为第五AP中优先级最高的AP。第二信道分配信息与第一信道分配信息类似,具体请参阅前述第一信道分配信息的相关介绍。The second channel allocation information is information of the second channel selected by the sixth AP, and the sixth AP is the AP with the highest priority among the fifth APs. The second channel allocation information is similar to the first channel allocation information. For details, please refer to the foregoing related introduction of the first channel allocation information.
511、第一AP根据第二信道分配信息将第一AP接入的信道调整为第二信道。511. The first AP adjusts the channel accessed by the first AP to the second channel according to the second channel allocation information.
例如,该第二信道分配信息包括该第二信道的频段,该第一AP可以将第一AP接入该第二信道的频段。For example, the second channel allocation information includes a frequency band of the second channel, and the first AP can access the first AP to the frequency band of the second channel.
由上述步骤505至步骤511可知,在分布式的网络管理系统中实现为同一分组内的多个AP分配相同的信道,这样同一分组内的多个AP可以实现多AP联合传输,从而满足WiFi 网络高吞吐量和低时延的需求,同时也提高了频谱利用率。From the above steps 505 to 511, it can be known that in the distributed network management system, the same channel is allocated to multiple APs in the same group, so that multiple APs in the same group can realize multi-AP joint transmission, thereby satisfying the WiFi network. The demand for high throughput and low latency also improves spectrum utilization.
需要说明的是,上述步骤505至步骤511的信道分配方式仅仅是一种示例。在分布式的网络管理系统,同一分组内的多个AP也可以通过侦听和竞争的方式选择一个AP。然后,该AP选择信道,再将选择的信道的信息发送给该分组内的其他AP,从而实现同一分组内的多个AP接入同一信道,以实现多AP联合传输;并且满足WiFi网络高吞吐量和低时延的需求,同时也提高了频谱利用率。It should be noted that the channel allocation manners in the above steps 505 to 511 are just an example. In a distributed network management system, multiple APs in the same group can also select an AP by means of listening and competition. Then, the AP selects a channel, and then sends the information of the selected channel to other APs in the group, so that multiple APs in the same group can access the same channel to realize multi-AP joint transmission; and meet the high throughput of the WiFi network It can meet the requirements of high throughput and low latency, and at the same time, it also improves the spectrum utilization.
请参阅图6A,图6A为本申请实施例网络管理方法的另一个实施例示意图。在图6A中,该方法包括:Please refer to FIG. 6A. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the network management method according to the embodiment of the present application. In Figure 6A, the method includes:
601、第一AP随机初始化第一矩阵X M的第p个行向量x p和第二矩阵Y M601. The first AP randomly initializes the p-th row vector x p of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M .
其中,x p=[x p1 x p2 … x pM],x p为一行乘以M列的矩阵,x pf为x p中的第f列向量的元素;Y M=[y 1 y 2 … y M]为K行乘以M列的矩阵,y f为Y M中的第f列向量的元素,f为大于或等于1且小于或等于M的整数。 Among them, x p = [x p1 x p2 ... x pM ], x p is a matrix of one row multiplied by M columns, x pf is the element of the f-th column vector in x p ; Y M = [y 1 y 2 ... y M ] is a matrix of K rows by M columns, y f is the element of the f-th column vector in Y M , and f is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to M.
602、第一AP初始化动量项Δx p和动量项ΔY M,使得动量项Δx p和动量项ΔY M均为0。 602 . The first AP initializes the momentum term Δx p and the momentum term ΔY M , so that the momentum term Δx p and the momentum term ΔY M are both 0.
在随机梯度下降过程中使用该动量项Δx p和动量项ΔY M,以加速随机梯度下降算法的收敛过程,以实现上述式(5)的最小值问题的求解。其中,动量项Δx p=[Δx p1 Δx p2 … Δx pM],Δx pf为动量项Δx p的第f个列向量。动量项ΔY M=[Δy 1 Δy 2 … Δy M],Δy f为动量项ΔY M的第f个列向量。 The momentum term Δx p and the momentum term ΔY M are used in the stochastic gradient descent process to accelerate the convergence process of the stochastic gradient descent algorithm, so as to solve the minimum value problem of the above equation (5). Among them, the momentum term Δx p =[Δx p1 Δx p2 ... Δx pM ], and Δx pf is the f-th column vector of the momentum term Δx p . The momentum term ΔY M =[Δy 1 Δy 2 ... Δy M ], and Δy f is the f-th column vector of the momentum term ΔY M.
603、第一AP向第一网络中的除第一AP之外的其他AP广播该第二矩阵Y M603. The first AP broadcasts the second matrix Y M to other APs in the first network except the first AP.
第一AP执行步骤a和步骤b的初始化过程后,第一AP周期性地向其他AP广播该第二矩阵Y M,该第一网络中的其他AP也周期性广播该其他AP上的第二矩阵Y MAfter the first AP performs the initialization process of steps a and b, the first AP periodically broadcasts the second matrix Y M to other APs, and other APs in the first network also periodically broadcast the second matrix Y M on the other APs. matrix Y M .
具体的,第一AP可以通过第一广播消息广播该第二矩阵Y M,该第一广播消息携带该第二矩阵Y M、第一标识和分组轮次编号。 Specifically, the first AP may broadcast the second matrix Y M through a first broadcast message, where the first broadcast message carries the second matrix Y M , the first identifier and the grouping round number.
该第一标识用于该第一广播消息为用于随机梯度下降处理的广播消息。该分组轮次编号用于标识第一AP当前执行分组的轮次编号,即该第一AP当前对第一AP和第一STA进行分组的次数。当第一AP接收到分组轮次编号更高的第一广播消息时,则第一AP结束该分组轮次编号对应的随机梯度下降的执行操作,并进入下一轮次的随机梯度下降过程。The first identifier is used when the first broadcast message is a broadcast message for stochastic gradient descent processing. The grouping round number is used to identify the round number of the current grouping performed by the first AP, that is, the number of times the first AP currently groups the first AP and the first STA. When the first AP receives the first broadcast message with a higher grouping round number, the first AP ends the execution operation of the stochastic gradient descent corresponding to the grouping round number, and enters the next round of the stochastic gradient descent process.
例如,如图6B所示,该第一广播消息的有效负载的第一个比特用于标识该第一广播消息为用于随机梯度下降处理的广播消息。例如,该第一个比特为“0”时,代表该第一广播消息用于随机梯度下降处理。该第一广播消息的有效负载的第一个字节除该第一个比特之外的其余7个比特用于标识分组轮次编号,用于标识第一AP当前分组的轮次编号。该第二矩阵Y M则携带在该第一广播消息中的有效负载中除第一个字节之外的其余字节上。 For example, as shown in FIG. 6B , the first bit of the payload of the first broadcast message is used to identify the first broadcast message as a broadcast message for stochastic gradient descent processing. For example, when the first bit is "0", it represents that the first broadcast message is used for stochastic gradient descent processing. In addition to the first bit, the remaining 7 bits of the first byte of the payload of the first broadcast message are used to identify the round number of the packet, and are used to identify the round number of the current packet of the first AP. The second matrix Y M is carried on the remaining bytes except the first byte in the payload in the first broadcast message.
604、第一AP开启第一定时器。604. The first AP starts a first timer.
其中,该第一定时器用于第一AP在第一定时器的时长内监听该第一网络中的其他AP广播的第二矩阵Y MThe first timer is used for the first AP to monitor the second matrix Y M broadcast by other APs in the first network within the duration of the first timer.
605、第一AP判断第一中断的中断类型,若第一中断是由于第一AP接收到其他AP发送第二矩阵Y M发生的中断,则执行步骤606;若第一中断是由于第一定时器超时或中断而发生的中断,则第一AP返回步骤604,第一AP重启第一定时器。 605. The first AP determines the interruption type of the first interruption. If the first interruption is caused by the first AP receiving an interruption that occurs when other APs send the second matrix Y M , perform step 606; if the first interruption is due to the first timing If the timer expires or is interrupted, the first AP returns to step 604, and the first AP restarts the first timer.
当第一AP发生第一中断时,第一AP判断第一中断的中断类型,若是由于第一AP接收到其他AP发送第二矩阵Y M而发生的中断,则执行步骤606;若是由于第一定时器超时或中断而发生的中断,则第一AP返回步骤604,第一AP,继续接收监听第一网络中的其他AP发送的第二矩阵Y MWhen the first interruption occurs to the first AP, the first AP determines the interruption type of the first interruption. If the timer expires or is interrupted, the first AP returns to step 604, where the first AP continues to receive and monitor the second matrix Y M sent by other APs in the first network.
606、第一AP根据随机梯度下降规则更新第一矩阵X M的第p个行向量x p和第二矩阵Y M606. The first AP updates the p-th row vector x p of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M according to the stochastic gradient descent rule.
下面结合步骤1至步骤3介绍步骤606。Step 606 is described below in conjunction with steps 1 to 3.
步骤1:第一AP计算该第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000087
Step 1: The first AP calculates the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000087
由上述图5A所示的实施例中的步骤502c已知第一中间矩阵
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000088
的前K个主对角线元素,即
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000089
的全部主对角线上的元素,和第一中间矩阵D的第p+K个主对角线元素b p。那么可知,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000090
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000091
为一行乘以K列的矩阵,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000092
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000093
中第i列的元素。
The first intermediate matrix is known from step 502c in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A above
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000088
The first K main diagonal elements of , i.e.
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000089
All the elements on the main diagonal of , and the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D . Then it is known that
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000090
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000091
is a matrix with one row by K columns,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000092
for
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000093
The element in the i-th column of .
步骤2:第一AP保存接收到的其他AP发送第二矩阵Y MStep 2: The first AP stores the received second matrix Y M sent by other APs.
步骤3:第一AP根据该第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000094
和接收到的其他AP发送第二矩阵Y M更新该第一AP上的第一矩阵X M的第p行向量x p和第二矩阵Y M
Step 3: The first AP is based on the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000094
and the received other AP sends the second matrix Y M to update the p-th row vector x p and the second matrix Y M of the first matrix X M on the first AP.
下面结合步骤a至步骤d以更新该x p=[x p1 x p2 … x pM]中的首个元素x p1和Y M=[y 1 y 2 … y M]中的首个元素y 1的过程为例介绍步骤3。 Steps a to d are combined below to update the first element x p1 in x p =[x p1 x p2 ... x pM ] and the first element y 1 in Y M =[y 1 y 2 ... y M ] The procedure is used as an example to introduce step 3.
步骤a、该第一AP计算误差向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000095
Step a, the first AP calculates the error vector
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000095
步骤b、第一AP更新Δx p1和Δy 1,更新后的Δx p1=αΔx p1+ηey 1,更新后的Δy 1=αΔy 1+ηe Tx p1,α和η为常量参数,α为动量参数,η为学习率,e T为e的转置,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000096
为y 1的转置。
Step b. The first AP updates Δx p1 and Δy 1 , the updated Δx p1 =αΔx p1 +ηey 1 , the updated Δy 1 =αΔy 1 +ηe T x p1 , α and η are constant parameters, α is a momentum parameter , η is the learning rate, e T is the transpose of e,
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000096
is the transpose of y 1 .
步骤c、第一AP更新
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000097
得到更新后的
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000098
Step c, the first AP update
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000097
get updated
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000098
步骤d、第一AP更新x p1和y 1,得到更新后的x p1等于更新前的x p1加上更新后的Δx p1,更新后的y 1等于更新前的y 1加上更新后的Δy 1Step d, the first AP updates x p1 and y 1 , and the updated x p1 is equal to the pre-update x p1 plus the updated Δx p1 , and the updated y 1 is equal to the pre-update y 1 plus the updated Δy 1 .
对于该x p中的其他元素的更新过程与x p1的更新过程类似,对于Y M中的其他元素的更新 过程与y 1的更新过程类似,且需要说明的是,在计算误差向量e时,应当使用前一次更新得到的
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000099
计算该误差向量。前一次更新得到的
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000100
是指第一AP更新当前更新的元素的前一个元素得到的e。例如,上述步骤a至步骤d更新的是x p中的首个元素x p1和Y M中的首个元素y 1,则使用的是步骤606中的步骤1得到的
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000101
而若第一AP更新的是x p中的第二个元素x p2和Y M中的首个元素y 2,则第一AP计算误差向量时,则使用的是上述步骤c更新得到的
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000102
以此类推,这里不再一一说明。
The update process for other elements in x p is similar to the update process for x p1 , and the update process for other elements in Y M is similar to the update process for y 1 , and it should be noted that when calculating the error vector e, should use the one from the previous update
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000099
Calculate this error vector. from the previous update
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000100
Refers to the e obtained by the first AP updating the previous element of the currently updated element. For example, the above steps a to d update the first element x p1 in x p and the first element y 1 in Y M , then use the information obtained in step 1 in step 606
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000101
If the first AP updates the second element x p2 in x p and the first element y 2 in Y M , then when the first AP calculates the error vector, it uses the update obtained in the above step c.
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000102
By analogy, we will not describe them one by one here.
需要说明的是,第一AP执行完步骤606之后,第一AP可以重启第一定时器,继续监听第一网络中的其他AP广播的第一矩阵Y M,当监听到该其他AP发送的第二矩阵Y M时,第一AP执行与步骤606类似的操作,即再次更新在步骤606得到的第一矩阵X M的第p个行向量x p和第二矩阵Y M,以此类推,每次更新的过程都类似,直到该第一定时器的重启次数达到预设的次数,则第一AP确定最后一个更新得到的第一矩阵X M的第p个行向量x p和第二矩阵Y MIt should be noted that after the first AP completes step 606, the first AP can restart the first timer and continue to monitor the first matrix Y M broadcast by other APs in the first network. When there are two matrices Y M , the first AP performs operations similar to those in step 606 , that is, the p-th row vector x p and the second matrix Y M of the first matrix X M obtained in step 606 are updated again, and so on. The process of the second update is similar, until the number of restarts of the first timer reaches the preset number of times, then the first AP determines the p-th row vector x p and the second matrix Y of the first matrix X M obtained by the last update. M.
上述图5A所示的实施例中步骤502d中,第一AP根据聚类算法对目标行向量进行聚类,得到第二聚类结果。下面结合图7所示的实施例介绍该步骤502d。请参阅图7,图7为本申请实施例网络管理方法的另一个实施例示意图。在图7中,该方法包括:In step 502d in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 5A , the first AP performs clustering on the target row vector according to the clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result. The step 502d is described below with reference to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 . Please refer to FIG. 7 , which is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the network management method according to the embodiment of the present application. In Figure 7, the method includes:
701、第一AP根据第一随机种子生成第一聚类中心。701. The first AP generates a first cluster center according to a first random seed.
其中,该第一聚类中心包括该第一AP生成的该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,每个簇对应一个聚类中心,该多个簇中每个簇对应多个分组中的一个分组。The first cluster center includes the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters generated by the first AP, each cluster corresponds to a cluster center, and each cluster in the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups grouping.
具体的,第一网络中的所有AP都使第一随机种子生成多个簇对应的聚类中心。例如,第一AP根据第一随机种子随机生成该多个簇分别对应的第一聚类中心G={c 1,c 2,c 3,c 4……c N},c b为第b个簇对应的聚类中心,b为大于或等于1且小于或等于N的整数。即得到随机初始化的该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,簇G b对应聚类中心c bSpecifically, all APs in the first network make the first random seed generate cluster centers corresponding to multiple clusters. For example, the first AP randomly generates the first cluster centers G={c 1 , c 2 , c 3 , c 4 ...... c N } corresponding to the multiple clusters according to the first random seed, and c b is the b-th The cluster center corresponding to the cluster, b is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to N. That is, the randomly initialized cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters are obtained respectively, and the cluster G b corresponds to the cluster center c b .
需要说明的是,该第一随机种子可以是预配置的,也可以是该第一网络中的一个AP(例如,主AP)生成的,再由该AP发送给该第一网络中的其他AP,具体本申请不做限定。It should be noted that the first random seed may be pre-configured, or may be generated by an AP (for example, a master AP) in the first network, and then sent by the AP to other APs in the first network , which is not specifically limited in this application.
702、第一AP根据第一聚类中心确定目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇,得到多个簇中每个簇包括的行向量。702. The first AP determines, according to the first cluster center, a cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs, and obtains a row vector included in each of the multiple clusters.
具体的,第一AP为该目标行向量中的每个行向量查找与该每个行向量最近的聚类中心,并将该每个行向量划分到该聚类中心对应的簇中。例如,第一AP从第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000103
和该第六中间矩阵Q的第K+p个行向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000104
中选择目标行向量,这里将目标行向量称为
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000105
第一AP为该
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000106
中包括的行向量分别寻找与每个行向量最接近的 聚类中心对应的簇。
Specifically, the first AP searches for a cluster center closest to each row vector for each row vector in the target row vector, and divides each row vector into a cluster corresponding to the cluster center. For example, the first AP from the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000103
and the K+pth row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000104
Select the target row vector in , here the target row vector is called
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000105
The first AP is the
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000106
The row vectors included in find the cluster corresponding to the closest cluster center for each row vector, respectively.
需要说明的是,第一AP使用该目标行向量中的每一个行向量的全部或部分作为代表该行向量进行聚类。也就是说第一AP可以选择每个行向量的部分内容代表该行向量进行聚类。It should be noted that the first AP uses all or part of each row vector in the target row vector as a representative row vector for clustering. That is to say, the first AP can select part of the content of each row vector to represent the row vector for clustering.
在上述步骤701和步骤702的基础上,上述图5A所示的实施例中的步骤502e具体包括:On the basis of the above steps 701 and 702, step 502e in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A specifically includes:
当满足第一预设条件时,第一AP根据多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点。When the first preset condition is satisfied, the first AP determines the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
具体的,当满足第一预设条件时,第一AP将多个簇的行向量中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。Specifically, when the first preset condition is satisfied, the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the row vectors of the multiple clusters into the same group.
其中,该第一预设条件有多种,下面示出两种可能的实现方式。There are many kinds of the first preset condition, and two possible implementation manners are shown below.
实现方式一:第一预设条件包括该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心的更新次数大于或等于第三预设阈值。Implementation mode 1: The first preset condition includes that the update times of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters are greater than or equal to a third preset threshold.
具体的,第一AP判断该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心的更新次数是否大于或等于该第三预设阈值,如果是,则第一AP根据多个簇的行向量确定该多个分组分别包括的网络节点;如果不是,则执行下述步骤512至步骤514。Specifically, the first AP determines whether the update times of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters are greater than or equal to the third preset threshold, and if so, the first AP determines the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters The network nodes included respectively; if not, the following steps 512 to 514 are performed.
例如,该第三预设阈值为100。该第三预设阈值主要是根据实验数据确定的,即上述聚类过程达到收敛程度时该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心的更新次数。For example, the third preset threshold is 100. The third preset threshold is mainly determined according to experimental data, that is, the update times of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively when the above-mentioned clustering process reaches a degree of convergence.
实现方式二:下面结合步骤1至步骤4介绍该第一预设条件包括:第一收敛精度小于或等于预设的收敛精度。Implementation mode 2: The first preset condition is described below in conjunction with steps 1 to 4, including: the first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy.
该第一收敛精度为第一差值的绝对值与所述第一全局误差的比值。The first convergence accuracy is the ratio of the absolute value of the first difference to the first global error.
第一差值为第一全局误差与预设的初始化误差之间的差值。The first difference is the difference between the first global error and a preset initialization error.
该第一全局误差为该第一网络中的所有AP分别计算得到的第一局部误差的和。The first global error is the sum of the first local errors respectively calculated by all APs in the first network.
该第一AP的第一局部误差包括该第一AP确定的该多个簇每个簇对应的误差的和,该每个簇对应的误差为该每个簇包括的行向量分别与该每个簇对应的第一平均向量之间的误差的和,该每个簇对应的第一平均向量为该第一AP根据流言协议(gossip protocol)计算得到的。The first local error of the first AP includes the sum of the errors corresponding to each cluster of the plurality of clusters determined by the first AP, and the error corresponding to each cluster is the row vector included in each cluster and each cluster respectively. The sum of errors between the first average vectors corresponding to the clusters, where the first average vector corresponding to each cluster is calculated by the first AP according to a gossip protocol.
那么,当该第一AP确定该第一收敛精度小于小于或等于预设的收敛精度时,第一AP执行上述步骤502e。Then, when the first AP determines that the first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy, the first AP executes the foregoing step 502e.
例如,初始化误差为ε,第一全局误差为
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000107
预设的收敛精度为τ;那么第一AP判断是否满足
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000108
若是,则执行步骤502e;若否,则执行下述步骤512至步骤514。
For example, the initialization error is ε and the first global error is
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000107
The preset convergence accuracy is τ; then the first AP judges whether it satisfies the
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000108
If yes, go to step 502e; if not, go to the following steps 512 to 514.
例如,该预设的收敛精度为0.01,该预设的初始化误差为无穷大。For example, the preset convergence accuracy is 0.01, and the preset initialization error is infinite.
该预设的收敛精度是根据实验数据和经验确定的。即上述聚类过程达到收敛程度时,该预设的收敛精度的取值。The preset convergence accuracy is determined based on experimental data and experience. That is, when the above-mentioned clustering process reaches the degree of convergence, the value of the preset convergence precision.
可选的,该预设的收敛精度为第一AP设置的,也可以是通信协议规定的,或者是其他设备发送给第一AP的,具体本申请不做限定。Optionally, the preset convergence precision is set by the first AP, or may be specified by a communication protocol, or sent to the first AP by other devices, which is not specifically limited in this application.
下面结合步骤1至步骤3介绍该第一收敛精度的计算过程。The calculation process of the first convergence accuracy is described below with reference to steps 1 to 3.
步骤1:第一AP根据gossip协议(也称为流行病协议(epidemic protocol)、或流言算法、疫情传播算法)计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第一平均向量;Step 1: the first AP calculates the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol (also called epidemic protocol (epidemic protocol), or rumor algorithm, epidemic propagation algorithm);
具体的,第一AP计算该第一AP确定的多个簇分别包括的网络节点个数size b和多个簇分别包括的行向量之和sum b,b为大于或等于1且小于或等于N的整数,N为多个分组的分组数目。然后,第一AP使用gossip协议计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量分别对应的第一平均向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000109
若第一AP为第p个AP,第一网络中的每个AP都分别存储局部变量Δ p1和局部的控制参数ω p1。第一AP设置第一AP上的Δ p1={sum 1,sum 2......sum N},即该多个簇分别包括的行向量的总和。第一AP设置第一AP上的ω p1={size 1,size 2......size N},即该多个簇分别包括的行向量的个数。然后,第一AP使用gossip协议计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量分别对应的第一平均向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000110
Specifically, the first AP calculates the number of network nodes size b included in the multiple clusters determined by the first AP and the sum b of the row vectors included in the multiple clusters respectively, where b is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to N Integer, N is the number of groups of multiple groups. Then, the first AP uses the gossip protocol to calculate the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters respectively
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000109
If the first AP is the pth AP, each AP in the first network stores the local variable Δ p1 and the local control parameter ω p1 respectively. The first AP sets Δ p1 ={sum 1 , sum 2 ...... sum N } on the first AP, that is, the sum of the row vectors respectively included in the multiple clusters. The first AP sets ω p1 ={size 1 , size 2 ...... size N } on the first AP, that is, the number of row vectors respectively included in the multiple clusters. Then, the first AP uses the gossip protocol to calculate the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters respectively
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000110
需要说明的是,第一AP使用gossip协议的相关介绍请参阅后文图8A所示的实施例的相关介绍。It should be noted that, for the related introduction of the first AP using the gossip protocol, please refer to the related introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A later.
步骤2:第一AP计算第一局部误差。Step 2: The first AP calculates the first local error.
具体的,第一AP根据上述步骤702得到的该多个簇分别包括的行向量和该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第一平均向量计算第一局部误差。Specifically, the first AP calculates the first local error according to the row vectors respectively included in the multiple clusters obtained in step 702 and the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters.
其中,该第一局部误差包括该第一AP确定的该多个簇中每个簇对应的误差的和。该每个簇对应的误差为该每个簇包括的行向量分别与该每个簇对应的第一平均向量之间的误差的和。Wherein, the first local error includes a sum of errors corresponding to each of the multiple clusters determined by the first AP. The error corresponding to each cluster is the sum of errors between the row vector included in each cluster and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster.
例如,该第一局部误差
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000111
该第一局部误差表示该第一AP中的多个簇分别对应的均方根误差的和。
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000112
表示该多个簇中的第b个簇中的行向量,c b表示该第b个簇对应的聚类中心。
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000113
表示该第b个簇的行向量分别与该第b个簇对应的聚类中心的均方根误差的和。
For example, the first local error
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000111
The first local error represents the sum of root mean square errors corresponding to a plurality of clusters in the first AP respectively.
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000112
represents the row vector in the bth cluster among the multiple clusters, and c b represents the cluster center corresponding to the bth cluster.
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000113
It represents the sum of the root mean square errors of the row vector of the bth cluster and the cluster center corresponding to the bth cluster.
步骤3:第一AP根据gossip协议和该第一局部误差计算第一全局误差。Step 3: The first AP calculates the first global error according to the gossip protocol and the first local error.
其中,第一全局误差为第一网络中的所有AP分别计算得到的第一局部误差的和。The first global error is the sum of the first local errors calculated respectively by all APs in the first network.
具体的,若第一AP为第p个AP,第一网络中的每个AP分别存储局部变量Δ p2和局部的控制参数ω p2。该第一AP上的Δ p2设置为该第一AP中多个簇内分别对应的均方根误差的和,将第一AP上的ω p2设置为1,其他AP上的局部的控制参数为0。然后,第一AP使用gossip协议和该第一局部误差计算得到第一全局误差,即得到第一网络中的所有AP计算的第一局部误差的总和。 Specifically, if the first AP is the p-th AP, each AP in the first network stores the local variable Δ p2 and the local control parameter ω p2 respectively. Δ p2 on the first AP is set to the sum of the corresponding root mean square errors in multiple clusters in the first AP, ω p2 on the first AP is set to 1, and the local control parameters on other APs are 0. Then, the first AP uses the gossip protocol and the first local error to calculate the first global error, that is, the sum of the first local errors calculated by all APs in the first network is obtained.
本实施例中,第一网络的其他AP计算该第一局部误差与步骤2中第一AP计算第一AP上的第一局部误差的方式类似,这里不再赘述。每个AP在计算该每个AP的第一局部误差时,都是由该每个AP最近一次对多个簇的行向量进行聚类的聚类结果与前一次对多个簇的行向量进行聚类的聚类结果计算得到的。而第一网络的其他AP发送第一局部误差的时刻可以不同或相同。例如,AP1在时刻1向第一AP发送AP1的第一局部误差,即AP1应当选择 离时刻1最近一次对多个簇的行向量进行聚类的聚类结果与前一次对多个簇的行向量进行聚类的聚类结果计算AP1的第一全局误差。而AP2在时刻2向第一AP发送AP2的第一局部误差,即AP2应当选择离时刻2最近一次对多个簇的行向量进行聚类的聚类结果与前一次对多个簇的行向量进行聚类的聚类结果计算该AP2的第一全局误差。对于第一网络的其他AP同样类似,这里不再一一说明。In this embodiment, the calculation of the first local error by other APs of the first network is similar to the manner in which the first AP calculates the first local error on the first AP in step 2, and details are not repeated here. When each AP calculates the first local error of each AP, the clustering result of each AP's most recent clustering of the row vectors of multiple clusters and the previous clustering results of the row vectors of multiple clusters The clustering result of clustering is calculated. The moments at which other APs of the first network send the first local error may be different or the same. For example, AP1 sends the first local error of AP1 to the first AP at time 1, that is, AP1 should select the clustering result of clustering the row vectors of multiple clusters most recently from time 1 and the previous row vector of multiple clusters. The first global error of AP1 is calculated based on the clustering result of the vector clustering. AP2 sends the first local error of AP2 to the first AP at time 2, that is, AP2 should select the clustering result of clustering the row vectors of multiple clusters most recently from time 2 and the previous row vector of multiple clusters. The first global error of the AP2 is calculated from the clustering result of the clustering. The same is true for other APs of the first network, and will not be described one by one here.
需要说明的是,步骤3与后文中图8A所示的步骤801至步骤811中第一AP使用gossip协议确定该多个簇中每个簇的行向量分别对应的第一平均向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000114
类似,不同的地方在于第一AP将局部变量Δ p2设置为该第一AP中多个簇内分别对应的均方根误差的和,将ω p2设置为1,这样通过类似后文图8A所示的步骤801至步骤811的执行流程可以得到第一网络中的所有AP计算的第一局部误差的总和。
It should be noted that, in step 3 and steps 801 to 811 shown in FIG. 8A below, the first AP uses the gossip protocol to determine the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters respectively.
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000114
Similarly, the difference is that the first AP sets the local variable Δ p2 to the sum of the root mean square errors corresponding to the multiple clusters in the first AP, and sets ω p2 to 1, so that by similar to what is shown in FIG. 8A later The execution flow of steps 801 to 811 shown in the figure can obtain the sum of the first local errors calculated by all APs in the first network.
步骤4:第一AP根据该第一全局误差和预设的初始化误差计算该第一收敛精度。Step 4: The first AP calculates the first convergence accuracy according to the first global error and the preset initialization error.
其中,第一收敛精度等于第一差值与第一全局误差的商的绝对值,该第一差值为该第一全局误差与该初始化误差的差值。The first convergence accuracy is equal to the absolute value of the quotient of the first difference and the first global error, and the first difference is the difference between the first global error and the initialization error.
一种可能的实现方式中,若不满足第一预设条件,则上述图5A所示的实施例还包括步骤512至步骤514。In a possible implementation manner, if the first preset condition is not satisfied, the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 5A further includes steps 512 to 514 .
步骤512:第一AP根据gossip协议计算该多个簇的行向量对应的第一平均向量;Step 512: the first AP calculates the first average vector corresponding to the row vectors of the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol;
步骤512与前述第一预设条件中的实现方式二的步骤1类似,具体请参阅前述第一预设条件中的实现方式二的步骤1的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。Step 512 is similar to step 1 of implementation manner 2 in the foregoing first preset condition. For details, please refer to the relevant introduction of step 1 of implementation manner 2 in the foregoing first preset condition, which will not be repeated here.
步骤513:第一AP将该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第一平均向量分别作为该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,得到第二聚类中心;Step 513: The first AP takes the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters as the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively, and obtains the second cluster center;
步骤514:第一AP根据第二聚类中心确定该目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇;Step 514: the first AP determines the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs according to the second cluster center;
步骤513至步骤514与前述图7所示的实施例中步骤701和步骤702类似,具体请参阅前述图7所示的实施例中步骤701和步骤702的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。Steps 513 to 514 are similar to steps 701 and 702 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 . For details, please refer to the related introductions of steps 701 and 702 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 , which will not be repeated here.
步骤515:当满足第二预设条件时,该第一AP将该多个簇中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。Step 515: When the second preset condition is satisfied, the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
步骤515与前述步骤502e的相关介绍类似,具体请参阅前述步骤502e的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。Step 515 is similar to the related introduction of the foregoing step 502e. For details, please refer to the related introduction of the foregoing step 502e, which will not be repeated here.
该第二预设条件与第一预设条件类似,下面示出两种可能的实现方式。The second preset condition is similar to the first preset condition, and two possible implementation manners are shown below.
实现方式一:该第二预设条件包括该多个簇分别对应的聚类中心的更新次数大于或等于第三预设阈值。Implementation mode 1: The second preset condition includes that the update times of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters are greater than or equal to the third preset threshold.
其中,第三预设阈值的相关介绍请参阅前述第一预设条件的实现方式一中的对第三预设阈值的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。For the related introduction of the third preset threshold, please refer to the related introduction to the third preset threshold in the first implementation manner of the first preset condition, which will not be repeated here.
例如,步骤512至步骤515为第一AP对多个簇分别对应的聚类中心的首次更新。因此,若该第三预设阈值为1,则第一AP执行步骤515;若该第三预设阈值为大于1的整数,则第二AP对该目标行向量进行第三次聚类,具体的聚类过程与前述步骤512至步骤515类似。For example, steps 512 to 515 are the first update of the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters by the first AP. Therefore, if the third preset threshold is 1, the first AP executes step 515; if the third preset threshold is an integer greater than 1, the second AP performs the third clustering on the target row vector, specifically The clustering process is similar to the aforementioned steps 512 to 515 .
实现方式二:该第二预设条件包括:第二收敛精度小于或等于预设的收敛精度,该第二收敛精度为第二全局误差与第一全局误差之间的差值的绝对值与该第二全局误差的比值。Implementation mode 2: The second preset condition includes: the second convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy, and the second convergence accuracy is the absolute value of the difference between the second global error and the first global error and the The ratio of the second global error.
那么,当该第一AP确定该第二收敛精度小于小于或等于预设的收敛精度时,第一AP 执行上述步骤515。Then, when the first AP determines that the second convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy, the first AP executes the foregoing step 515 .
下面结合步骤a值步骤d介绍第二收敛精度的计算过程。The calculation process of the second convergence accuracy is described below in conjunction with step a and step d.
步骤a:第一AP根据gossip协议计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第二平均向量;Step a: the first AP calculates the second average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol;
具体的,由上述步骤513和步骤514可知,该多个簇中每个簇的行向量再次进行了更新,那么第一AP使用gossip协议计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第二平均向量。具体的计算方式与前述第一预设条件中的实现方式二中的步骤1类似,具体此处不再赘述。Specifically, it can be seen from the above steps 513 and 514 that the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters is updated again, then the first AP uses the gossip protocol to calculate the first AP corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters. Two mean vectors. The specific calculation method is similar to step 1 in the second implementation mode in the foregoing first preset condition, and details are not repeated here.
步骤b:第一AP计算第二局部误差。Step b: The first AP calculates the second local error.
第一AP根据上述步骤514得到的该多个簇分别包括的行向量和该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第二平均向量。The first AP obtains the row vectors respectively included in the multiple clusters according to the above step 514 and the second average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters.
步骤c:第一AP根据gossip协议和该第二局部误差计算第二全局误差。Step c: The first AP calculates the second global error according to the gossip protocol and the second local error.
步骤b至步骤c与前述第一预设条件中的实现方式二中的步骤2至步骤3类似,请参阅前述第一预设条件中的实现方式二中的步骤2至步骤3的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。Steps b to c are similar to steps 2 to 3 in implementation mode 2 in the aforementioned first preset condition, please refer to the relevant introduction of steps 2 to 3 in implementation mode 2 in the aforementioned first preset condition, I won't go into details here.
步骤d:第一AP根据第二全局误差和第一全局误差计算第二收敛精度。Step d: The first AP calculates the second convergence accuracy according to the second global error and the first global error.
其中,第二收敛精度等于第二差值的绝对值与第二全局误差的商的比值,第二差值为第二全局误差与第一全局误差的差值。The second convergence accuracy is equal to the ratio of the absolute value of the second difference to the quotient of the second global error, and the second difference is the difference between the second global error and the first global error.
具体的,由于步骤512至步骤515为目标行向量的第二次聚类,因此第二全局误差应当与前一次聚类(即第一次聚类)的计算得到的第一全局误差进行比对,也就是说前述步骤502e中的初始化误差更新为该第一全局误差。若第一AP需要对该目标行向量进行第三次聚类,则该初始化误差更新为该第二全局误差,以此类推。Specifically, since steps 512 to 515 are the second clustering of the target row vector, the second global error should be compared with the first global error obtained by the calculation of the previous clustering (ie, the first clustering). , that is to say, the initialization error in the foregoing step 502e is updated to the first global error. If the first AP needs to perform the third clustering on the target row vector, the initialization error is updated to the second global error, and so on.
因此,当第二差值与第二全局误差的商的绝对值小于或等于预设的收敛精度时,第一AP执行步骤515。当第二差值与第二全局误差的商的绝对值大于预设的收敛精度时,则第一AP继续对目标行向量的第三次聚类,具体的聚类过程与前述步骤512至步骤515类似。Therefore, when the absolute value of the quotient of the second difference and the second global error is less than or equal to the preset convergence precision, the first AP executes step 515 . When the absolute value of the quotient of the second difference and the second global error is greater than the preset convergence precision, the first AP continues to cluster the target row vector for the third time. 515 is similar.
下面结合图8A所示的实施例介绍第一AP根据gossip协议计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第一平均向量的过程。请参阅图8A,图8A为本申请实施例网络管理方法的另一个实施例。在图8A中,该网络管理方法包括:The process of calculating the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters by the first AP according to the gossip protocol will be described below with reference to the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A . Please refer to FIG. 8A , FIG. 8A is another embodiment of the network management method according to the embodiment of the present application. In Figure 8A, the network management method includes:
801、第一AP设置局部变量Δ p1和局部的控制参数ω p1801. The first AP sets a local variable Δ p1 and a local control parameter ω p1 .
第一网络中的每个AP分别存储有局部变量Δ p1和局部的控制参数ω p1。第一AP设置Δ p1={sum 1,sum 2......sum N},即该多个簇分别包括的行向量的总和,设置ω p1={size 1,size 2......size N},即该多个簇分别包括的行向量的个数。第一AP计算该第一AP的Δ p1和ω p1Each AP in the first network stores a local variable Δ p1 and a local control parameter ω p1 , respectively. The first AP sets Δ p1 ={sum 1 , sum 2 ......sum N }, that is, the sum of the row vectors respectively included in the multiple clusters, and sets ω p1 ={size 1 , size 2 ....... ..size N }, that is, the number of row vectors included in the multiple clusters. The first AP calculates Δ p1 and ω p1 for the first AP.
802、第一AP确定第一节点缓存集合。802. The first AP determines a first node cache set.
其中,该第一节点缓存集合包括该第一AP从第一网络中与该第一AP直连的AP中选择的I max个AP组成的集合,I max为大于或等于1的整数。 The first node cache set includes a set consisting of I max APs selected by the first AP from APs directly connected to the first AP in the first network, where I max is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
该I max的大小与该第一AP的缓存大小或存储空间大小相关。例如,第一AP的存储空间越大,则I max越大。 The size of the I max is related to the cache size or storage space size of the first AP. For example, the larger the storage space of the first AP, the larger the I max .
803、第一AP从第一节点缓存集合中选择目标节点。803. The first AP selects a target node from the first node cache set.
804、第一AP确定第一AP的Δ p1/2、ω p1/2和r1。 804. The first AP determines Δ p1 /2, ω p1 /2 and r1 of the first AP.
其中,r1用于指示第一AP是否首次与目标节点之间交换该Δ p1和ω p1。例如,r1为1时,指示该第一AP首次与目标节点之间交换该Δ p1和ω p1。r1为0时,指示该第一AP非首次与目标节点之间交换该Δ p1和ω p1Wherein, r1 is used to indicate whether the first AP exchanges the Δ p1 and ω p1 with the target node for the first time. For example, when r1 is 1, it indicates that the first AP exchanges the Δ p1 and ω p1 with the target node for the first time. When r1 is 0, it indicates that Δ p1 and ω p1 are not exchanged between the first AP and the target node for the first time.
805、第一AP向目标节点发送第二广播消息。805. The first AP sends a second broadcast message to the target node.
其中,该第二广播消息携带该分组轮次编号、Δ p1/2、ω p1/2和r1。该分组轮次编号的相关介绍请参阅前述图6A所示的实施例中的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。 Wherein, the second broadcast message carries the grouping round number, Δ p1 /2, ω p1 /2 and r1. For the related introduction of the grouping round number, please refer to the related introduction in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6A , which will not be repeated here.
例如,如图8B所示,该第二广播消息中携带分组轮次编号、Δ p1/2、ω p1/2、r1和第一缓存集合包括的节点的标识。 For example, as shown in FIG. 8B , the second broadcast message carries the packet round number, Δ p1 /2, ω p1 /2, r1 and the identifiers of the nodes included in the first cache set.
需要说明的是,图8B所示的第二广播消息为该第一AP首次向目标节点首次发送的广播消息,因此该第二广播消息携带Δ p1/2、ω p1/2以及r1为1;若第一AP非首次向该目标节点发送该第二广播消息,则该第二广播消息应当携带的为第一AP当前更新后得到的Δ p1、ω p1和r1=0。例如,第一AP第二次向目标节点发送第二广播消息时,该第一AP上的更新后的Δ p1和ω p1为:第一AP将步骤801中的Δ p1/2作为第一AP上更新后的Δ p1,将步骤801中的ω p1/2作为第一AP上更新后的ω p1。然后,第一AP在第二次向该目标节点发送的第二广播消息中携带第一AP上的更新后的Δ p1、ω p1和r1=0。 It should be noted that the second broadcast message shown in FIG. 8B is the first broadcast message sent by the first AP to the target node for the first time, so the second broadcast message carries Δ p1 /2, ω p1 /2, and r1 is 1; If it is not the first time that the first AP sends the second broadcast message to the target node, the second broadcast message should carry Δ p1 , ω p1 and r1=0 obtained after the current update of the first AP. For example, when the first AP sends the second broadcast message to the target node for the second time, the updated Δ p1 and ω p1 on the first AP are: the first AP uses Δ p1 /2 in step 801 as the first AP On the updated Δ p1 , use ω p1 /2 in step 801 as the updated ω p1 on the first AP. Then, the second broadcast message sent by the first AP to the target node for the second time carries the updated Δ p1 , ω p1 and r1=0 on the first AP.
806、第一AP开启第二定时器。806. The first AP starts a second timer.
其中,该第二定时器用于第一AP在第二定时器的时长内监听该第一网络中除该第一AP之外的其他AP发送的第二广播消息。Wherein, the second timer is used for the first AP to monitor the second broadcast messages sent by other APs in the first network except the first AP within the duration of the second timer.
807、第一AP判断第二中断的中断类型,若第二中断是由于第一AP接收到该第一网络中除该第一AP之外的其他AP发送的第二广播消息发生的中断,则执行步骤808;若第二中断是由于第二定时器超时或中断而发生的中断,则第一AP返回步骤806。807. The first AP determines the interruption type of the second interruption. If the second interruption is caused by the first AP receiving the second broadcast message sent by other APs in the first network except the first AP, then the interruption occurs. Step 808 is executed; if the second interruption occurs due to the timeout or interruption of the second timer, the first AP returns to step 806 .
如果第二中断是由于第二定时器超时或中断导致的,那么第一AP返回步骤806,即重启第二定时器,然后再执行步骤806至810。If the second interruption is caused by the timeout or interruption of the second timer, the first AP returns to step 806 , that is, restarts the second timer, and then executes steps 806 to 810 .
需要说明的是,若经过多次重启第二定时器仍未接收到目标节点的第二广播消息,则第一AP可以重新选择其他节点,然后按照类似步骤804至步骤810的过程执行该第一AP与选择的其他节点之间的信息交换。具体的,第一AP上可以配置针对选择的节点该第一AP重启第二定时器的次数,当达到该次数仍未该该节点发送的第二广播消息时,则第一AP选择其他节点,然后按照类似步骤804至步骤810的过程执行该第一AP与选择的其他节点之间的信息交换。It should be noted that, if the second broadcast message of the target node is still not received after restarting the second timer for many times, the first AP can re-select other nodes, and then execute the first AP according to the process similar to step 804 to step 810. Information exchange between the AP and selected other nodes. Specifically, the number of times the first AP restarts the second timer for the selected node can be configured on the first AP, and when the number of times is reached and the second broadcast message sent by the node has not been sent, the first AP selects other nodes, Then, the information exchange between the first AP and the selected other nodes is performed according to the process similar to step 804 to step 810 .
808、第一AP判断接收到该第一网络中除该第一AP之外的其他AP发送的第二广播消 息中的r1是否为1,若是,则执行步骤809至810;若否,则执行步骤810。808. The first AP determines whether r1 in the second broadcast message sent by other APs in the first network than the first AP is 1, and if so, execute steps 809 to 810; if not, execute steps 809 to 810 Step 810.
如果第一AP接收到该第一网络中除该第一AP之外的其他AP发送的第二广播消息,那么该第一AP判断该回复消息r1是否为1,如果是,则执行步骤809和810;如果不是,则执行步骤810。If the first AP receives the second broadcast message sent by other APs in the first network except the first AP, the first AP judges whether the reply message r1 is 1, and if so, executes step 809 and 810; if not, perform step 810.
809、第一AP向该第一节点发送该第一AP的更新前的Δ p1/2和ω p1/2。 809. The first AP sends the pre-update Δ p1 /2 and ω p1 /2 of the first AP to the first node.
其中,该第一节点为上述步骤807中在第二定时器内向该第一AP发送第二广播消息的节点。The first node is the node that sends the second broadcast message to the first AP within the second timer in the foregoing step 807 .
810、第一AP根据该第一网络的其他AP发送的第二广播消息更新Δ p1/2和ω p1/2。 810. The first AP updates Δ p1 /2 and ω p1 /2 according to the second broadcast message sent by other APs in the first network.
如果该第一节点发送的第二广播消息中的r1为1,则第一AP将第一AP上的Δ p1/2加上该第一节点发送的第二广播消息中携带的Δ p1/2,将该第一AP上的ω p1/2加上该第一节点发送的第二广播消息中携带的ω p1/2。 If r1 in the second broadcast message sent by the first node is 1, the first AP adds Δ p1 /2 on the first AP to Δ p1 /2 carried in the second broadcast message sent by the first node , add ω p1 /2 on the first AP to the ω p1 /2 carried in the second broadcast message sent by the first node.
如果第一节点发送的的第二广播消息中的r1为0,则第一AP不需要执行上述步骤809,第一AP上的Δ p1/2加上该第一节点发送的第二广播消息中携带的Δ p1/2,将该第一AP上的ω p1/2加上该第一节点发送的第二广播消息中携带的ω p1/2。 If r1 in the second broadcast message sent by the first node is 0, the first AP does not need to perform the above step 809, and Δ p1 /2 on the first AP is added to the second broadcast message sent by the first node. The Δ p1 /2 carried is ω p1 /2 on the first AP plus ω p1 /2 carried in the second broadcast message sent by the first node.
811、第一AP更新该第一节点缓存集合。811. The first AP updates the first node cache set.
具体的,第一AP从该第一节点发送的第二广播消息携带的第二节点缓存集合、该第一节点和该第一节点缓存集合中选择I max个AP作为该第一节点缓存集合中包括的AP。 Specifically, the first AP selects I max APs from the second node cache set carried in the second broadcast message sent by the first node, the first node and the first node cache set as the first node cache set Included AP.
上述示出了针对第一AP与目标节点之间的执行gossip协议的过程,实现第一AP与目标节点之间的Δ p1和ω p1的交换。那么针对该第一节点缓存集合中的其他节点也类似,第一AP执行与上述步骤803至步骤811的过程,实现该第一AP与该第一节点缓存集合中的所有节点的之间的Δ p1和ω p1的交换,从而得到该第一AP使用gossip协议计算该多个簇中每个簇的行向量分别对应的第一平均向量
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000115
The above shows the process of executing the gossip protocol between the first AP and the target node, realizing the exchange of Δ p1 and ω p1 between the first AP and the target node. Then, similarly for other nodes in the first node cache set, the first AP performs the process of the above steps 803 to 811 to realize the Δ between the first AP and all nodes in the first node cache set The exchange of p1 and ω p1 , so as to obtain the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters calculated by the first AP using the gossip protocol
Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-000115
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,请参阅图9,本申请实施例中通信装置900的另一个结构示意图,该通信装置900可以用于执行图3所示实施例中第一通信装置执行的步骤、图4A所示的实施例中的服务器执行的步骤,以及图5A所示的实施例中的第一AP执行的步骤,可以参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述。An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication apparatus. Please refer to FIG. 9 , which is another schematic structural diagram of the communication apparatus 900 in the embodiment of the present application. The communication apparatus 900 may be used to execute the first communication apparatus in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 . , the steps performed by the server in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , and the steps performed by the first AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A may refer to the relevant descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
该通信装置900包括:处理器901、存储器902和收发器903。The communication device 900 includes: a processor 901 , a memory 902 and a transceiver 903 .
该处理器901、存储器902和收发器903分别通过总线相连,该存储器中存储有计算机指令。The processor 901, the memory 902 and the transceiver 903 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
一种可能的实现方式中,当该通信装置900用于执行图4A所示的实施例中的服务器执行的步骤时,前述图1B中的分组模块102具体可以是本实施例中的处理器901,因此该处理器901的具体实现不再赘述。前述图1B中的收发模块101则具体可以是本实施例中的收发器903, 因此收发器903的具体实现不再赘述。In a possible implementation manner, when the communication apparatus 900 is configured to perform the steps performed by the server in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A , the grouping module 102 in the foregoing FIG. 1B may specifically be the processor 901 in this embodiment. , so the specific implementation of the processor 901 is not repeated here. The transceiver module 101 in the aforementioned FIG. 1B may specifically be the transceiver 903 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 903 will not be described again.
另一种可能的实现方式中,当该通信装置900用于执行图5A所示的实施例中的第一AP执行的步骤时,前述图2B中的分组模块202、分组管理模块203和信号测量模块204可以是本实施例中的处理器901,因此该处理器901的具体实现不再赘述。前述图1B中的收发模块201则具体可以是本实施例中的收发器903,因此收发器903的具体实现不再赘述。In another possible implementation manner, when the communication apparatus 900 is used to perform the steps performed by the first AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A , the grouping module 202 , the grouping management module 203 and the signal measurement in the aforementioned FIG. 2B The module 204 may be the processor 901 in this embodiment, so the specific implementation of the processor 901 will not be described again. The transceiver module 201 in the aforementioned FIG. 1B may specifically be the transceiver 903 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 903 will not be described again.
本申请实施例还提供一种控制设备,请参阅图10,本申请实施例中控制设备1000的另一个结构示意图,该控制设备1000可以用于执行图4A所示的实施例中的控制设备执行的步骤,可以参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述。An embodiment of the present application further provides a control device. Please refer to FIG. 10 , which is another schematic structural diagram of the control device 1000 in the embodiment of the present application. The control device 1000 can be used to execute the control device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A . For the steps, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
该控制设备1000包括:处理器1001、存储器1002和收发器1003。The control device 1000 includes: a processor 1001 , a memory 1002 and a transceiver 1003 .
该处理器1001、存储器1002和收发器1003分别通过总线相连,该存储器中存储有计算机指令。The processor 1001, the memory 1002 and the transceiver 1003 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
前述图1C中的分组管理模块104具体可以是本实施例中的处理器1001,因此该处理器1001的具体实现不再赘述。前述图1C中的收发模块103则具体可以是本实施例中的收发器1003,因此收发器1003的具体实现不再赘述。The aforementioned grouping management module 104 in FIG. 1C may specifically be the processor 1001 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the processor 1001 will not be described again. The transceiver module 103 in the aforementioned FIG. 1C may specifically be the transceiver 1003 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 1003 will not be described again.
本申请实施例还提供一种第二AP,请参阅图11,本申请实施例中第二AP1100的另一个结构示意图,该第二AP1100可以用于执行图4A所示的实施例中的第二AP执行的步骤,可以参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述。This embodiment of the present application further provides a second AP. Please refer to FIG. 11 , which is another schematic structural diagram of the second AP 1100 in the embodiment of the present application. The second AP 1100 may be used to execute the second AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A . For the steps performed by the AP, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
该第二AP1100包括:处理器1101、存储器1102和收发器1103。The second AP 1100 includes: a processor 1101 , a memory 1102 and a transceiver 1103 .
该处理器1101、存储器1102和收发器1103分别通过总线相连,该存储器中存储有计算机指令。The processor 1101, the memory 1102 and the transceiver 1103 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
前述图1D中的分组管理模块106和信号测量模块107具体可以是本实施例中的处理器1101,因此该处理器1101的具体实现不再赘述。前述图1D中的收发模块105则具体可以是本实施例中的收发器1103,因此收发器1103的具体实现不再赘述。The grouping management module 106 and the signal measurement module 107 in the foregoing FIG. 1D may be specifically the processor 1101 in this embodiment, and therefore the specific implementation of the processor 1101 will not be described again. The transceiver module 105 in the aforementioned FIG. 1D may specifically be the transceiver 1103 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 1103 will not be described again.
本申请实施例还提供一种第四STA,请参阅图12,本申请实施例中第四STA1200的另一个结构示意图。This embodiment of the present application further provides a fourth STA. Please refer to FIG. 12 , which is another schematic structural diagram of the fourth STA 1200 in the embodiment of the present application.
该第四STA1200包括:处理器1201、存储器1202和收发器1203。The fourth STA 1200 includes: a processor 1201 , a memory 1202 and a transceiver 1203 .
该处理器1201、存储器1202和收发器1203分别通过总线相连,该存储器中存储有计算机指令。The processor 1201, the memory 1202 and the transceiver 1203 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
前述图1E中的处理模块109和信号测量模块110具体可以是本实施例中的处理器1201,因此该处理器1201的具体实现不再赘述。前述图1E中的收发模块108则具体可以是本实施例中的收发器1203,因此收发器1203的具体实现不再赘述。The aforementioned processing module 109 and the signal measurement module 110 in FIG. 1E may specifically be the processor 1201 in this embodiment, so the specific implementation of the processor 1201 will not be described again. The transceiver module 108 in the aforementioned FIG. 1E may specifically be the transceiver 1203 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 1203 will not be described again.
本申请实施例还提供一种网络管理系统,请参阅图13,该网络管理系统包括如图1B所示的服务器、图1C所示的控制设备、图1D所示的AP和图1E所示的STA。An embodiment of the present application further provides a network management system, please refer to FIG. 13 , the network management system includes the server shown in FIG. 1B , the control device shown in FIG. 1C , the AP shown in FIG. STA.
图1B所示的服务器用于执行上述图3所示的实施例中第一通信装置执行的部分或全部步骤,用于执行上述图4A所示的实施例中的服务器执行的部分或全部步骤。The server shown in FIG. 1B is configured to perform some or all of the steps performed by the first communication apparatus in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , and is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the server in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A .
图1C所示的控制设备用于执行上述图4A所示的实施例中控制设备执行的部分或全部步骤。The control device shown in FIG. 1C is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the control device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4A described above.
图1D所示的AP用于执行上述图4A所述的实施例中第二AP执行的部分或全部步骤。The AP shown in FIG. 1D is configured to perform some or all of the steps performed by the second AP in the embodiment described in FIG. 4A .
图1E所示的STA用于执行上述图4A所示的实施例中第四STA执行的步骤407b至步骤407e。具体请参阅前述图3和图4A所示的实施例的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。The STA shown in FIG. 1E is configured to perform steps 407b to 407e performed by the fourth STA in the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4A . For details, please refer to the related introductions of the embodiments shown in the foregoing FIG. 3 and FIG. 4A , which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供一种网络管理系统,请参阅图14,该网络管理系统包括如图2B所示的第一AP和图2C所示的第二STA。An embodiment of the present application further provides a network management system, please refer to FIG. 14 , the network management system includes the first AP shown in FIG. 2B and the second STA shown in FIG. 2C .
图2B所示的第一AP用于执行上述图5A、图6A、图7和图8A所示的实施例中第一AP执行的部分或全部步骤。The first AP shown in FIG. 2B is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the first AP in the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A , FIG. 6A , FIG. 7 and FIG. 8A .
可选的,该网络管理系统还包括第四AP,该第四AP用于执行上述图5A所示的实施例中的第四AP执行的部分或全部步骤。Optionally, the network management system further includes a fourth AP, where the fourth AP is configured to perform some or all of the steps performed by the fourth AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A .
该第四AP包括第五AP和第六AP。第五AP用于执行上述图5A所示的实施例中第五AP执行的部分或全部步骤,第六AP用于执行上述图5A所示的实施例中第六AP执行的部分或全部步骤。The fourth AP includes a fifth AP and a sixth AP. The fifth AP is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the fifth AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A , and the sixth AP is used to perform some or all of the steps performed by the sixth AP in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5A .
具体请参阅前述图5A、图6A、图7和图8A所示的实施例的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。For details, please refer to the related introductions of the embodiments shown in FIG. 5A , FIG. 6A , FIG. 7 , and FIG. 8A , which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例提供一种包括指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行如图3、图4A、图5A、图6A、图7和图8A中任一种的实现方式。An embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product including instructions, which is characterized in that, when it runs on a computer, the computer is made to execute any one of FIGS. 3, 4A, 5A, 6A, 7, and 8A. an implementation.
本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机指令,当该指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如图3、图4A、图5A、图6A和图7的任一种实现方式。The embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium, including computer instructions, when the instructions are executed on a computer, the computer can execute any one of the implementations shown in FIG. 3 , FIG. 4A , FIG. 5A , FIG. 6A , and FIG. 7 . .
本申请实施例提供一种芯片装置,包括处理器,用于调用该存储器中的计算机程序或计算机指令,以使得该处理器执行上述图3、图4A、图5A、图6A、图7和图8A中的任一种实现方式。An embodiment of the present application provides a chip device, including a processor for invoking a computer program or computer instruction in the memory, so that the processor executes the above-mentioned FIG. 3 , FIG. 4A , FIG. 5A , FIG. 6A , FIG. 7 and FIG. Any of the implementations in 8A.
可选的,该芯片装置还包括存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程度或计算机指令等。该芯片装置由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。Optionally, the chip device further includes a memory, and the memory is used for storing computer programs or computer instructions. The chip arrangement is composed of chips, and may also include chips and other discrete devices.
可选的,该处理器通过接口与该存储器耦合。Optionally, the processor is coupled to the memory through an interface.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above may refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The integrated unit, if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solutions of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
以上所述,以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的精神和范围。As mentioned above, the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, but not to limit them; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand: The technical solutions described in the embodiments are modified, or some technical features thereof are equivalently replaced; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions deviate from the spirit and scope of the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application.

Claims (36)

  1. 一种网络管理方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A network management method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    第一通信装置获取第一信道参数信息,所述第一信道参数信息包括第一网络中的第一AP与所述第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;The first communication device acquires first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between a first AP in the first network and a STA within a signal coverage of the first AP;
    所述第一通信装置根据所述第一信道参数信息对所述第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,所述第一STA包括所述第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA中的部分或全部STA;The first communication apparatus groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, and the first STA includes STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP some or all of the STAs in;
    所述第一通信装置发送所述多个分组的分组结果,所述分组结果用于指示所述多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA。The first communication apparatus sends grouping results of the multiple groups, where the grouping results are used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
  2. 一种第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一通信装置包括:A first communication device, characterized in that the first communication device comprises:
    收发模块,用于获取第一信道参数信息,所述第一信道参数信息包括第一网络中的第一AP与所述第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;a transceiver module, configured to acquire first channel parameter information, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the first AP in the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP;
    分组模块,用于根据所述第一信道参数信息对所述第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,所述第一STA包括所述第一AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA中的部分或全部STA;a grouping module, configured to group the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, and the first STA includes STAs within the signal coverage of the first AP part or all of the STA;
    所述收发模块,用于发送所述多个分组的分组结果,所述分组结果用于指示所述多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA。The transceiver module is configured to send grouping results of the multiple groups, where the grouping results are used to indicate APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法或权利要求2所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一通信装置为服务器,所述第一AP包括所述第一网络的所有AP,所述第一STA包括所述第一网络的所有STA;所述第一通信装置获取第一信道参数信息,包括:The method according to claim 1 or the first communication device according to claim 2, wherein the first communication device is a server, the first AP includes all APs of the first network, and the The first STA includes all STAs of the first network; the first communication device obtains the first channel parameter information, including:
    所述服务器接收控制设备发送的所述第一信道参数信息,所述第一信道参数信息包括所述第一网络的所有AP中每个AP与所述每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息,所述第一网络为所述控制设备控制的网络;The server receives the first channel parameter information sent by the control device, where the first channel parameter information includes the difference between each AP in all APs of the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP. The channel parameter information between the two, the first network is a network controlled by the control device;
    所述第一通信装置发送所述多个分组的分组结果,包括:The first communication device sends the grouping results of the multiple groups, including:
    所述服务器向所述控制设备发送所述多个分组的分组结果。The server sends the grouping results of the plurality of groups to the control device.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法或权利要求3所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W,所述信道矩阵W为K行乘以L列的矩阵,K为所述第一网络包括的STA数目,L为所述第一网络包括的AP数目,所述信道矩阵
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100001
    w ij为第i个STA与第j个AP之间的信道增益,i为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的整数,j为大于或等于1且小于或等于L的整数;
    The method according to claim 3 or the first communication device according to claim 3, wherein the first channel parameter information comprises a channel matrix W, and the channel matrix W is a matrix of K rows multiplied by L columns , K is the number of STAs included in the first network, L is the number of APs included in the first network, and the channel matrix
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100001
    w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L;
    所述第一通信装置根据所述第一信道参数信息对所述第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,包括:The first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, including:
    所述服务器根据所述信道矩阵W计算得到第一中间矩阵D,所述第一中间矩阵
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100002
    D 1为K行乘以K列的矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100003
    D 1的主对角线上的 元素a i为所述第一网络中的第i个STA分别与所述第一网络中的所有AP之间的信道增益之和,D 1的非对角线上的元素均为零;D 2为L行乘以L列的矩阵,
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100004
    D 2的主对角线上的元素b j为所述第一网络中的第j个AP分别与所述第一网络中的所有STA之间的信道增益之和,0 K×L为K行乘以L列的矩阵,0 K×L中的元素均为零,0 L×K为L行乘以K列的矩阵,0 L×K中的元素均为零;
    The server calculates and obtains a first intermediate matrix D according to the channel matrix W, and the first intermediate matrix
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100002
    D 1 is a matrix with K rows by K columns,
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100003
    The element a i on the main diagonal of D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, respectively, and the off-diagonal line of D 1 The elements on are all zero; D 2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns,
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100004
    The element b j on the main diagonal of D2 is the sum of the channel gains between the jth AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, and 0 K×L is the K row Multiplied by a matrix of L columns, the elements in 0 K×L are all zero, and 0 L×K is a matrix of L rows multiplied by K columns, and the elements in 0 L×K are all zero;
    所述服务器根据所述信道矩阵W和所述第一中间矩阵D确定第二中间矩阵,所述第二中间矩阵中的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,所述网络节点为所述第一网络中的STA或AP;The server determines a second intermediate matrix according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D, each row vector in the second intermediate matrix corresponds to a network node, and the network node is the first network STA or AP in ;
    所述服务器根据聚类算法对所述第二中间矩阵的行向量进行聚类,得到第一聚类结果,所述第一聚类结果包括多个簇的行向量,所述多个簇中的一个簇对应所述多个分组中的一个分组;The server performs clustering on the row vectors of the second intermediate matrix according to a clustering algorithm, and obtains a first clustering result, where the first clustering result includes row vectors of a plurality of clusters. One cluster corresponds to one of the multiple groups;
    所述服务器根据所述多个簇的行向量确定所述多个分组分别包括的网络节点。The server determines the network nodes respectively included in the plurality of groups according to the row vectors of the plurality of clusters.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法或权利要求4所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述信道矩阵W为带权二分图的边权矩阵W,所述带权二分图包括第一类型顶点和第二类型顶点,所述第一类型顶点表示所述第一网络中的STA,所述第二类型顶点表示所述第一网络中的AP,所述边权矩阵W的元素为所述带权二分图的边权,所述带权二分图的边权为所述第一网络中的STA与AP之间的信道增益,所述第一中间矩阵为所述带权二分图的度矩阵。The method according to claim 4 or the first communication device according to claim 4, wherein the channel matrix W is an edge weight matrix W of a weighted bipartite graph, and the weighted bipartite graph includes the first type vertices and second type vertices, the first type vertices represent STAs in the first network, the second type vertices represent APs in the first network, and the elements of the edge weight matrix W are the The edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph, where the edge weight of the weighted bipartite graph is the channel gain between the STA and the AP in the first network, and the first intermediate matrix is the degree matrix of the weighted bipartite graph .
  6. 根据权利要求4或5所述的方法,或,权利要求4或5所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述服务器根据所述信道矩阵W和所述第一中间矩阵D确定第二中间矩阵,包括:The method according to claim 4 or 5, or the first communication device according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the server determines the second Intermediate matrix, including:
    所述服务器根据所述信道矩阵W和所述第一中间矩阵D确定第三中间矩阵R,
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100005
    W T为W的转置;
    The server determines a third intermediate matrix R according to the channel matrix W and the first intermediate matrix D,
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100005
    W T is the transpose of W;
    所述服务器对所述第三中间矩阵R进行奇异值分解,得到所述第三中间矩阵R的左奇异矩阵U和所述第三中间矩阵R的右奇异矩阵V;其中,所述第三中间矩阵R=UΣV T,所述Σ为对角矩阵,所述V T为所述右奇异矩阵V的转置; The server performs singular value decomposition on the third intermediate matrix R to obtain a left singular matrix U of the third intermediate matrix R and a right singular matrix V of the third intermediate matrix R; wherein, the third intermediate matrix R Matrix R=UΣV T , the Σ is a diagonal matrix, and the V T is the transpose of the right singular matrix V;
    所述对角矩阵Σ的第r列向量上对应的主对角线元素为所述左奇异矩阵U的第r列向量对应的奇异值,所述对角矩阵Σ的第r列向量上对应的主对角线元素为右奇异矩阵V的第r列向量对应的奇异值,所述r为大于或等于1且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,所述min(K,L)指取所述K和所述L中最小值;The main diagonal elements corresponding to the r-th column vector of the diagonal matrix Σ are the singular values corresponding to the r-th column vector of the left singular matrix U, and the corresponding main diagonal elements of the r-th column vector of the diagonal matrix Σ The main diagonal element is the singular value corresponding to the rth column vector of the right singular matrix V, where r is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to min(K, L), where min(K, L) refers to Take the minimum value among the K and the L;
    所述服务器按照所述对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从所述左奇异矩阵U中选取对应的M个列向量,得到第四中间矩阵U M,以及按照所述对角矩阵Σ中的奇异值大小顺序从大到小从所述右奇异矩阵V中选取对应M个列向量,得到第五中间矩阵V M,所述M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,所述log 2(K+L)指以2为底 数对K+L求对数; The server selects the corresponding M column vectors from the left singular matrix U in descending order of the singular values in the diagonal matrix Σ to obtain a fourth intermediate matrix U M , and according to the diagonal matrix Σ The size of the singular values in the matrix Σ is from large to small, and corresponding M column vectors are selected from the right singular matrix V to obtain a fifth intermediate matrix V M , where M is greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and an integer less than or equal to min(K, L), the log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2;
    所述服务器根据所述第四中间矩阵、所述第五中间矩阵和所述第一中间矩阵计算得到所述第二中间矩阵Z,所述
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100006
    The server calculates and obtains the second intermediate matrix Z according to the fourth intermediate matrix, the fifth intermediate matrix and the first intermediate matrix, and the
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100006
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法或权利要求6所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一通信装置根据聚类算法对所述第二中间矩阵的行向量进行聚类,得到第一聚类结果,包括:The method according to claim 6 or the first communication device according to claim 6, wherein the first communication device performs clustering on the row vectors of the second intermediate matrix according to a clustering algorithm to obtain the first communication device. A clustering result, including:
    所述服务器根据聚类算法对所述第二中间矩阵
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100007
    包括的K+L个行向量进行聚类,得到多个簇的行向量,所述多个簇中的一个簇对应所述多个分组中的一个分组;
    The second intermediate matrix is processed by the server according to a clustering algorithm.
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100007
    The included K+L row vectors are clustered to obtain row vectors of multiple clusters, and one of the multiple clusters corresponds to one of the multiple groups;
    所述服务器根据所述多个簇的行向量确定所述多个分组分别包括的网络节点,包括:The server determines the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters, including:
    所述服务器将多个簇的行向量中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。The server divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the row vectors of the multiple clusters into the same group.
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的方法或权利要求2所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一通信装置为所述第一AP,所述第一STA包括所述第一AP的信号覆盖范围内与所述第一AP已建立连接的STA;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or the first communication apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the first communication apparatus is the first AP, and the first STA includes a signal of the first AP An STA that has established a connection with the first AP within the coverage; the method further includes:
    所述第一AP根据所述第一AP所属的分组调整所述第一AP连接的STA。The first AP adjusts the STA connected to the first AP according to the group to which the first AP belongs.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法或权利要求8所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一AP为所述第一网络中的第p个AP,所述第一信道参数信息包括信道矩阵W的第p个列向量,所述信道矩阵
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100008
    w ij为第i个STA与第j个AP之间的信道增益,i为大于或等于1且小于或等于K的整数,j为大于或等于1且小于或等于L的整数,所述p为小于或等于所述L的整数,所述L为所述第一网络包括的AP数目,所述K为所述第一网络包括的STA数目;
    The method according to claim 8 or the first communication device according to claim 8, wherein the first AP is the pth AP in the first network, and the first channel parameter information includes the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the channel matrix
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100008
    w ij is the channel gain between the ith STA and the jth AP, i is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, j is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to L, and p is an integer less than or equal to the L, where L is the number of APs included in the first network, and K is the number of STAs included in the first network;
    所述第一通信装置根据所述第一信道参数信息对所述第一AP和第一STA进行分组,得到多个分组,包括:The first communication device groups the first AP and the first STA according to the first channel parameter information to obtain multiple groups, including:
    所述第一AP根据所述信道矩阵W的第p个列向量计算得到第一中间矩阵D的第p+K个主对角线元素b pThe first AP calculates the p+Kth main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D according to the pth column vector of the channel matrix W;
    其中,所述第一中间矩阵
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100009
    所述D 1为K行乘以K列的矩阵,所述
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100010
    所述D 1的主对角线上的元素a i为所述第一网络中的第i个STA与所述第一网络中的所有AP之间的信道增益之和,所述D 1的非对角线上的元素均为零;所述 D 2为L行乘以L列的矩阵,所述
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100011
    所述D 2的主对角线上的元素b j为所述第一网络中的第j个AP与所述第一网络中的所有STA之间的信道增益之和,0 K×L为乘以L列的矩阵,0 K×L中的元素均为零,0 L×K为L行乘以K列的矩阵,0 L×K中的元素均为零;
    wherein the first intermediate matrix
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100009
    The D1 is a matrix of K rows by K columns, the
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100010
    The element a i on the main diagonal of the D 1 is the sum of the channel gains between the i-th STA in the first network and all APs in the first network, and the non-value of the D 1 The elements on the diagonal are all zero; the D2 is a matrix of L rows by L columns, the
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100011
    The element b j on the main diagonal of the D 2 is the sum of the channel gains between the j-th AP in the first network and all STAs in the first network, and 0 K × L is the multiplication Taking a matrix of L columns, the elements in 0 K×L are all zero, and 0 L×K is a matrix of L rows multiplied by K columns, and the elements in 0 L×K are all zero;
    所述第一AP获取所述第一中间矩阵D的前K个主对角线元素;The first AP acquires the first K main diagonal elements of the first intermediate matrix D;
    所述第一AP根据所述信道矩阵W的第p个列向量、所述第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和所述第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量和第K+p行向量,所述第六中间矩阵Q的每个行向量对应一个网络节点,所述网络节点为所述第一网络中的AP或STA,所述第六中间矩阵Q的第i个行向量为第i个STA对应的行向量,所述第六中间矩阵Q的第K+j个行向量为第j个AP对应的行向量; The first AP is based on the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K in the first intermediate matrix D The main diagonal elements determine the first K row vectors and the K+pth row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q, each row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q corresponds to a network node, and the network node is the first AP or STA in the network, the i-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the row vector corresponding to the i-th STA, and the K+j-th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q is the j-th AP the corresponding row vector;
    所述第一AP根据聚类算法对目标行向量进行聚类,得到第二聚类结果;The first AP performs clustering on the target row vector according to a clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result;
    其中,所述目标行向量包括与所述第一AP对应的所述第K+p行向量以及所述第六中间矩阵Q的前K个行向量中与所述第一STA对应的行向量,所述第二聚类结果包括多个簇的行向量,所述多个簇中一个簇对应所述多个分组的一个分组;Wherein, the target row vector includes the K+p th row vector corresponding to the first AP and the row vector corresponding to the first STA in the first K row vectors of the sixth intermediate matrix Q, The second clustering result includes row vectors of a plurality of clusters, and one cluster in the plurality of clusters corresponds to one grouping of the plurality of groups;
    所述第一AP根据所述多个簇的行向量确定所述多个分组分别包括的网络节点。The first AP determines network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法或权利要求9所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一AP根据所述信道矩阵W的第p个行向量、所述第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和所述第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第六中间矩阵Q的前K行向量和第K+p行向量,包括: The method according to claim 9 or the first communication device according to claim 9, wherein the first AP is based on the p-th row vector of the channel matrix W, the first intermediate matrix D The p+K th main diagonal element b p and the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D determine the first K row vectors and the K+p th row vector of the sixth intermediate matrix Q, including:
    所述第一AP根据所述信道矩阵W的第p个列向量、所述第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p和所述第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素确定第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100012
    所述第二中间矩阵
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100013
    所述W T为所述W转置;
    The first AP is based on the p-th column vector of the channel matrix W, the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, and the first K in the first intermediate matrix D The main diagonal elements determine the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100012
    the second intermediate matrix
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100013
    The W T is the W transpose;
    所述第一AP根据随机梯度下降算法和所述第三中间矩阵R的第p个行向量
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100014
    确定第一矩阵X M的p个行向量和第二矩阵Y M,所述第一矩阵X M与第三矩阵的近似度大于或等于第一预设阈值,所述第二矩阵Y M与第四矩阵的近似度大于或等于第二预设阈值;
    The first AP is based on the stochastic gradient descent algorithm and the p-th row vector of the third intermediate matrix R
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100014
    Determine the p row vectors of the first matrix X M and the second matrix Y M , the degree of approximation between the first matrix X M and the third matrix is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold, and the second matrix Y M and the third matrix The degree of approximation of the four matrices is greater than or equal to the second preset threshold;
    其中,所述第三矩阵为从所述第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的左奇异矩阵选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,所述左奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,所述第三矩阵的M个列向量为从所述左奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量;The third matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the left singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the left singular matrix has a corresponding Singular values, the M column vectors of the third matrix are M column vectors selected from the left singular matrix in the order of size of the singular values from large to small;
    所述第四矩阵为从所述第三中间矩阵R经过奇异值分解得到的右奇异矩阵中选取的M个列向量得到的矩阵,所述右奇异矩阵中的每个列向量都有对应的奇异值,所述第四矩阵的M个列向量为从所述右奇异矩阵中按照奇异值大小顺序从大到小选取的M个列向量;The fourth matrix is a matrix obtained by selecting M column vectors from the right singular matrix obtained by singular value decomposition of the third intermediate matrix R, and each column vector in the right singular matrix has a corresponding singular value, the M column vectors of the fourth matrix are the M column vectors selected from the right singular matrix in the order of the size of the singular values from large to small;
    所述M为大于或等于log 2(K+L)且小于或等于min(K,L)的整数,所述log 2(K+L)指 以2为底数对K+L求对数,所述min(K,L)指取所述K和所述L中的最小值; The M is an integer greater than or equal to log 2 (K+L) and less than or equal to min(K, L), and the log 2 (K+L) refers to the logarithm of K+L with the base 2, so The min(K, L) refers to the minimum value of the K and the L;
    所述第一AP根据所述第一中间矩阵D的第p+K主对角线元素b p、所述第一中间矩阵D中的前K个主对角线元素、所述第一矩阵X M的第p个行向量和所述第二矩阵Y M计算得到第六中间矩阵
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100015
    的前K行向量和第K+p行向量。
    The first AP is based on the p+K-th main diagonal element b p of the first intermediate matrix D, the first K main diagonal elements in the first intermediate matrix D, and the first matrix X The p-th row vector of M and the second matrix Y M are calculated to obtain the sixth intermediate matrix
    Figure PCTCN2021121527-appb-100015
    The first K row vector and the K+pth row vector of .
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法或权利要求10所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一AP根据聚类算法对目标行向量进行聚类,得到第二聚类结果,包括;The method according to claim 10 or the first communication device according to claim 10, wherein the first AP performs clustering on the target row vector according to a clustering algorithm to obtain a second clustering result, comprising:
    所述第一AP根据第一随机种子生成第一聚类中心,所述第一聚类中心包括所述多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,每个簇对应一个聚类中心;The first AP generates a first cluster center according to the first random seed, the first cluster center includes the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters respectively, and each cluster corresponds to a cluster center;
    所述第一AP根据所述第一聚类中心确定所述目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇,得到所述多个簇中每个簇包括的行向量;The first AP determines the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs according to the first cluster center, and obtains the row vector included in each cluster in the multiple clusters;
    所述第一AP根据所述多个簇的行向量确定所述多个分组分别包括的网络节点,包括:The first AP determines the network nodes respectively included in the multiple groups according to the row vectors of the multiple clusters, including:
    当满足第一预设条件时,所述第一AP将所述多个簇中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。When the first preset condition is satisfied, the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法或权利要求11所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,当不满足所述第一预设条件时,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11 or the first communication device according to claim 11, wherein when the first preset condition is not satisfied, the method further comprises:
    所述第一AP根据流言gossip协议计算所述多个簇中每个簇的行向量对应的第一平均向量;The first AP calculates the first average vector corresponding to the row vector of each cluster in the multiple clusters according to the gossip protocol;
    所述第一AP将所述多个簇中每个簇的行向量的第一平均向量分别作为所述多个簇分别对应的聚类中心,得到第二聚类中心;The first AP uses the first average vector of the row vectors of each of the multiple clusters as the cluster centers corresponding to the multiple clusters, respectively, to obtain the second cluster center;
    所述第一AP根据所述第二聚类中心确定所述目标行向量中的每个行向量所属的簇;The first AP determines the cluster to which each row vector in the target row vector belongs according to the second cluster center;
    当满足所述第二预设条件时,所述第一AP将所述多个簇中同一簇的行向量对应的网络节点划分到同一分组中。When the second preset condition is satisfied, the first AP divides the network nodes corresponding to the row vector of the same cluster in the multiple clusters into the same group.
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,或,权利要求11或12所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一预设条件包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, or the first communication device according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the first preset condition comprises:
    所述多个分组分别对应的簇的聚类中心的更新次数大于或等于第三预设阈值。The update times of the cluster centers of the clusters corresponding to the multiple groups respectively is greater than or equal to a third preset threshold.
  14. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,或,权利要求11或12所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一预设条件包括:The method according to claim 11 or 12, or the first communication device according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the first preset condition comprises:
    第一收敛精度小于或等于预设的收敛精度;The first convergence accuracy is less than or equal to the preset convergence accuracy;
    其中,所述第一收敛精度为第一差值的绝对值与所述第一全局误差的比值,所述第一差值为所述第一全局误差与预设的初始化误差的差值;Wherein, the first convergence accuracy is the ratio of the absolute value of the first difference to the first global error, and the first difference is the difference between the first global error and a preset initialization error;
    所述第一全局误差为所述第一网络中的所有AP分别计算得到的第一局部误差的和;The first global error is the sum of the first local errors calculated respectively by all APs in the first network;
    所述第一AP的第一局部误差包括所述第一AP确定的所述多个簇每个簇对应的误差的和;The first local error of the first AP includes a sum of errors corresponding to each of the multiple clusters determined by the first AP;
    所述每个簇对应的误差为所述每个簇包括的行向量分别与所述每个簇对应的第一平均 向量之间的误差的和;所述每个簇对应的第一平均向量为所述第一AP根据流言gossip协议计算得到的。The error corresponding to each cluster is the sum of the errors between the row vector included in each cluster and the first average vector corresponding to each cluster; the first average vector corresponding to each cluster is The first AP is calculated according to the gossip protocol.
  15. 根据权利要求8至14中任一项所述的方法,或,权利要求8至14中任一项所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一AP根据所述第一AP所属的分组调整所述第一AP连接的STA,包括:The method according to any one of claims 8 to 14, or the first communication device according to any one of claims 8 to 14, wherein the first AP is based on the information that the first AP belongs to The grouping adjustment of the STA connected to the first AP includes:
    所述第一AP发送所述第一AP所属的分组的信息,所述第一AP所属的分组的信息用于所述第一网络中的STA判断是否接入第一AP。The first AP sends the information of the group to which the first AP belongs, and the information of the group to which the first AP belongs is used for the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the first AP.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,或,权利要求15所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一AP所属的分组的信息包括所述第一AP所属的分组的第一分组编号;所述第一AP发送所述第一AP所属的分组的信息,包括:The method according to claim 15, or the first communication device according to claim 15, wherein the information of the group to which the first AP belongs includes a first group number of the group to which the first AP belongs ; The first AP sends the information of the group to which the first AP belongs, including:
    所述第一AP发送第一信标帧,所述第一信标帧携带所述第一分组编号。The first AP sends a first beacon frame, where the first beacon frame carries the first group number.
  17. 根据权利要求8至14中任一项所述的方法,或,权利要求8至14中任一项所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一AP根据所述第一AP所属的分组调整所述第一AP连接的STA,包括:The method according to any one of claims 8 to 14, or the first communication device according to any one of claims 8 to 14, wherein the first AP is based on the information that the first AP belongs to The grouping adjustment of the STA connected to the first AP includes:
    所述第一AP判断与所述第一AP已建立连接的第二STA是否属于同一分组;The first AP determines whether the second STA that has established a connection with the first AP belongs to the same group;
    若是,则所述第一AP保持为所述第二STA提供服务;If so, the first AP keeps providing services for the second STA;
    若否,则所述第一AP确定所述第二STA所属的分组,并向第三AP发送第一指示信息;If not, the first AP determines the group to which the second STA belongs, and sends the first indication information to the third AP;
    所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第三AP为所述第二STA提供服务,所述第三AP与所述第二STA属于同一分组。The first indication information is used to indicate that the third AP provides services for the second STA, and the third AP and the second STA belong to the same group.
  18. 根据权利要求8至17中任一项所述的方法,或,权利要求8至17中任一项所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8 to 17, or the first communication device according to any one of claims 8 to 17, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一AP接收第四AP发送的第一分组信息,所述第一分组信息包括所述第四AP所属的分组信息和所述第四AP的标识,所述第四AP包括所述第一网络中除所述第一AP之外的AP;The first AP receives first group information sent by a fourth AP, where the first group information includes group information to which the fourth AP belongs and an identifier of the fourth AP, and the fourth AP includes the first group information. APs other than the first AP in a network;
    所述第一AP根据所述第一分组信息确定第五AP与所述第一AP属于同一分组,所述第五AP为所述第四AP中的部分AP;The first AP determines, according to the first grouping information, that a fifth AP and the first AP belong to the same group, and the fifth AP is a part of the APs in the fourth AP;
    所述第一AP根据所述第五AP的标识、所述第一AP的标识和预设的AP优先级规则判断所述第一AP的优先级是否高于所述第五AP的优先级;The first AP determines whether the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP according to the identifier of the fifth AP, the identifier of the first AP and a preset AP priority rule;
    若所述第一AP的优先级高于所述第五AP的优先级,则所述第一AP通过扫描信道选择第一信道,并将所述第一AP接入的信道调整为所述第一信道;If the priority of the first AP is higher than the priority of the fifth AP, the first AP selects the first channel by scanning channels, and adjusts the channel accessed by the first AP to the first channel a channel;
    所述第一AP向所述第五AP发送第一信道分配信息,所述第一信道分配信息用于指示所述第五AP接入所述第一信道。The first AP sends first channel allocation information to the fifth AP, where the first channel allocation information is used to instruct the fifth AP to access the first channel.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,或,权利要求18所述的第一通信装置,其特征在于,若所述第一AP的优先级低于所述第五AP的优先级,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 18, or the first communication device according to claim 18, wherein if the priority of the first AP is lower than the priority of the fifth AP, the method further include:
    所述第一AP接收第六AP发送第二信道分配信息,所述第二信道分配信息为所述第六AP选择的第二信道的信息,所述第六AP为所述第五AP中优先级最高的AP;The first AP receives the second channel allocation information sent by the sixth AP, the second channel allocation information is the information of the second channel selected by the sixth AP, and the sixth AP is the priority among the fifth APs AP with the highest level;
    所述第一AP根据所述第二信道分配信息将所述第一AP接入的信道调整为所述第二信 道。The first AP adjusts the channel accessed by the first AP to the second channel according to the second channel allocation information.
  20. 一种网络管理方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A network management method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    控制设备向服务器发送第一信道参数信息,所述第一信道参数信息包括第一网络的所有AP中每个AP与所述每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息,所述第一网络为所述控制设备控制的网络;The control device sends first channel parameter information to the server, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between each AP in all APs of the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP, and the the first network is a network controlled by the control device;
    所述控制设备接收服务器多个分组的分组结果,所述多个分组包括所述第一网络中的所有STA和所有AP;receiving, by the control device, grouping results of a plurality of groups from the server, the plurality of groups including all STAs and all APs in the first network;
    所述控制设备根据所述分组结果确定所述多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA;The control device determines, according to the grouping result, APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups;
    所述控制设备发送第二分组信息,所述第二分组信息包括所述第一网络的AP分别所属的分组的信息和所述第一网络的STA分别所属的分组的信息。The control device sends second group information, where the second group information includes information of groups to which APs of the first network respectively belong and information of groups to which STAs of the first network respectively belong.
  21. 一种控制设备,其特征在于,所述控制设备包括:A control device, characterized in that the control device comprises:
    收发模块,用于向服务器发送第一信道参数信息,所述第一信道参数信息包括第一网络的所有AP中每个AP与所述每个AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息,所述第一网络为所述控制设备控制的网络;接收服务器多个分组的分组结果,所述多个分组包括所述第一网络中的所有STA和所有AP;A transceiver module, configured to send first channel parameter information to the server, where the first channel parameter information includes channel parameters between each AP in all APs of the first network and the STAs within the signal coverage of each AP information, the first network is a network controlled by the control device; receive grouping results of multiple groups from the server, where the multiple groups include all STAs and all APs in the first network;
    分组管理模块,用于根据所述分组结果确定所述多个分组中每个分组包括的AP和STA;a grouping management module, configured to determine APs and STAs included in each of the multiple groups according to the grouping result;
    所述收发模块,用于发送第二分组信息,所述第二分组信息包括所述第一网络的AP分别所属的分组的信息和所述第一网络的STA分别所属的分组的信息。The transceiver module is configured to send second grouping information, where the second grouping information includes information about groups to which APs of the first network respectively belong and information about groups to which STAs of the first network respectively belong.
  22. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,或,权利要求21所述的控制设备,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 20, or the control device according to claim 21, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述控制设备为所述多个分组中同一分组的AP分配相同的信道;The control device allocates the same channel to APs in the same group in the multiple groups;
    所述控制设备发送第二分组信息,包括:The control device sends the second grouping information, including:
    所述控制设备发送所述第二分组信息,所述第二分组信息包括所述多个分组分别对应的信道分配信息。The control device sends the second grouping information, where the second grouping information includes channel allocation information respectively corresponding to the multiple groups.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,或,权利要求22所述的控制设备,其特征在于,所述控制设备为所述多个分组中同一分组的AP分配相同的信道,包括:The method according to claim 22, or the control device according to claim 22, wherein the control device allocates the same channel to APs in the same group in the multiple groups, comprising:
    所述控制设备根据所述第一信道参数信息为所述多个分组中每个分组的AP分配相应的信道,其中,所述控制设备为同一分组的AP分配的信道相同。The control device allocates a corresponding channel to the APs in each group of the multiple groups according to the first channel parameter information, wherein the control device allocates the same channel to the APs in the same group.
  24. 一种网络管理方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A network management method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    第二接入点AP向控制设备发送第二信道参数信息,所述第二信道参数信息包括所述第二AP与所述第二AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;The second access point AP sends second channel parameter information to the control device, where the second channel parameter information includes channel parameter information between the second AP and STAs within the signal coverage of the second AP;
    所述第二AP接收所述控制设备发送的第二分组信息,所述第二分组信息包括所述第一网络的AP分别所属的分组的信息和所述第一网络的STA分别所属的分组的信息;The second AP receives second grouping information sent by the control device, where the second grouping information includes information about groups to which APs of the first network belong respectively and information about groups to which STAs of the first network belong respectively. information;
    所述第二AP根据所述第二分组信息确定所述第二AP所属的分组;determining, by the second AP, the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second grouping information;
    所述第二AP根据所述第二AP所属的分组调整所述第二AP连接的STA。The second AP adjusts the STA to which the second AP is connected according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
  25. 一种第二接入点AP,其特征在于,所述第二AP包括:A second access point AP, characterized in that the second AP includes:
    收发模块,用于向控制设备发送第二信道参数信息,所述第二信道参数信息包括所述 第二AP与所述第二AP的信号覆盖范围内的STA之间的信道参数信息;接收所述控制设备发送的第二分组信息,所述第二分组信息包括所述第一网络的AP分别所属的分组的信息和所述第一网络的STA分别所属的分组的信息;a transceiver module, configured to send second channel parameter information to the control device, where the second channel parameter information includes the channel parameter information between the second AP and the STAs within the signal coverage of the second AP; second grouping information sent by the control device, where the second grouping information includes information about groups to which APs of the first network respectively belong and information about groups to which STAs of the first network respectively belong;
    分组管理模块,用于根据所述第二分组信息确定所述第二AP所属的分组;根据所述第二AP所属的分组调整所述第二AP连接的STA。A group management module, configured to determine the group to which the second AP belongs according to the second group information; and adjust the STA connected to the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs.
  26. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,或,权利要求25所述的第二AP,其特征在于,所述第二分组信息还包括第三信道分配信息,所述第三信道分配信息包括所述控制设备为所述第二AP分配的第三信道的信息;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 24, or the second AP according to claim 25, wherein the second grouping information further comprises third channel allocation information, and the third channel allocation information comprises the control information about the third channel allocated by the device to the second AP; the method further includes:
    所述第二AP根据所述第三信道分配信息将第二AP接入的信道调整为所述第三信道。The second AP adjusts the channel accessed by the second AP to the third channel according to the third channel allocation information.
  27. 根据权利要求24或26所述的方法,或,权利要求25或26所述的第二AP,其特征在于,所述第二AP根据所述第二AP所属的分组调整所述第二AP连接的STA,包括:The method according to claim 24 or 26, or the second AP according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the second AP adjusts the second AP connection according to the group to which the second AP belongs STA, including:
    所述第二AP发送所述第二AP所属的分组的信息,所述第二AP所属的分组的信息用于指示第一网络中的STA判断是否接入所述第二AP,所述第一网络为所述控制设备控制的网络。The second AP sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs, and the information of the group to which the second AP belongs is used to instruct the STA in the first network to determine whether to access the second AP. The network is a network controlled by the control device.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,或权利要求27所述的第二AP,其特征在于,所述第二AP所属的分组的信息包括所述第二AP所属的分组的第二分组编号;所述第二AP发送所述第二AP所属的分组的信息,包括:The method according to claim 27 or the second AP according to claim 27, wherein the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes a second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs; The second AP sends the information of the group to which the second AP belongs, including:
    所述第二AP发送第二信标帧,所述第二信标帧携带所述第二分组编号。The second AP sends a second beacon frame, where the second beacon frame carries the second group number.
  29. 根据权利要求24或26所述的方法,或,权利要求25或26所述第二AP,其特征在于,所述第二AP根据所述第二AP所属的分组调整所述第二AP连接的STA,包括:The method according to claim 24 or 26, or the second AP according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the second AP adjusts the connection of the second AP according to the group to which the second AP belongs. STA, including:
    所述第二AP确定所述第二AP所属的分组中包括的STA;determining, by the second AP, STAs included in the group to which the second AP belongs;
    所述第二AP判断所述第二AP和第三STA是否属于同一分组,所述第三STA为与所述第二AP已建立连接的STA;The second AP determines whether the second AP and the third STA belong to the same group, and the third STA is a STA that has established a connection with the second AP;
    若是,则所述第二AP保持为所述第三STA提供服务;If so, the second AP keeps providing services for the third STA;
    若否,则所述第二AP根据所述第三STA所属的分组确定第七AP,并向所述第七AP发送第三指示信息;If not, the second AP determines a seventh AP according to the group to which the third STA belongs, and sends third indication information to the seventh AP;
    其中,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第七AP为所述第三STA提供服务,所述第七AP与所述第三STA属于同一分组。The third indication information is used to indicate that the seventh AP provides services for the third STA, and the seventh AP and the third STA belong to the same group.
  30. 一种网络管理方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A network management method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    第四站点STA接收第二AP发送的所述第二AP所属的分组的信息;The fourth station STA receives the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and sent by the second AP;
    所述第四STA根据所述第二AP所属的分组的信息确定所述第二AP与所述第四STA属于同一分组;The fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs;
    所述第四STA将其连接的AP调整为所述第二AP。The fourth STA adjusts its connected AP to the second AP.
  31. 一种第四站点STA,其特征在于,所述第四STA包括:A fourth site STA, wherein the fourth STA includes:
    收发模块,用于接收第二AP发送的所述第二AP所属的分组的信息;a transceiver module, configured to receive the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and sent by the second AP;
    分组管理模块,用于根据所述第二AP所属的分组的信息确定所述第二AP与所述第四STA属于同一分组;将其连接的AP调整为所述第二AP。A group management module, configured to determine that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the information of the group to which the second AP belongs; and adjust the AP connected to the second AP.
  32. 根据权利要求30所述的方法,或,权利要求31所述的第四STA,其特征在于,所述第二AP所属的分组的信息包括所述第二AP所属的分组的第二分组编号;所述第四STA接收第二AP发送所述第二AP所属的分组的信息,包括:The method according to claim 30, or the fourth STA according to claim 31, wherein the information of the group to which the second AP belongs includes a second group number of the group to which the second AP belongs; The fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the second AP belongs and sent by the second AP, including:
    所述第四STA接收所述第二AP发送的第二信标帧,所述第一信标帧携带所述第二分组编号;receiving, by the fourth STA, a second beacon frame sent by the second AP, where the first beacon frame carries the second group number;
    所述第四STA根据所述第二分组编号确定所述第二AP与所述第四STA属于同一分组,包括:The fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group according to the second group number, including:
    若所述第二分组编号与所述第四STA所属的分组的分组编号一致,所述第四STA确定所述第二AP与所述第四STA属于同一分组。If the second group number is consistent with the group number of the group to which the fourth STA belongs, the fourth STA determines that the second AP and the fourth STA belong to the same group.
  33. 根据权利要求30或32所述的方法,或,权利要求31或32所述的第四STA,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 30 or 32, or the fourth STA according to claim 31 or 32, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第四STA接收第八AP发送的所述第四STA所属的分组的信息,所述第八AP为所述第四STA调整连接之前所连接的AP。The fourth STA receives the information of the group to which the fourth STA belongs and is sent by the eighth AP, where the eighth AP is the AP connected to before the fourth STA adjusts the connection.
  34. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1以及如权利要求3至19中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求20、权利要求22以及权利要求23中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求24以及如权利要求26至29中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求30、如权利要求32以及如权利要求33中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising computer instructions that, when the computer instructions are run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method as claimed in claim 1 and any one of claims 3 to 19, Alternatively, the computer is caused to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 20, 22 and 23, or the computer is caused to perform any one of claims 24 and 26 to 29. The method, or causing the computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 30, 32 and 33.
  35. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1以及如权利要求3至19中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求20、权利要求22以及权利要求23中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求24以及如权利要求26至29中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求30、如权利要求32以及如权利要求33中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product comprises computer instructions, which, when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the functions as claimed in claim 1 and any one of claims 3 to 19. The method described, or, causing the computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 20, 22 and 23, or, causing the computer to perform the method as claimed in claim 24 and as claimed in claims 26 to 29 The method of any one of, or the computer is caused to perform, the method of any one of claim 30 , claim 32 , and claim 33 .
  36. 一种芯片,其特征在于,所述芯片包括处理器,用于执行如权利要求1至18中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述芯片执行如权利要求1以及如权利要求3至19中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述芯片执行如权利要求20、权利要求22以及权利要求23中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述芯片执行如权利要求24以及如权利要求26至29中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述芯片执行如权利要求30、如权利要求32以及如权利要求33中任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized in that the chip includes a processor for executing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 18 , or making the chip execute the method according to claim 1 and claims 3 to 18 19, or cause the chip to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 20, 22 and 23, or cause the chip to perform the method as claimed in claim 24 and A method as claimed in any one of claims 26 to 29, or the chip is caused to perform a method as claimed in any one of claims 30, 32 and 33.
PCT/CN2021/121527 2020-09-30 2021-09-29 Network management method and related apparatus WO2022068842A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202011063602.3 2020-09-30
CN202011063602.3A CN114339778A (en) 2020-09-30 2020-09-30 Network management method and related device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022068842A1 true WO2022068842A1 (en) 2022-04-07

Family

ID=80949731

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/121527 WO2022068842A1 (en) 2020-09-30 2021-09-29 Network management method and related apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114339778A (en)
WO (1) WO2022068842A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105636132A (en) * 2015-12-30 2016-06-01 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Configuration method and system of wireless access point, base station, and user terminal
US20160156396A1 (en) * 2010-12-22 2016-06-02 Intel Corporation Mu-mimo access point and user station including methods for multi-user group management
WO2017088145A1 (en) * 2015-11-26 2017-06-01 华为技术有限公司 Method and apparatus for performing mu-mimo transmission
CN110198181A (en) * 2018-02-27 2019-09-03 华为技术有限公司 Send the method, apparatus and storage medium of WLAN frame
CN110958663A (en) * 2019-12-11 2020-04-03 北京信息科技大学 Method for accessing D2D equipment to network, base station, wifi access site and D2D equipment

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160037559A1 (en) * 2014-07-29 2016-02-04 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and system for estimating available capacity of an access point
CN107623931B (en) * 2016-07-14 2021-11-02 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Grouping management method, device and system for multipoint cooperation
CN108011688B (en) * 2016-11-01 2020-07-07 华为技术有限公司 Method, access point and system for transmitting multi-station control frame
US10856167B2 (en) * 2018-03-30 2020-12-01 Intel Corporation Enhanced multiple access point coordination

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160156396A1 (en) * 2010-12-22 2016-06-02 Intel Corporation Mu-mimo access point and user station including methods for multi-user group management
WO2017088145A1 (en) * 2015-11-26 2017-06-01 华为技术有限公司 Method and apparatus for performing mu-mimo transmission
CN105636132A (en) * 2015-12-30 2016-06-01 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Configuration method and system of wireless access point, base station, and user terminal
CN110198181A (en) * 2018-02-27 2019-09-03 华为技术有限公司 Send the method, apparatus and storage medium of WLAN frame
CN110958663A (en) * 2019-12-11 2020-04-03 北京信息科技大学 Method for accessing D2D equipment to network, base station, wifi access site and D2D equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114339778A (en) 2022-04-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3672312B1 (en) Networking method and apparatus, network access method, and user equipment
TWI680680B (en) Method for beam management and user equipment thereof
US8942757B2 (en) Device and method for base stations dynamic clustering in mobile communication
US7400901B2 (en) WLAN having load balancing based on access point loading
CN107659977B (en) indoor heterogeneous network access selection method based on VLC
CN115334675B (en) Self-adaptive time slot allocation method of directional ad hoc network
Mohamed et al. Millimeter wave beamforming based on WiFi fingerprinting in indoor environment
EP3698581B1 (en) Interference aware transmission power control method and device for ieee 802.11 based wireless network with nodes having a directional antenna
CN113676919B (en) Network coverage enhancement method based on resource cell self-adaptive generation
CN107637135A (en) A kind of accidental access method based on isomery priority, device, equipment and system
WO2022068842A1 (en) Network management method and related apparatus
CN113811010B (en) Multi-user MIMO scheduling method and device
CN110114983B (en) Apparatus and method for supporting user communication device grouping in a communication network
WO2017190501A1 (en) Method and system for realizing communication between antenna cloud nodes in indoor high-density network
WO2017185994A1 (en) Clustering method, device and system
US10743348B2 (en) Method for multi-user transmission in wireless LAN system and wireless terminal using same
Yang et al. : Multi-Dimensional Spatial Reuse Enhancement for Directional Millimeter-Wave Wireless Networks
CN109714780A (en) Communication means, terminal and access network equipment
WO2021068990A1 (en) Beamforming report transmission method, communication nodes, and computer readable storage medium
WO2012119519A1 (en) Spatial multiplexing method, apparatus and system for allocating transmission time slots to communication link
Shah et al. Power-based leader selection in ad-hoc wireless networks
WO2022252687A1 (en) Parallel data sending method and apparatus, and device
Natkaniec et al. An Optimization of Network Performance in IEEE 802.11 ax Dense Networks
CN114615687B (en) Network resource configuration method for time delay perception
WO2023208166A1 (en) Method for timing indication and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21874497

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21874497

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1